Samsung Medical Alarms 7100 Users Manual UK_OfficeServ Call Server Programming Guide
7100 to the manual df2b25fe-4fcf-42ee-8246-a7a744abd573
2015-01-23
: Samsung Samsung-Samsung-Medical-Alarms-7100-Users-Manual-280843 samsung-samsung-medical-alarms-7100-users-manual-280843 samsung pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 407
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Ed. 00 OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide COPYRIGHT This guide is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. and is protected by copyright. No information contained herein may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated for any commercial purposes or disclosed to the third party in any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. TRADEMARKS is the trademark of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. Product names mentioned in this guide may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective companies. This guide should be read and used as a guideline for properly installing and operating the product. This guide may be changed for the system improvement, standardization and other technical reasons without prior notice. If you need updated guides or have any questions concerning the contents of the guides, contact our Document Center at the following address or Web site: Address: Document Center 18th Floor IT Center. Dong-Suwon P.O. Box 105, 416, Maetan-3dong Yeongtonggu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea 442-600 Homepage: http://www.samsungdocs.com ©2007 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide INTRODUCTION Purpose This guide describes a programming method for the OfficeServ 7100 system users. OfficeServ 7100 allows you to utilize a digital phone to simply change the system setup. Likewise, using a phone to change the system setup is called MMC(Man Machine Communication) program. This guide describes how to program a digital phone. Audience This guide is intended for users who program the MMC of the OfficeServ 7100 system. Guide Contents This guide is composed of two Chapters and Abbreviation. Each chapter is introduced as follows: CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming This chapter describes things to know before starting MMC programming and about the buttons of digital phone and cautions. CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming This chapter describes in detail how to use each MMC program. MMCs are listed in numerical order. ABBREVIATION Acronyms frequently used in this document are described. Samsung Business Communications I Ошибка! Стиль не определен. Conventions The following types of paragraphs contain special information that must be carefully read and thoroughly understood. Such information may or may not be enclosed in a rectangular box, separating it from the main text, but is always preceded by an icon and/or a bold title. WARNING Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid personal injury or fatality. CAUTION Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid a service failure or damage to the system. CHECKPOINT Provides the operator with checkpoints for stable system operation. NOTE Indicates additional information as a reference. Console Screen Output II y The lined box with ‘Courier New’ font will be used to distinguish between the main content and console output screen text. y ‘Bold Courier New’ font will indicate the value entered by the operator on the console screen. Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Reference Guides The following guides are also provided with your OfficeServ 7100 system. OfficeServ 7100 Installation Guide Describes the installation procedures and specifications for the OfficeServ 7100 system. OfficeServ 7100 General Description Describes the business features available with the OfficeServ 7100 system. WIP-5000M User Guide This is a user’s guide for the WIP-5000M mobile telephone that is designed to use the wireless LAN provided by the OfficeServ 7100 system. Revision History EDITION DATE OF ISSUE REMARKS 00 02. 2007. First Edition Samsung Business Communications III Ошибка! Стиль не определен. This page is intentionally left blank. IV Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide SAFETY CONCERNS For product safety and correct operation, the following information must be given to the operator/user and shall be read before the installation and operation. Symbols Caution Indication of a general caution Restriction Indication for prohibiting an action for a product Instruction Indication for commanding a specifically required action Samsung Business Communications V Ошибка! Стиль не определен. Warning WARNING CautionBefore using the Auto Record feature Before using the Auto Record feature, make sure that you are not violating any laws. Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature. Caution CAUTION CALL COST(MMC 508) Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate call cost. This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk card. When changing the MMC [506], [807] and [812] MMC [506], [510], [807] and [812] should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor. Compliance with the National Version Standards For the national version, OfficeServ 7100 is designed to comply with the standards of the corresponding country. Therefore, if you need to use MMC 812 (Set Country Code), please consult your dealer for advice. VI Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION I Purpose ...........................................................................................................................................I Audience ..........................................................................................................................................I Guide Contents ................................................................................................................................I Conventions ....................................................................................................................................II Console Screen Output...................................................................................................................II Reference Guides ..........................................................................................................................III Revision History .............................................................................................................................III SAFETY CONCERNS V Symbols ......................................................................................................................................... V Warning......................................................................................................................................... VI Caution ......................................................................................................................................... VI CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming 1-1 1.1 Introduction to Programming................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Digital Phones ........................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.2.1 DCS Euro Phones.......................................................................................................... 1-2 1.2.2 DS/ITP-5000 Series Phones .......................................................................................... 1-3 1.3 Cautions in Programming ........................................................................................................ 1-6 1.4 Program List by User’s Level................................................................................................... 1-7 1.4.1 Station Level Programming ............................................................................................ 1-7 1.4.2 Operator Level Programming ......................................................................................... 1-8 1.5 Programming List by Name.....................................................................................................1-16 1.6 Program List by Function........................................................................................................1-23 1.6.1 Phone Function .............................................................................................................1-23 1.6.2 Networking Function .....................................................................................................1-24 1.6.3 VoIP Function................................................................................................................1-24 1.6.4 WLAN Function .............................................................................................................1-25 1.6.5 LCR Function ................................................................................................................1-25 1.6.6 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function...............................................................................1-26 Samsung Business Communications VII Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 1.6.7 Diagnosis Function........................................................................................................1-27 1.6.8 Hotel Function ...............................................................................................................1-27 CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming 2-1 2.1 Overview of Programming Procedure ..................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Programming Procedure .......................................................................................................... 2-2 [100] STATION LOCK ................................................................................................................. 2-2 [101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE ............................................................................................ 2-4 [102] CALL FORWARD............................................................................................................... 2-5 [103] SET ANSWER MODE........................................................................................................ 2-7 [104] STATION NAME................................................................................................................. 2-9 [105] STATION SPEED DIAL.....................................................................................................2-11 [106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME..........................................................................................2-13 [107] KEY EXTENDER ..............................................................................................................2-14 [108] STATION STATUS ............................................................................................................2-16 [109] DATE DISPLAY.................................................................................................................2-18 [110] STATION ON/OFF.............................................................................................................2-20 [111] PHONE RING TONE .........................................................................................................2-23 [112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK.............................................................................................2-24 [113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER ....................................................................................................2-26 [114] PHONE VOLUME .............................................................................................................2-27 [115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE .....................................................................................2-29 [116] ALARM AND MESSAGE ...................................................................................................2-30 [117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE .....................................................................................................2-32 [118] CONFERENCE GROUP ...................................................................................................2-33 [119] CALLER ID DISPLAY........................................................................................................2-35 [120] LARGE LCD OPTIONS.....................................................................................................2-36 [121] PHONE LANGUAGE ........................................................................................................2-38 [122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED ..................................................................................................2-40 [125] EXECUTIVE STATE..........................................................................................................2-41 [199] SHOW LICENSE STATUS................................................................................................2-43 [200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING..............................................................................2-44 [201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE.................................................................................2-45 [202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE.....................................................................................2-46 [203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE ........................................................................................................2-48 [204] COMMON BELL CONTROL .............................................................................................2-49 [205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL ........................................................................................................2-50 [206] BARGE-IN TYPE ..............................................................................................................2-51 [207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT......................................................................................................2-52 VIII © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE .............................................................................................2-54 [210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT ...............................................................................2-55 [211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT .............................................................................................2-60 [214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION ....................................................................................2-61 [217] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION ............................................................................................2-62 [219] RELAY TYPE ....................................................................................................................2-64 [220] ISDN SERVICE TYPE ......................................................................................................2-65 [221] EXTENSION TYPE ...........................................................................................................2-66 [222] FAX PAIR ..........................................................................................................................2-68 [224] WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT ..........................................................................................2-69 [300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION...............................................................................2-71 [301] ASSIGN STATION COS....................................................................................................2-73 [302] PICKUP GROUPS ............................................................................................................2-75 [303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY ...........................................................................................2-76 [304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE .................................................................................2-77 [305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE .................................................................................................2-79 [306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION.................................................................................2-80 [308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE .....................................................................2-81 [309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE ...................................................................................2-82 [310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE ...............................................................................................2-83 [312] ALLOW CALLER ID ..........................................................................................................2-84 [314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL...........................................................................................2-85 [315] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION......................................................................................2-86 [316] COPY STATION USABLE.................................................................................................2-89 [317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE ....................................................................................2-90 [318] DISTINCTIVE RINGING ...................................................................................................2-91 [319] BRANCH GROUP.............................................................................................................2-93 [320] PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER..................................................................................2-94 [323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER..............................................................................................2-96 [326] RINGBACK TONE MESSAGE..........................................................................................2-97 [401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE..................................................................................................2-100 [402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE.........................................................................................................2-101 [403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS .....................................................................................................2-102 [404] TRUNK NAME ................................................................................................................2-104 [405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER .............................................................................................2-105 [406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT .........................................................................................2-106 [407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE ..........................................................................................2-107 [408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE....................................................................................2-108 [409] TRUNK STATUS READ ..................................................................................................2-109 [410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK .................................................................................................... 2-111 Samsung Business Communications IX Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL ...............................................................................................2-112 [414] MPD/PRS SIGNAL .........................................................................................................2-113 [415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA ...............................................................................2-115 [417] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION ...................................................................................................2-116 [418] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART ......................................................................................2-117 [419] BRI OPTIONS.................................................................................................................2-118 [420] PRI OPTIONS.................................................................................................................2-122 [421] MSN DIGIT .....................................................................................................................2-124 [422] TRUNK COS...................................................................................................................2-125 [423] S/T MODE.......................................................................................................................2-127 [424] BRI S0 MAPPING ...........................................................................................................2-128 [425] CID TRUNKS ..................................................................................................................2-129 [426] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL ...............................................................................................2-130 [428] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE........................................................................................2-131 [432] SET H-TRK .....................................................................................................................2-132 [433] COST RATE....................................................................................................................2-133 [434] CONNECTION STATUS .................................................................................................2-134 [436] TRUNK TMC GAIN .........................................................................................................2-137 [437] 16TRK GAIN CONTROL.................................................................................................2-138 [500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS..........................................................................................2-139 [501] SYSTEM TIMERS...........................................................................................................2-141 [502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS ................................................................................................2-147 [503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS...................................................................................................2-149 [504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO ........................................................................................2-152 [505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME ..............................................................................................2-153 [506] TONE CADENCE............................................................................................................2-154 [507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME.............................................................................................2-156 [508] CALL COST ....................................................................................................................2-158 [510] SLI RING CADENCE ......................................................................................................2-159 [511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE...................................................................................2-161 [512] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT ................................................................................................2-162 [513] HOTEL TIMER ................................................................................................................2-163 [514] TONE SOURCE..............................................................................................................2-164 [515] DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT ..............................................................................................2-165 [600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP........................................................................................2-166 [601] ASSIGN STATION GROUP ............................................................................................2-167 [602] STATION GROUP NAME................................................................................................2-172 [603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP ...............................................................................................2-173 [604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE ...............................................................................2-175 [605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE .................................................................................2-176 X © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK ................................................................................................2-177 [607] UCD OPTIONS ...............................................................................................................2-179 [608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK ..............................................................................................2-183 [609] CALL LOG BLOCK .........................................................................................................2-184 [611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING ...........................................................................................2-185 [612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE ...................................................................................2-186 [614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP .....................................................................................2-187 [615] MGI GROUP ...................................................................................................................2-188 [616] MGI USER ......................................................................................................................2-190 [700] COPY COS CONTENTS ................................................................................................2-191 [701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS .............................................................................................2-192 [702] TOLL DENY TABLE ........................................................................................................2-196 [703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE ............................................................................................2-197 [704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER .........................................................................................2-199 [705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL.....................................................................................2-200 [706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME ..................................................................................2-201 [707] AUTHORIZATION CODE................................................................................................2-203 [708] ACCOUNT CODE ...........................................................................................................2-204 [709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE ..................................................................2-205 [710] LCR DIGIT TABLE ..........................................................................................................2-207 [711] LCR TIME TABLE............................................................................................................2-208 [712] LCR ROUTE TABLE .......................................................................................................2-209 [713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE ...........................................................................................2-211 [714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION....................................................................2-213 [715] PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE...........................................................................2-216 [716] UK LCR OPTION ............................................................................................................2-217 [717] UCD AGENT ID ..............................................................................................................2-219 [718] MY AREA CODE .............................................................................................................2-220 [719] IDLE DISPLAY ................................................................................................................2-221 [720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING .........................................................................................2-222 [721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING..........................................................................2-223 [722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING ....................................................................................2-224 [723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING ....................................................................................2-228 [724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN ...............................................................................................2-230 [725] SMDR OPTIONS ............................................................................................................2-236 [727] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY ........................................................................................2-239 [728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE ............................................................................................2-240 [740] STATION PAIR................................................................................................................2-241 [746] COSTING DIAL PLAN ....................................................................................................2-242 [747] RATE CALCULATION TABLE.........................................................................................2-244 Samsung Business Communications XI Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [750] VM CARD RESTART ......................................................................................................2-246 [751] ASSIGN MAILBOX..........................................................................................................2-248 [752] AUTO RECORD..............................................................................................................2-249 [753] WARNING DESTINATION ..............................................................................................2-251 [754] VM HALT.........................................................................................................................2-252 [755] VM ALARM .....................................................................................................................2-253 [756] ASSIGN VMMOH............................................................................................................2-254 [757] VM IN/OUT .....................................................................................................................2-255 [758] VM DAY/NIGHT ..............................................................................................................2-256 [759] CLI RINGING ..................................................................................................................2-257 [760] ITEM COST TABLE ........................................................................................................2-259 [761] TAX RATE SETUP ..........................................................................................................2-261 [762] ROOM COST RATE........................................................................................................2-263 [763] SECOND LCR ................................................................................................................2-264 [800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM................................................................................2-266 [801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE .............................................................................2-267 [802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER ..........................................................................2-268 [805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN .....................................................................................................2-269 [806] CARD PRE-INSTALL ......................................................................................................2-271 [807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL.........................................................................................2-273 [810] HALT PROCESSING ......................................................................................................2-275 [811] RESET SYSTEM.............................................................................................................2-276 [812] SET COUNTRY CODE ...................................................................................................2-277 [813] HOTEL OPERATION ......................................................................................................2-278 [815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY.....................................................................................2-279 [818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ...............................................................................................2-281 [819] MC FILE CONTROL .......................................................................................................2-282 [820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID .............................................................................................2-284 [821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK ..........................................................................................2-285 [822] VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE .........................................................................................2-286 [823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS...............................................................................................2-288 [824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION ...................................................................................2-290 [825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS................................................................................2-292 [826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK.......................................................................2-294 [829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS.......................................................................................2-295 [830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS ...........................................................................................2-297 [831] MGI PARAMETERS........................................................................................................2-300 [832] VoIP ACCESS CODE......................................................................................................2-302 [833] VoIP IP TABLE ................................................................................................................2-304 [834] H.323 OPTIONS .............................................................................................................2-305 XII © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [835] MGI DSP OPTIONS........................................................................................................2-307 [836] H.323 GK OPTIONS .......................................................................................................2-310 [837] SIP OPTIONS .................................................................................................................2-312 [839] SIP USER .......................................................................................................................2-316 [838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES ..............................................................................................2-317 [840] IP PHONE INFORMATION .............................................................................................2-318 [841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS....................................................................................................2-321 [845] WLAN PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................2-325 [846] WIP INFORMATION .......................................................................................................2-330 [848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST........................................................................................................2-332 [849] WLAN CONFIGURATION...............................................................................................2-333 [850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY ....................................................................................2-335 [851] ALARM REPORTING......................................................................................................2-336 [852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS .................................................................................2-338 [853] MAINTENANCE BUSY ...................................................................................................2-345 [854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME ........................................................................................................2-347 [856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS ......................................................................................2-348 [857] VIRTUAL CABINET SET.................................................................................................2-349 [859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY ..................................................................................2-351 [861] SYSTEM OPTIONS ........................................................................................................2-352 [863] NODE INFO ....................................................................................................................2-355 [890] INITIALIZE PORT ...........................................................................................................2-356 ABBREVIATION I A ~ C................................................................................................................................................I D ~ I ................................................................................................................................................II K ~ N..............................................................................................................................................III O ~ S............................................................................................................................................. IV T ~ V .............................................................................................................................................. V W ~ X ............................................................................................................................................ VI Samsung Business Communications XIII Ошибка! Стиль не определен. LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1.1 24B LCD DCS Euro Phone ..................................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1.2 DS-5038S Phone .................................................................................................... 1-3 Figure 1.3 DS/ITP-5014D/5021D Phone .................................................................................. 1-4 Figure 1.4 DS-5014S/5007S Phone ......................................................................................... 1-5 LIST OF TABLES Table 1.1 Station Level Programming list ................................................................................. 1-7 Table 1.2 System Related MMC list.......................................................................................... 1-8 Table 1.3 Station Related MMC list........................................................................................... 1-9 Table 1.4 Trunk Related MMC list........................................................................................... 1-10 Table 1.5 Timer and Tone Related MMC list ............................................................................1-11 Table 1.6 Group Related MMC list...........................................................................................1-11 Table 1.7 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC list........................................................... 1-12 Table 1.8 Technician Level Programming list.......................................................................... 1-14 Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list............................................................... 1-16 Table 1.10 Phone Function Programming list ......................................................................... 1-23 Table 1.11 Networking Function Programming list.................................................................. 1-24 Table 1.12 VoIP Function Programming list............................................................................ 1-24 Table 1.13 WLAN Function Programming list ......................................................................... 1-25 Table 1.14 LCR Function Programming list ............................................................................ 1-25 Table 1.15 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function Programming list........................................... 1-26 Table 1.16 Diagnosis Function Programming list.................................................................... 1-27 Table 1.17 Hotel Function Programming list ........................................................................... 1-27 XIV © SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming In this chapter, the things to know before you start MMC programming, and the phone buttons and cautions will be discussed. 1.1 Introduction to Programming The MMC means the changes on the data that is used for the system operation program. The MMC can be divided into programmable one and non-programmable one. The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels, such as technician, operator, and station level. The technician level programming and the operator level programming require a passcode for each level and the station level programming does not require a passcode. Program List by User’s Level For more information about the programming level, refer to ‘1.4 Program List by User’s Level’ of this chapter. Samsung Business Communications 1-1 CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 1.2 Digital Phones You need a digital display(LCD) phone in order to carry out programming. These include DCS Euro keysets and DS/ITP 5000 Series keysets, and some examples are described in the following sections. All use special programming buttons to select options on the display screen. 1.2.1 DCS Euro Phones Volume Control Buttons Volume control for handset, ring, speaker, etc Soft Buttons(3) Used to activate features via the display LCD Scroll Button Used to select start menu and scroll through display options Programmable Buttons With tri-coloured LEDs: 24B = 16 12B = 8 Memory Button Redial Button DND Button Speaker Button Programmable Buttons With red LEDs: 24B = 8, 12B = 4, 6B = 6 Microphone Dial Button Speaker For hands-free operation. Used in place of handset Hold Button Recall Button Pullout Directory Tray Transfer Button ANS/RLS Button Figure 1.1 24B LCD DCS Euro Phone 24B LCD phone has 24 programmable buttons: left column is numbered 1-12 from the top; right column is numbered 13-24 from the top. Buttons 19 to 24 are special buttons ‘A–F’ used for programming. 12B LCD phone has 12 programmable buttons numbered 1-12 from top to bottom. Buttons 7 to 12 are special buttons ‘A–F’ used for programming. 6B LCD phone has 6 programmable buttons: left column is numbered 1-3 from the top; right column is numbered 4-6 from the top. Buttons 1 to 3 are special buttons ‘A–C’ and buttons 4 to 6 are special buttons ‘D–F’ used for programming. 1-2 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide The special buttons are referred to within the relevant MMCs. For example, button ‘A’ is used to toggle between uppercase and lowercase characters when entering text on the display. All programmable buttons can be programmed with functions as required. The left soft button is used to save data or to move the cursor in the LCD display to the left. The right soft button is used to save data or to move the cursor in the display to the right. Other buttons also have special functions when in programming mode: y ANS/RLS Button: Select ‘ALL’ option for making changes to all—rather than individual—stations/trunks/etc. y Hold Button: Clear an entry in the display. y Volume Buttons: Scroll through display options. y Transfer Button: Enter MMC programming mode or store data and exit programming mode. y Speaker Button: Store data and advance to next MMC. 1.2.2 DS/ITP-5000 Series Phones These include the DS-5038S, DS/ITP-5021L, DS/ITP-5021D, DS/ITP-5014D, DS-5014S, and DS-5007S. Examples are shown in the figures below. Programmable Buttons(21) Soft Buttons Scroll Button Speaker Telephone Status Indicator LCD Display A Button Volume Buttons Redial Button Conference Button Transfer Button Dial Buttons Speaker Button Programmable Buttons(17) Hold Button Microphone Figure 1.2 DS-5038S Phone Samsung Business Communications 1-3 CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. DS-/ITP5021D (Programmable Buttons: 21) DS/ITP-5014D (Programmable Buttons: 14) A Button A Button Programmable Buttons Soft Buttons Scroll Button Telephone Status Indicator LCD Display Speaker Volume Button Redial Button Conference Button Transfer Button Navigation Button Speaker Button Dial Buttons Hold Button Microphone Figure 1.3 DS/ITP-5014D/5021D Phone 1-4 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide DS-5014S (Programmable Buttons: 14) DS-5007S (Programmable Buttons: 7) A Button A Button Programmable Buttons Soft Buttons Scroll Button Speaker Status Indicator LCD screen Volume Button Redial Button Conference Button Transfer Button Dial Buttons Speaker Button Hold Button Microphone Figure 1.4 DS-5014S/5007S Phone The DS/ITP-5000 series phones have 38, 21, 14 or 7 programmable buttons that can be programmed with functions. Also, there are several other function buttons: the dial buttons, the volume control buttons, the redial button that allows you to redial the last phone number dialled, the conference button for setting up conference calls, the transfer button used to transfer a call to another station, the hold button to hold a call, the speaker button, and the navigation buttons for easy selection of phone options and menus. The LCD displays the station status and various other kinds of information. Using three colors(red, green, and yellow) the station status indicator displays the current status of station. When programming, other functions programmed on buttons are as follows: y Volume Buttons: Scroll through items in the display. y Redial Button: Select ‘ALL’ option for making changes to all, rather than individual, stations/trunks/etc. y Soft Buttons: Save data or move the cursor left and right. y Speaker Button: Save data and proceed to the next program. y Hold Button: Erase the previously entered item. y A Button: Select uppercase or lowercase text. y Transfer Button: Enter the programming mode. Samsung Business Communications 1-5 CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. Using large LCD Phones Large LCD phones(DS/ITP-5012L) do not have programmable buttons. Instead, they display programming functions on the LCD to be selected via the selection buttons. Refer to your keyset user guide for more information. 1.3 Cautions in Programming y y y Programming can be done only while the handset is placed on the phone in idle state. Full programming can be done on any digital LCD phone. Only station level programming is allowed on a phone that does not have an LCD display. y If the LCD displays an ‘INVALID DATA’ message while programming, reenter the correct data. y If no button is pressed for a certain period of time during programming (default is 60 seconds), the phone returns to the idle state from programming mode. y Programming mode halts if the handset is picked up or the Transfer button is pressed or the phone is unplugged. Any data previously entered in the display is saved. 1-6 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 1.4 Program List by User’s Level The MMC program can be divided into programmable one and non-programmable one. The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels, such as technician, operator, and station level. In this section, the programmable MMC for each level will be introduced. 1.4.1 Station Level Programming Programming can be done for only station level programs. Table 1.1 Station Level Programming list MMC No. MMC Name MMC: 100 STATION LOCK MMC: 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE MMC: 102 CALL FORWARD MMC: 103 SET ANSWER MODE MMC: 104 STATION NAME MMC: 105 STATION SPEED DIAL MMC: 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME MMC: 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC: 108 STATION STATUS MMC: 109 DATE DISPLAY MMC: 110 STATION ON/OFF MMC: 111 PHONE RING TONE MMC: 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK MMC: 113 VIEW MEMO NUMBER MMC: 114 PHONE VOLUME MMC: 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE MMC: 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE MMC: 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE MMC: 118 CONFERENCE GROUP MMC: 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY MMC: 120 LARGE LCD OPTIONS MMC: 121 PHONE LANGUAGE MMC: 122 NEWS DISPLAY SPEED MMC: 125 EXECUTIVE STATE MMC: 199 SHOW LICENSE Samsung Business Communications 1-7 CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 1.4.2 Operator Level Programming A technician can do programming within the range set by the MMC [802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER. Programming is allowed for any phone within the tenant group, but it can be done for only one phone at a time. 1.4.2.1 System Related MMC The MMC programs related to the function of the system are as follows: Table 1.2 System Related MMC list MMC No. 1-8 MMC Name MMC: 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING MMC: 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE MMC: 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE MMC: 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE MMC: 204 COMMON BELL CONTROL MMC: 205 ASSIGN LOUD BELL MMC: 206 BARGE-IN TYPE MMC: 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT MMC: 208 ASSIGN RING TYPE MMC: 209 ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE MMC: 210 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT MMC: 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT MMC: 214 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION MMC: 217 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION MMC: 219 RELAY TYPE MMC: 220 ISDN SERVICE TYPE MMC: 221 EXTENSION TYPE MMC: 222 FAX PAIR MMC: 224 WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 1.4.2.2 Station Related MMC The MMC programs related to the function of the station are as follows: Table 1.3 Station Related MMC list MMC No. MMC Name MMC: 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION MMC: 301 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC: 302 PICKUP GROUPS MMC: 303 ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY MMC: 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE MMC: 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE MMC: 306 HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION MMC: 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE MMC: 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE MMC: 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE MMC: 312 ALLOW CALLER ID MMC: 314 CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL MMC: 315 CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION MMC: 316 COPY STATION USABLE MMC: 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE MMC: 318 DISTINCTIVE RINGING MMC: 319 BRANCH GROUP MMC: 320 PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER MMC: 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC: 326 RBT MESSAGE Samsung Business Communications 1-9 CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 1.4.2.3 Trunk Related MMC The MMC programs related to the function of the trunk are as follows: Table 1.4 Trunk Related MMC list 1-10 MMC No. MMC Name MMC: 400 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK MMC: 401 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE MMC: 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE MMC: 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS MMC: 404 TRUNK NAME MMC: 405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER MMC: 406 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT MMC: 407 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE MMC: 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE MMC: 409 TRUNK STATUS READ MMC: 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK MMC: 412 ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL MMC: 414 MPD/PRS SIGNAL MMC: 415 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA MMC: 417 E1/PRI CRC4 MMC: 418 BRI & PRI CARD RESTART MMC: 419 BRI OPTIONS MMC: 420 PRI OPTIONS MMC: 421 MSN DIGIT MMC: 422 TRUNK COS MMC: 423 S/T MODE MMC: 424 BRI S0 MAPPING MMC: 425 CID TRUNKS MMC: 426 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL MMC: 428 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE MMC: 432 SET H-TRK MMC: 433 COST RATE MMC: 434 CONNECTION STATUS MMC: 436 TRUNK TMC GAIN MMCL 437 16TRK GAIN Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 1.4.2.4 Timer and Tone Related MMC The MMC programs related to the function of the timer and tone are as follows: Table 1.5 Timer and Tone Related MMC list MMC No. MMC Name MMC: 500 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS MMC: 501 SYSTEM TIMERS MMC: 502 STATION-WIDE TIMERS MMC: 503 TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS MMC: 504 PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO MMC: 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME MMC: 506 TONE CADENCE MMC: 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME MMC: 508 CALL COST MMC: 510 SLI RING CADENCE MMC: 511 MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE MMC: 512 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT MMC: 513 HOTEL TIMER MMC: 514 TONE SOURCE MMC: 515 DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT 1.4.2.5 Group Related MMC The MMC programs related to the function of a group are as follows: Table 1.6 Group Related MMC list MMC No. MMC Name MMC: 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP MMC: 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP MMC: 602 STATION GROUP NAME MMC: 603 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP MMC: 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE MMC: 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE MMC: 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK MMC: 607 UCD OPTIONS MMC: 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK MMC: 609 CALL LOG BLOCK MMC: 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING MMC: 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE Samsung Business Communications 1-11 CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. Table 1.6 Group Related MMC list(continued) MMC No. MMC Name MMC: 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP MMC: 615 MGI GROUP MMC: 616 MGI USER 1.4.2.6 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC The MMC programs related to the function of the tables, codes, AA, DECT and VM are as follows: Table 1.7 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC list MMC No. 1-12 MMC Name MMC: 700 COPY COS CONTENTS MMC: 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MMC: 702 TOLL DENY TABLE MMC: 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE MMC: 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER MMC: 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MMC: 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME MMC: 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE MMC: 708 ACCOUNT CODE MMC: 709 TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE MMC: 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC: 711 LCR TIME TABLE MMC: 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC: 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE MMC: 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION MMC: 715 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE MMC: 716 UK LCR OPTION MMC: 717 UCD AGENT ID MMC: 718 MY AREA CODE MMC: 719 IDLE DISPLAY MMC: 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN MMC: 725 SMDR OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Table 1.7 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC list(continued) MMC No. MMC Name MMC: 727 SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY MMC: 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE MMC: 740 STATION PAIR MMC: 746 COSTING DIAL PLAN MMC: 747 RATE CALCULATION TABLE MMC: 750 VM CARD RESTART MMC: 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX MMC: 752 AUTO RECORD MMC: 753 WARNING DESTINATION MMC: 754 VM HALT MMC: 755 VM ALARM MMC: 756 ASSIGN VMMOH MMC: 757 VM IN/OUT MMC: 758 VM DAY/NIGHT MMC: 759 CLI RINGING MMC: 760 ITEM COST TABLE MMC: 761 TAX RATE SETUP MMC: 762 ROOM COST RATE MMC: 763 SECOND LCR Samsung Business Communications 1-13 CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 1.4.3 Technician Level Programming This level is allowed to program every level of program. This level of programming can be done on every phone within the system, but it can be done for only one phone at a time. Table 1.8 Technician Level Programming list 1-14 MMC No. MMC Name MMC: 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM MMC: 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE MMC: 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER MMC: 804 SYS. I/O MODE MMC: 805 TX LEVEL AND GAIN MMC: 806 CARD PRE-INSTALL MMC: 807 PHONE VOLUME CONTROL MMC: 810 HALT PROCESSING MMC: 811 RESET SYSTEM MMC: 812 SET COUNTRY CODE MMC: 813 HOTEL OPERATION MMC: 815 CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY MMC: 818 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD MMC: 819 MC FILE CONTROL MMC: 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID MMC: 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK MMC: 822 VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE MMC: 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS MMC: 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION MMC: 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS MMC: 826 ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK MMC: 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS MMC: 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC: 831 MGI PARAMETERS MMC: 832 VoIP ACCESS CODE MMC: 833 VoIP IP TABLE MMC: 834 H.323 OPTIONS MMC: 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS MMC: 836 H.323 GK OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Table 1.8 Technician Level Programming list(continued) MMC No. MMC Name MMC: 837 SIP OPTIONS MMC: 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES MMC: 839 SIP USER MMC: 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION MMC: 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS MMC: 845 WLAN PARAMETERS MMC: 846 WIP INFORMATION MMC: 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST MMC: 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION MMC: 850 SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY MMC: 851 ALARM REPORTING MMC: 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS MMC: 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY MMC: 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME MMC: 856 TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS MMC: 857 VIRTUAL CABINET MMC: 859 HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY MMC: 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS MMC: 863 NODE INFO MMC: 890 INITIALIZE PORT Samsung Business Communications 1-15 CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 1.5 Programming List by Name This programming list is arranged alphabetically Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list MMC Name 1-16 MMC No. ACCOUNT CODE MMC: 708 ALARM AND MESSAGE MMC: 116 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK MMC: 112 ALARM REPORTING MMC: 851 ALLOW CALLER ID MMC: 312 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE MMC: 612 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING MMC: 611 ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE MMC: 209 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE MMC: 308 ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY MMC: 303 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS MMC: 701 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME MMC: 505 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK MMC: 410 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE MMC: 304 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE MMC: 605 ASSIGN FORCED CODE MMC: 305 ASSIGN LOUD BELL MMC: 205 ASSIGN MAILBOX MMC: 751 ASSIGN NETWORK COS MMC: 823 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK MMC: 821 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS MMC: 825 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP MMC: 600 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK MMC: 608 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME MMC: 507 ASSIGN RING TYPE MMC: 208 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK MMC: 606 ASSIGN STATION COS MMC: 301 ASSIGN STATION GROUP MMC: 601 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE MMC: 309 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE MMC: 604 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE MMC: 317 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued) MMC Name MMC No. ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID MMC: 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK MMC: 826 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL MMC: 705 ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP MMC: 603 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE MMC: 408 ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL MMC: 412 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE MMC: 428 ASSIGN UA DEVICE MMC: 203 ASSIGN VMMOH MMC: 756 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT MMC: 207 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER MMC: 704 AUTHORIZATION CODE MMC: 707 AUTO RECORD MMC: 752 BARGE-IN TYPE MMC: 206 BRANCH GROUP MMC: 319 BRI & PRI CARD RESTART MMC: 418 BRI OPTIONS MMC: 419 BSI RF CARRIER MMC: 747 BRI S0 MAPPING MMC: 424 CALL COST MMC: 508 CALL FORWARD MMC: 102 CALL LOG BLOCK MMC: 609 CALLER ID DISPLAY MMC: 119 CALLING PARTY NUMBER MMC: 323 CARD PRE-INSTALL MMC: 806 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE MMC: 201 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE MMC: 202 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE MMC: 801 CHANGE USER PASSCODE MMC: 101 CID TRANSLATION TABLE MMC: 728 CID TRUNKS MMC: 425 CLI RINGING MMC: 759 COMMON BELL CONTROL MMC: 204 CONFERENCE GROUP MMC: 118 Samsung Business Communications 1-17 CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued) MMC Name 1-18 MMC No. CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL MMC: 314 CONNECTION STATUS MMC: 434 COPY COS CONTENTS MMC: 700 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 720 COPY STATION USABLE MMC: 316 COST RATE MMC: 433 COSTING DIAL PLAN MMC: 746 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER MMC: 802 CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY MMC: 815 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION MMC: 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT MMC: 210 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK MMC: 400 CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION MMC: 315 DATE DISPLAY MMC: 109 DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT MMC: 515 DIAGNOSTIC TIME MMC: 854 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN MMC: 724 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION MMC: 714 DISA ALARM RINGING STATION MMC: 214 DISTINCTIVE RINGING MMC: 318 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT MMC: 211 E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION MMC: 417 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE MMC: 117 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM MMC: 800 ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC: 830 EXECUTIVE STATE MMC: 125 EXTENSION TYPE MMC: 221 FAX PAIR MMC: 222 FORCED TRUNK RELEASE MMC: 407 H.323 GK OPTIONS MMC: 836 H.323 OPTIONS MMC: 834 HALT PROCESSING MMC: 810 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued) MMC Name MMC No. HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY MMC: 859 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT MMC: 512 HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION MMC: 306 HOTEL OPERATION MMC: 813 HOTEL TIMER MMC: 513 IDLE DISPLAY MMC: 719 INITIALIZE PORT MMC: 890 IP PHONE INFORMATION MMC: 840 ISDN SERVICE TYPE MMC: 220 ITEM COST TABLE MMC: 760 KEY EXTENDER MMC: 107 LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS MMC: 829 LARGE LCD OPTIONS MMC: 120 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE MMC: 310 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC: 710 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE MMC: 713 LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC: 712 LCR TIME TABLE MMC: 711 MAINTENANCE BUSY MMC: 853 MGI DSP OPTIONS MMC: 835 MGI GROUP MMC: 615 MGI PARAMETERS MMC: 831 MGI USER MMC: 616 MPD/PRS SIGNAL MMC: 414 MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE MMC: 511 MSN DIGIT MMC: 421 MY AREA CODE MMC: 718 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION MMC: 824 NEWS DISPLAY SPEED MMC: 122 NODE INFO MMC: 863 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING MMC: 200 PHONE LANGUAGE MMC: 121 PHONE RING TONE MMC: 111 PHONE VOLUME MMC: 114 PHONE VOLUME CONTROL MMC: 807 Samsung Business Communications 1-19 CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued) MMC Name 1-20 MMC No. PICKUP GROUPS MMC: 302 PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER MMC: 320 PRI OPTIONS MMC: 420 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES MMC: 838 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD MMC: 818 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE MMC: 715 PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO MMC: 504 RATE CALCULATION TABLE MMC: 747 RBT MESSAGE MMC: 326 RELAY TYPE MMC: 219 REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA MMC: 415 RESET SYSTEM MMC: 811 ROOM COST RATE MMC: 762 S/T MODE MMC: 423 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 721 SECOND LCR MMC: 763 SET ANSWER MODE MMC: 103 SET COUNTRY CODE MMC: 812 SET H-TRK MMC: 432 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE MMC: 115 SHOW LICENSE MMC: 199 SIP OPTIONS MMC: 837 SIP USER MMC: 839 SLI RING CADENCE MMC: 510 MC FILE CONTROL MMC: 819 SMDR OPTIONS MMC: 725 STATION GROUP NAME MMC: 602 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 722 STATION LOCK MMC: 100 STATION NAME MMC: 104 STATION ON/OFF MMC: 110 STATION PAIR MMC: 740 STATION SPEED DIAL MMC: 105 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME MMC: 106 STATION STATUS MMC: 108 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP MMC: 614 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued) MMC Name MMC No. STATION-WIDE TIMERS MMC: 502 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS MMC: 852 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING MMC: 723 SYSTEM SIO MODE MMC: 804 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS MMC: 841 SYSTEM OPTIONS MMC: 861 SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY MMC: 850 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME MMC: 706 SYSTEM TIMERS MMC: 501 SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY MMC: 727 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS MMC: 500 TAX RATE SETUP MMC: 761 TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS MMC: 856 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE MMC: 703 TOLL DENY TABLE MMC: 702 TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE MMC: 709 TONE CADENCE MMC: 506 TONE SOURCE MMC: 514 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION MMC: 217 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER MMC: 405 TRUNK COS MMC: 422 TRUNK DIAL TYPE MMC: 402 TRUNK GAIN CONTROL MMC: 426 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE MMC: 401 TRUNK NAME MMC: 404 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT MMC: 406 TRUNK STATUS READ MMC: 409 TRUNK TMC GAIN MMC: 436 TRUNK TOLL CLASS MMC: 403 TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS MMC: 503 TX LEVEL AND GAIN MMC: 805 UCD AGENT ID MMC: 717 UCD OPTIONS MMC: 607 UK LCR OPTION MMC: 716 VIEW MEMO NUMBER MMC: 113 Samsung Business Communications 1-21 CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. Table 1.9 Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued) MMC Name 1-22 MMC No. VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE MMC: 822 VM ALARM MMC: 755 VM CARD RESTART MMC: 750 VM DAY/NIGHT MMC: 758 VM HALT MMC: 754 VM IN/OUT MMC: 757 VoIP ACCESS CODE MMC: 832 VoIP IP TABLE MMC: 833 WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT MMC: 224 WARNING DESTINATION MMC: 753 WIP INFORMATION MMC: 846 WLAN CONFIGURATION MMC: 849 WLAN IP/MAC LIST MMC: 848 WLAN PARAMETERS MMC: 845 16TRK GAIN MMC: 437 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 1.6 Program List by Function This section describes MMC programs are classified by the function of the OfficeServ 7100. 1.6.1 Phone Function The MMC programs related to the function of a phone that is connected with the OfficeServ 7100 are as follows: Table 1.10 Phone Function Programming list MMC Program No. Program Description MMC: 100 STATION LOCK MMC: 101 CHANGE USER PASSCODE MMC: 102 CALL FORWARD MMC: 103 SET ANSWER MODE MMC: 104 STATION NAME MMC: 105 STATION SPEED DIAL MMC: 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME MMC: 107 KEY EXTENDER MMC: 108 STATION STATUS MMC: 109 DATE DISPLAY MMC: 110 STATION ON/OFF MMC: 111 PHONE RING TONE MMC: 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK MMC: 114 PHONE VOLUME MMC: 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE MMC: 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE MMC: 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY Samsung Business Communications 1-23 CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 1.6.2 Networking Function The MMC programs related to the function of networking are as follows: Table 1.11 Networking Function Programming list MMC Program No. Program Description MMC: 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID MMC: 821 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK MMC: 822 SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE MMC: 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS MMC: 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION MMC: 825 ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION MMC: 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETER MMC: 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS MMC: 837 SIP OPTIONS MMC: 840 IP PHONE INFORMATIONES MMC: 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS 1.6.3 VoIP Function The MMC programs related to the function of VoIP(Voice over Internet Protocol) are as follows: Table 1.12 VoIP Function Programming list MMC Program No. 1-24 Program Description MMC: 831 MGI PARAMETERS MMC: 832 VOIP ACCESS CODE MMC: 833 VoIP IP TABLE MMC: 834 H.323 OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Table 1.12 VoIP Function Programming list(continued) MMC Program No. Program Description MMC: 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS MMC: 836 H.323 GK OPTIONS 1.6.4 WLAN Function The MMC programs related to the function of WLAN(Wireless Local Area Network) are as follows: Table 1.13 WLAN Function Programming list MMC Program No. Program Description MMC: 845 WLAN PARAMETER MMC: 846 WIP INFORMATION MMC: 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST MMC: 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION 1.6.5 LCR Function The MMC programs related to the function of LCR(Least Cost Routing) are as follows: Table 1.14 LCR Function Programming list MMC Program No. Program Description MMC: 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE MMC: 711 LCR TIME TABLE MMC: 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE MMC: 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE MMC: 763 SECOND LCR Samsung Business Communications 1-25 CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 1.6.6 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function The MMC programs related to the function of AA(Auto Attendant) or VM(Voice Mail) are as follows: Table 1.15 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function Programming list MMC Program No. 1-26 Program Description MMC: 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT MMC: 215 VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS MMC: 216 VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS MMC: 730 AA RECORD GAIN MMC: 731 AA RAM CLEAR MMC: 732 AA TRANSLATION TABLE MMC: 733 AA PLAN TABLE MMC: 735 AA USE TABLE MMC: 736 AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH MMC: 739 ASSIGN AA MOH MMC: 750 VM CARD RESTART MMC: 751 ASSIGN MAILBOX MMC: 752 AUTO RECORD MMC: 753 WARNING DESTINATION MMC: 754 VM HALT MMC: 755 VM ALARM MMC: 756 ASSIGN VM MOH MMC: 757 VM IN/OUT MMC: 758 VM DAY/NIGHT Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 1.6.7 Diagnosis Function The MMC programs related to the function of diagnosing the system are as follows: Table 1.16 Diagnosis Function Programming list MMC Program No. Program Description MMC: 434 CONNECTION STATUS MMC: 851 ALARM REPORTING MMC: 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS MMC: 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY MMC: 854 DIAGNOSTIC TIME MMC: 890 INITIALIZE PORT 1.6.8 Hotel Function The MMC programs related to the function of a hotel are as follows: Table 1.17 Hotel Function Programming list MMC Program No. Program Description MMC: 221 TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION MMC: 222 EXTENSION TYPE MMC: 433 COST RATE MMC: 513 HOTEL TIMER MMC: 748 COSTING DIAL PLAN MMC: 749 RATE CALCULATION TABLE MMC: 760 ITEM COST TABLE MMC: 761 TAX RATE SETUP MMC: 762 ROOM COST RATE Samsung Business Communications 1-27 OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming This chapter describes how to use each MMC program as it was listed. 2.1 Overview of Programming Procedure The order of programming will be discussed before explaining programming method of each list. Please read the description carefully before programming. The programming order is as follows: 1) Make the programmable state. y Press the Transfer button at pause. y Enter the program number, either 200 or 800. y Enter either the operator passcode or the technician passcode. y Press 1 dial button to ‘enable’ the programming mode. y In case of Program 800 Technician Program Mode Setting, enter the tenant number to be programmed. 2) Make the program number selectable state. If the Speaker button is pressed, the program selection mode appears. Or, if the Transfer button is pressed, the programming state ends and the pause state begin. 3) Select a program. Enter the program number. Or, select the program number with the Volume button and press the Speaker button. Or, Press Transfer button in a pause state and enter the program number. 4) Start programming the corresponding program. Samsung Business Communications 2-1 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 2.2 Programming Procedure This section describes a procedure of each program. Refer to the programming procedure corresponding to the MMC. [100] STATION LOCK Allows the system administrator or technician to lock or unlock an individual station or all stations simultaneously. The three options are as follows: No Type Description 0 UNLOCKED Unlocks a locked station. 1 LOCKED OUT The phone cannot make calls outside the system. It can however make and receive intercom calls and receive incoming Trunk Line calls. When in this mode the Hold button will flash slow RED. 2 LOCKED ALL The phone cannot make or receive any calls. When in this mode the Hold button will light steady RED. CONDITIONS y Check if the station lock function is disabled at ‘MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS’. If so, the station cannot be locked, but a locked station can be unlocked. y A station can be locked or unlocked under any condition when the station is in Operator Level Programming or Technician Level Programming. DEFAULT DATA ALL STATIONS UNLOCKED 2-2 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 100. Display shows: [201] STN LOCK 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] STN LOCK 3) Enter 0 to unlock or 1 to lock.(e.g., 1) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] STN LOCK UNLOCKED UNLOCKED [ALL] STN LOCK ? LOCKED OUT 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 101 MMC 301 MMC 701 CHANGE USER PASSCODE ASSIGN STATION COS ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications 2-3 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE Allows the system administrator or technician to reset any phone’s passcode to its default value of ‘1234’. This MMC cannot display station passcodes; it can only reset them to default. Phone users can set or change their individual passcodes. The passcode is used to lock or unlock the phone for toll restriction(call barring) override and to access the DISA feature. CONDITIONS y The passcode of a station performing Operator Level Programming or Technician Level Programming cannot be changed while the program mode is ‘ENABLE’. y An Operator or Technician Level can only delete the passcode of a station and reset the passcode to the default value, ‘1234’, not permitting to know the passcode. Default passcodes Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access. DEFAULT DATA ALL STATION PASSCODES: 1234 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 101. Display shows: [201] PASSCODE 2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) OR Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor right. [205] PASSCODE 3) Press Hold button to reset passcode. [205] PASSCODE PASSCODE:**** PASSCODE:**** PASSCODE:1234 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 100 2-4 STATION LOCK Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [102] CALL FORWARD Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for other station users. This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination has been entered. Allows several types of call forwarding: FORWARD ALL, FORWARD NO ANSWER, FORWARD BUSY and FORWARD DND. There is an additional option, FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER, that allows both of these options to be activated at the same time, provided that destinations have been entered for both. No Type 0 FORWARD CANCEL 1 FORWARD ALL CALL 2 FORWARD BUSY 3 FORWARD NO ANSWER 4 FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER 5 FORWARD DND CONDITIONS y When ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ is selected, calls are forwarded to stations set in ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’. Thus, a destination number must be set for both ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’ before you can select the ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ option. y If forwarding is set to ‘OFF’ in MMC 701, ASSIGN COS CONTENTS, call forwarding cannot be set but can be cancelled.(Default: ‘OFF’) y Both ‘FORWARD’ and ‘EXT FWD’ must be set to ‘ON’ in MMC 701, ASSIGN COS CONTENTS in order to forward a call to an external number. If only ‘FORWARD’ is set to ‘ON’, calls can only be forwarded to internal numbers.(Default: ‘OFF’) DEFAULT DATA NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-5 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 102. Display shows: [201] FORWARD 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] FORWARD 3) Dial 0-5 to select forward type. OR Press Volume button to select forward type(e.g., 1) and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] FORWARD 4) Dial destination number.(e.g., 201) OR Press Volume button to select destination and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] FORWARD 5) Dial 1 for YES, 0 for NO. OR Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] FORWARD 0:FORWARD CANCEL 0:FORWARD CANCEL 1:ALL CALL:NONE 1:ALL CALL:201 CURRENTLY SET:YES 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 MMC 501 MMC 502 MMC 701 MMC 722 MMC 723 2-6 ASSIGN STATION COS SYSTEM TIMERS STATION-WIDE TIMERS ASSIGN COS CONTENTS STATION KEY PROGRAMMING SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [103] SET ANSWER MODE Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any phone. Each phone can have its answer mode set to one of the following options: No 0 Type RING MODE Description The phone will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls are answered by pressing the ANS/RLS or SEND button or by lifting the handset. 1 AUTO ANSWER MODE After giving a short attention tone, the phone will automatically answer calls on the speakerphone. When a Trunk line is transferred to a phone in Auto Answer, the screened portion of the call will be Auto Answered, but the phone will ring when the transfer is complete if you have not pressed the ANS/RLS or SEND button or lifted the handset.* 2 VOICE ANNOUNCE The phone will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers can make an announcement but the ANS/RLS or SEND button or handset must be used to answer calls. To answer the C.O. call automatically To answer the C.O. call automatically, set ‘ON’ the option ‘AUTO ANS CO’ in MMC 110. DEFAULT DATA ALL PHONES: RING Samsung Business Communications 2-7 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 103. Display shows: [201] ANS MODE 2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select phone and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all phones. [205] ANS MODE 3) Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change ring mode. OR Press Volume button to select ring mode and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above. [205] ANS MODE RING MODE RING MODE [ALL] ANS MODE ? VOICE ANNOUNCE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 111 2-8 PHONE RING TONE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [104] STATION NAME Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to identify an individual station. ENTERING CHARACTERS Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is ‘SAM SMITH,’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’. Now press the number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message. Pressing ‘A’ button toggles between upper case and lower case. Volume Up/Down keys When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the Volume Down button to move the cursor to the left. A space can be entered using these keys. COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL 0 < > . ) 0 DIAL 1 Space ? , ! 1 DIAL 2 A B C @ 2 DIAL 3 D E F # 3 DIAL 4 G H I $ 4 DIAL 5 J K L % 5 DIAL 6 M N O ^ 6 DIAL 7 P Q R S 7 DIAL 8 T U V * 8 DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9 DIAL * : = [ ] * The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , ”, Æ, ’. \. DEFAULT DATA NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-9 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 104. Display shows: [201] STN NAME 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] STN NAME 3) Enter the station name using the procedure described above and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. [205] STN NAME _ SAM SMITH RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-10 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [105] STATION SPEED DIAL Allows the system administrator or technician to assign phone numbers to a station’s personal speed dial locations. CONDITIONS Each station may have up to 50 locations(or bins) assigned to it in MMC 606(Assign Speed Block). The speed dial bins are numbered 00~49. Each assigned phone number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dial. These dial digits may consist of 0~9, * and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the separator. DEFAULT DATA NONE PROGRAM BUTTONS B C D E F Used to insert a flash code ‘F’ Used to insert a pause code ‘P’ Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’ Used to mask/unmask following digits(shows as ‘[’or ‘]’) Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 106) ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 105. Display shows: [201] SPEED DIAL 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] SPEED DIAL If selected station has no speed dial bins, the display will be as shown and a new station may be selected. 3) Dial location number.(e.g., 05) OR Press Volume button to select location and press Right Soft button to move cursor. Samsung Business Communications 00: 00: [205] SPEED DIAL SPDBLK NOT EXIST [205] SPEED DIAL 05:_ 2-11 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 4) Enter trunk access code(e.g., 9) followed by the number to be dialed.(e.g., 4264100) OR Press Right Soft button to return to step 2. OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3. Press Hold button to clear an entry. If an error is made, use VOLUME DOWN arrow to step back. [205] SPEED DIAL 05:9-4264100_ 5) Press ‘F’ button to access MMC 106(Station Speed Dial Name) to enter a name for speed dial. OR Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 106 MMC 606 2-12 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each personal speed dial location. This allows speed dial numbers to be selected by name when the directory dial feature is used. ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 106. Display shows: [201] SPEED NAME 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] SPEED NAME 00: 00: If selected station has no speed dial bins, the display will be as shown and a new station may be selected. [305] SPEED NAME 3) Dial speed dial location.(e.g., 01) OR Press Volume button to scroll through location numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] SPEED NAME 4) Enter the location name using the procedure described above and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] SPEED NAME SPDBLK NOT EXIST 01:_ 01:SAM SMITH 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 105 MMC 606 STATION SPEED DIAL ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK Samsung Business Communications 2-13 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [107] KEY EXTENDER Use this program to view the programmable buttons assigned to stations. In addition, it allows the system administrator to assign key extenders to some keys to make a general access feature key more specific. The feature keys that can have extenders are listed below. Key Feature Extender AB Absence Extension number ACC Account code bin 000-999 BOSS Boss and Secretary 1-4 CR VM Call Record Mailbox number CS UCD Call Status UCD group number DIR Directory dial by name type 1-3 DP Direct Pickup Extension or station group number DS Direct Station Select Station number FWRD Call Forward 0-7 GPIK Group Pickup 01-99 IG In/Out of Group Station group number MMPG Meet Me Page 0-9, * MW Message Waiting Extension or station group number MS Manual Signalling Extension or station group number PAGE Page 0-9, * PARK Park Orbits 0-9 PMSG Programmed Station Messaging 01-20 RP Ring Plan 1-6 RSV Room Status View(Hotel Application only) 1-5 SG Station Group Station group number SP UCD Supervisor UCD group number SPD Speed Dial Personal: 00-49 System: 500-999 VG SVM-800 Group Message Station group number VM VM Memo Extension or station group number VT Voice Transfer VM group number DEFAULT DATA NONE 2-14 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 107. Display shows first station: [201] EXT (MAST) 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Use Volume button to scroll through station numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. [205] EXT (MAST) 3) Enter key number.(e.g., 18) OR Use Volume button to scroll through keys and use Right Soft button to move the cursor. OR Press the key to be programmed. [205] EXT (MAST) 01:CALL1Æ 01:CALL1Æ 18:DSÆ [205] EXT (MAST) 18: DSÆ DS_ 4) Dial extender according to above table. System will return to step 3. [205] EXT (MAST) 18: DSÆ DS207 5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2. OR Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. When using the Right Soft button When the Right Soft button will not move the cursor to the right, you are attempting to add an extender to a key that cannot have one. RELATED ITEMS MMC 720 MMC 721 MMC 722 MMC 723 MMC 724 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING STATION KEY PROGRAMMING SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING DIAL NUMBERING PLAN Samsung Business Communications 2-15 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [108] STATION STATUS This is a READ-ONLY MMC. Displays the following attributes of a station port. No Status Description 0 PORT NO Cabinet(1)/Slot(MP,1,2)/Port(1-12) 1 TYPE Phone Type 2 PICKUP GROUP None, 01-99 3 SGR Station Group Number 4 BOSS-SECR None, 1-4 5 PAGE None, Page Zone(0-4, * ) 6 COS 1, COS 2 COS(1-30) per Ring Plan(01-06) DEFAULT DATA PORT #: FOLLOWS HARDWARE POSITION TYPE: DEPENDENT ON CONNECTED PHONE PICKUP GRP: NONE SGR: NONE BOSS-SECR: NONE PAGE ZONE: NONE COS NUMBER: 01 IN ALL RING PLANS ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 108. Display shows first station: [201] STN STATUS 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] STN STATUS 3) Dial 0~9 to select station status type. OR Press Volume button to select status and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] STN STATUS PORT:C1-S1-P01 PORT:C1- S1-P05 PICKUP GROUP:01 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. 2-16 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 MMC 302 MMC 303 MMC 601 MMC 604 ASSIGN STATION COS PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY ASSIGN STATION GROUP ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE Samsung Business Communications 2-17 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [109] DATE DISPLAY Allows the system administrator or technician to select the date and time display mode on a per-station basis or system-wide. No 0 1 2 Mode COUNTRY CLOCK DISPLAY Description Sets overall display format and has two options: 0 = ORIENTAL MM/DD 1 = WESTERN DAY DD MON DAY HH:MM HH:MM Sets format of clock display and has two options: 0 = 12 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00 1 = 24 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00 Sets format of DAY and MON display and has two options: 0 = UPPER CASE Displays Friday as ‘FRI’ and March as ‘MAR’. 1 = LOWER CASE Displays Friday as ‘Fri’ and March as ‘Mar’. CONDITIONS NONE DEFAULT DATA COUNTRY: WESTERN CLOCK: 12 HOUR DISPLAY: LOWER CASE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 109. Display shows: [201] DAY FORMAT 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] DAY FORMAT 3) Dial 0~2 to select mode. OR Press Volume button to scroll through modes and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] DAY FORMAT COUNTRY:WESTERN COUNTRY:WESTERN [ALL] DAY FORMAT COUNTRY:? COUNTRY:ORIENTAL 4) Press Volume button to scroll through formats and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. 2-18 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME Samsung Business Communications 2-19 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [110] STATION ON/OFF Allows the system administrator to set any of the phone features listed below. No Feature 00 AUTO HOLD Default OFF Description Automatically places an existing Trunk Line call on hold if a CALL key, trunk key or trunk route key is pressed during that call. 01 AUTO TIMER ON Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a Trunk Line call. 02 HEADSET USE OFF When ON, this feature disables the hook switch allowing a headset user to answer all calls by pressing the ANS/RLS button or SEND and END buttons. 03 HOT KEYPAD ON When ON, this feature allows you to dial directory numbers without having to first lift the handset or press the Speaker button. 04 KEY TONE ON Allows you to hear a slight tone when pressing buttons on phone. 05 PAGE REJOIN ON Allows you to hear the remaining part of page announcements if phone becomes free during a page. 06 RING PREF. ON When OFF, requires you to press the fast flashing button to answer a ringing call after lifting the handset. 07 CALL COST OFF When ON, the cost of the call in progress will show in the upper right corner of the phone display instead of duration of the call. 08 AUTO CAMPON OFF When ON, phone users can allow intercom calls to camp-on to other phones without having to press a CAMP-ON key. 09 AME BGM OFF This feature selects whether a station using Answer Machine Emulation will hear their personal greeting or BGM while callers are listening to the personal greeting. A BGM source must be selected for this to work. 10 AME PASSCODE OFF When ON, station users who have AME set must enter their station password to listen to messages being left. 11 DISP SPDNAME OFF When ON, the speed dial name associated with a speed dial number is displayed on a phone equipped a LCD display when using speed dial. 12 CID REVW ALL ON When ON, saves information on all calls that ring at an extension, When OFF, saves information only on calls that were not answered at the extension or were answered by voice mail. 13 SECURE OHVA ON When ON, OHVA announcements will be heard on the handset. When OFF, OHVA announcements will be heard over the phone speaker. 2-20 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No 14 Feature NOT CONT.CID Default ON Description When OFF, the Caller ID will be displayed for the duration of the call. When ON, displays timer for duration of call(if AUTO TIMER also set on). 15 AUTO ANS CO OFF When ON, keyset will automatically answer outside calls through the speakerphone. For this to work, the keyset must be set to Auto Answer mode in MMC 103. Calls to groups cannot be auto-answered. 16 ENBLOCK 2LCD OFF Enables Enbloc dialling for 2-Line LCD phones.This option only works when 2 LINE ENBLOCK option is enabled in MMC 861. 17 STN NO RING OFF When ON, no tones will be heard when phone rings. DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 110. Display shows: [201] STN ON/OFF 2) Dial the station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] STN ON/OFF 3) Dial option number from above list.(e.g., 03) OR Press Volume button to select option and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor. [205] STN ON/OFF 4) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF. OR Press Volume button to select ON or OFF. Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2. OR 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. [201] STN ON/OFF Samsung Business Communications AUTO HOLD AUTO HOLD :OFF :OFF HOT KEYPAD :ON HOT KEYPAD :OFF 2-21 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 MMC 701 2-22 ASSIGN STATION COS ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [111] PHONE RING TONE Allows the system administrator or technician to select the ring tone heard at each phone. Eight ring tones are available. A short tone burst of the selection will be heard when the dial keypad is pressed. DEFAULT DATA FREQUENCY: 5 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 111. Display shows: [201] RING TONE 2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] RING TONE 3) Dial 1~8 to select ring tone. OR Press Volume button to select ring tone and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] RING TONE SELECTION 5 SELECTION 5 [ALL] RING TONE SELECTION ? SELECTION 5 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 114 MMC 318 PHONE VOLUME DISTINCTIVE RINGING Samsung Business Communications 2-23 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment reminder feature for any station. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm, or as a DAILY alarm. The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time. Alarm numbers are 1, 2 and 3. In the case of Station Pair assignments(MMC 740) the alarm only rings the station that is programmed and does not ring the paired station. No Type Description 0 NOTSET No alarm 1 TODAY Alarm once only 2 DAILY Alarm daily at set time DEFAULT DATA ALARMS ARE NOTSET ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 112. Display shows: [201] ALM CLK(1) 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button. [205] ALM CLK(1) 3) Dial 1~3 to select alarm.(e.g., 1) OR Press Volume button to select alarm and press Right Soft button. [205] ALM CLK(1) 4) Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format. (e.g., 1300 for 1pm) [205] ALM CLK(1) 5) Dial entry from above list for alarm type.(e.g., 2) OR Press Volume button to select alarm type and press Right Soft button to move cursor and return to step 2. [205] ALM CLK(1) HHMM:ÆNOTSET HHMM:ÆNOTSET HHMM:ÆNOTSET HHMM:1300ÆNOTSET HHMM:1300ÆDAILY 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. 2-24 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide RELATED ITEMS MMC 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE Samsung Business Communications 2-25 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER Allows a station user the ability to view a memo left by the user. A memo can be left by entering it via the dial keypad using the table below. A memo of up to and including 13 characters can be entered. ENTER CHARACTERS Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 113. Display shows: [201] VIEW MEMO 2) Dial the keyset number.(e.g., 205) OR Press VOLUME keys to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor. [205] VIEW MEMO 1: 1: 3) Dial memo number.(1–3) [205] VIEW MEMO OR 1:_ Press VOLUME keys to select and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor. 4) Enter memo via dial keypad. [205] VIEW MEMO 1:CALL TOM 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-26 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [114] PHONE VOLUME Allows the station user or system administrator to set the ring volume, off-hook ring volume, handset receive volume, speaker volume, background music volume and page volume for any or all phones. No Type Description 0 RING VOLUME This is the volume setting for the phone ringer. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest. 1 OFF-RING VOL This is the volume of the alert tone that tells you there is a call camped on to your phone. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest. 2 HANDSET VOL This is the volume setting for conversations on the handset receiver. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest. 3 SPEAKER VOL This is the receive volume setting for conversations on the speaker phone of a phone. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest. 4 BGM VOLUME This is the volume you will hear background music over the phone speaker at when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest. 5 PAGE VOLUME This is the volume you will hear internal page over the phone speaker when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest. DEFAULT DATA RING VOLUME: 4 OFF-HOOK RING VOLUME: 4 HANDSET VOLUME: 4 SPEAKER VOLUME: 13 BGM VOLUME: 13 PAGE VOLUME: 13 Samsung Business Communications 2-27 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 114. Display shows: [201] STN VOLUME 2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) [205] STN VOLUME RING VOLUME :4 RING VOLUME :4 3) Dial volume type.(e.g., 3) [205] STN VOLUME OR SPEAKER VOL :13 Press Volume button to select volume type and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor. 4) Press Volume button to select volume.(You will hear a [205] STN VOLUME brief tone for the volume you select.) SPEAKER VOL :08 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 111 2-28 PHONE RING TONE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE Allows the system administrator to set a programmed message at any or all display phones. There are 20 messages(01-20) available. The last five message can be modified by each phone user. CONDITIONS These messages are as set up in MMC 715, PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE. DEFAULT DATA NO MESSAGES SELECTED ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 115. Display shows: [201] PGMMSG(00) 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] PGMMSG(00) 3) Dial message number.(e.g., 05) OR Press Volume button to select message and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. OR Dial 00 to cancel an existing message. [205] PGMMSG(05) CANCEL PGM MSG CANCEL PGM MSG [ALL] PGMMSG(??) PAGE ME 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 715 MMC 722 MMC 723 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications 2-29 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [116] ALARM AND MESSAGE Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment reminder feature for any station. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm, or as a DAILY alarm. The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time. It is also possible to set a message to display when the alarm is sounded. No Type Description 0 NOTSET No alarm 1 TODAY Alarm once only 2 DAILY Alarm daily at set time ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA ALARMS ARE NOTSET ACTION 2-30 DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 116. Display shows: [201] ALM REM(1) 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] ALM REM(1) 3) Dial 1~3 to select alarm.(e.g., 2) OR Press Volume button to select alarm and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] ALM REM(2) 4) Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format. (e.g., 1300 for 1pm) Display will automatically advance to step 5. [205] ALM REM(2) HHMM:ÆNOTSET HHMM:ÆNOTSET [ALL] ALM REM(1) HHMM:ÆNOTSET HHMM:ÆNOTSET HHMM:1300ÆNOTSET Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 5) Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type. (e.g., 2) OR Press Volume button to select alarm type and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] ALM REM 6) Enter message and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] ALM REM HHMM:1300ÆDAILY Meeting 7) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK Samsung Business Communications 2-31 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change text messages for any station. One station can use up to 10 text messages. CONDITIONS Only stations allowed to use text messages in MMC 611 can be selected here. Large LCD phones are automatically allowed. ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA BLANK MESSAGE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 117. Display shows: [201] TXTMSG(01) 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] TXTMSG(01) 3) Dial 01~10 to select message. OR Press Volume button to select message and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] TXTMSG(02) 4) Enter message and press Right Soft button to return to step 3. [205] TXTMSG(02) Blank Message Blank Message Blank Message SAME TIME 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 611 2-32 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [118] CONFERENCE GROUP Allows the system administrator or technician to set conference groups for any station. A station is allowed up to five conference groups, and each group can include 4 members (excluding the station itself). Names can be allocated to groups. Conference members can be other stations, station groups, and external telephone numbers. (which must include the outgoing access code) CONDITIONS Only stations set to use conference groups in MMC 612 can be selected here. Large LCD phones are automatically set to use conference groups. ENTERING CONFERENCE GROUP NAME Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 118. Display shows: [201] GRP(1)NAME 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] GRP(1)NAME 3) Dial 1~5 to select group. OR Press Volume button to select group and press. Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] GRP(1)NAME 4) Dial 0 to select name or dial 1~4 to select member. OR Press Volume button to select name or member and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3. [205] GRP(1)MBR1 Samsung Business Communications NONE 2-33 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 5) Enter conference member dial number and press Right Soft button to return to step 4. [205] GRP(1)MBR1 9-2794296 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 612 2-34 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [119] CALLER ID DISPLAY Allows the technician to set the individual station display preference on a per-station basis. Caller ID or CLI can be selected to either show the name, number first, or no display depending on the type of call. Caller ID or CLI displays have the following options: No Type 0 NO DISPLAY 1 NUMBER FIRST Description No Caller ID or CLIP data will be displayed. The Caller ID or CLIP number received from the Central Office will be displayed first. 2 NAME FIRST The Caller ID or CLIP name received will be displayed first. In the case of CLIP the number must be programmed in the CLIP translation table(MMC 728). CLIP does not provide names. DEFAULT DATA NUMBER FIRST ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 119. Display shows first station: [201] CID DISP 2) Enter station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button. OR Select all stations. [205] CID DISP 3) Dial display option 0, 1 or 2.(e.g., 2) OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right or Left Soft button to return to step 2. [205] CID DISP NUMBER FIRST NUMBER FIRST [ALL] CID DISP NUMBER FIRST NAME FIRST 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 312 MMC 608 MMC 728 ALLOW CALLER ID ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK CID TRANSLATION TABLE Samsung Business Communications 2-35 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [120] LARGE LCD OPTIONS Allows the system administrator to set any of the following options for large LCD phones. No 0 Option IDLE DISPLAY Description Sets whether to display ‘CALENDAR’ or ‘INFORMATION’ on LCD when idle. 1 DS KEY DISPLAY Sets whether to display extension numbers or names for ‘DS’ keys on LCD. 2 DIAL MODE Sets dial mode to ENBLOCK or OVERLAP. 3 CONV DISP SOFT MENU FIRST If selected, features assigned to keys are displayed when SCREEN key is pressed while on a call. AOM KEY FIRST If selected, extensions assigned to keys are displayed when SCREEN key is pressed while on a call. 4 CALENDAR Sets whether to display PREVIOUS screen or CALENDAR screen on LCD when idle. 5 AOM CURSOR Sets cursor position on AOM menu screen.(01~99, PREV POSITION) DEFAULT DATA IDLE DISPLAY: CALENDAR DS KEY DISPLAY: TEL NUMBER DIAL MODE: ENBLOCK ACTION 2-36 DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 120. Display shows: [201] IDLE DISP 2) Enter station number.(e.g., 203) OR Press Volume button to scroll through stations and press Right Soft button to select a station. OR Select all stations and press the Right Soft button. [203] IDLE DISP 3) Dial the option number from above list.(e.g., 1) OR Press Volume button to select the option and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. [203] DS KEY DSP CALENDER CALENDER [ALL] IDLE DISP CALENDER TEL NUMBER Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 4) Press Volume button to select display type and press Right Soft button. [203] DS KEY DSP EXT NAME 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 719 IDLE DISPLAY Samsung Business Communications 2-37 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [121] PHONE LANGUAGE Allows the system administrator to assign an LCD display based on the user’s own language. No Language 00 ENGLISH 01 GERMAN 02 PORTUGAL 03 NORSK 04 DANISH 05 DUTCH 06 ITALY 07 SPANISH 08 SWEDISH 09 SPANISH/USA 10 FRENCH/CANADA 11 FINNISH DEFAULT DATA ENGLISH ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 121. Display shows: [201] LANGUAGE 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and use Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] LANGUAGE 3) Dial 00~10 for language required. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. [205] LANGUAGE ENGLISH ENGLISH [ALL] LANGUAGE ? GERMAN 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. 2-38 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-39 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED Used to set the Smart News display speed between 0300 mS(fastest) and 1 sec(slowest). This timer is related to the Smart News PC Application Package. DEFAULT DATA 03(0300 mS) ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 122. Display shows first station: [201] CALL SPEED 2) Enter station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to scroll through stations and press Right Soft button to select a station. OR Select all stations. [205] CALL SPEED 3) Dial speed option.(03~10) [205] CALL SPEED 03Æ 03Æ 03Æ04 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-40 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [125] EXECUTIVE STATE Allows the system administrator or technician to set an executive station’s options, as follows. No 0 Option EXEC STATE Description When working with EASYSET, the state of the executive station can be displayed.(e.g., IN A MEETING) 1 STATE(IN) 2 STATE(OUT) If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS(IN), EASYSET displays this message. If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS(OUT), EASYSET displays this message. 3 ANSWER MODE Set answer mode for executive/secretary calling: Ring, Auto Answer, Voice Announce.(Refer to MMC 103 for a description of answer modes.) ENTER CHARACTERS Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 125. Display shows: [201] EXEC STATE 2) Dial executive station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] EXEC STATE 3) Dial 0~3 to select option.(see the table above). OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. [205] EXEC STATE 4) Dial 0~9 to select state.(e.g., IN A MEETING) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. [205] EXEC STATE IN THE ROOM IN THE ROOM IN THE ROOM IN A MEETING 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. Samsung Business Communications 2-41 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-42 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [199] SHOW LICENSE STATUS Allows the system administrator or technician to confirm the status(Valid or Invalid) of the inserted license key. No Feature Description 0 MGI MAX The license status for MGI port 1 VMS MAX The license status for VMS port 2 SOFT MAX The license status for SoftPhone max 3 SOFT USE The license status for SoftPhone use 4 SOFT CON The license status for SoftPhone connect 5 NEWS USE The license status for NEWS USE DEFAULT DATA INVALID ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 199. SHOW LICENSE STS MGI MAX: INVALID 2) Use Volume buttons to confirm the status of the in- SHOW LICENSE STS serted license key. VMS MAX: 8 3) Press Transfer button to exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTION Samsung Business Communications 2-43 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING Used to open(enable) and close(disable) customer-level programming. If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC, the error message [NOT PERMIT] will be displayed. A four digits passcode is required to access this MMC. Each digit can be 0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs allowed in MMC 802, Customer Access MMC Number. No Mode Description 0 DISABLE Open(enable) customer-level programming. 1 ENABLE Close(disable) customer-level programming. DEFAULT DATA DISABLE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 200. Display shows: ENABLE CUS.PROG. 2) Enter passcode. ENABLE CUS.PROG. PASSCODE: PASSCODE: Correct code shows. ENABLE CUS.PROG. DISABLE Incorrect code shows. ENABLE CUS.PROG. PASSCODE ERROR 3) Press Volume button arrow key to select ENABLE or DISABLE and press Right Soft button. OR Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE. ENABLE CUS.PROG. 4) Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry level and press Volume button to select MMC. OR Enter MMC number and press Right Soft button to enter MMC. 201:CUS.PASSCODE ENABLE SELECT PROG. ID 5) Press Transfer button to exit. RELATED ITEMS MMC 201 MMC 501 MMC 802 2-44 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE Used to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200, Open Customer Programming, from its current value. CONDITIONS y The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0-9. y The current(old) passcode is required for this MMC. DEFAULT DATA PASSCODE: 1234 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 201. CUST. PASSCODE NEW CODE:_ 2) Enter new passcode via dial keypad. (maximum four digits) CUST. PASSCODE 3) Verify new passcode via dial keypad. CUST. PASSCODE NEW CODE:**** VERIFY :**** Passcode verified.(go to step 4) OR Passcode failure.(return to step 2) CUST. PASSCODE VERIFY :SUCCESS CUST. PASSCODE VERIFY :FAILURE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications 2-45 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE Used to change the passcodes for the following features. No 0 Feature Description RING PLAN The passcode required to place the system in different Ring Plans(RP) or change the Ring Time Override(RTO). 1 DISA ALARM The passcode required to clear a DISA ALARM generated when the number of DISA attempts are exceeded. 2 ALARM CLR The passcode required to clear an ALARM generated by the disconnection of BI-PMS SIO.(Hotel Application only) 5 DELETE This passcode is used to allow items to be deleted from a room bill. (Hotel Application only) 6 WLAN REGST The passcode required to register a WIP phone. CONDITIONS y The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0~9. y The current passcode is required for this MMC. DEFAULT DATA RING PLAN: 0000 DISA ALARM: 5678 ALARM CLR: 8765 DECT REGST: 4321 DELETE: 9999 WLAN REGST: 0000 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 202. Display shows: CHANGE PASSCODE 2) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor to passcode entry. CHANGE PASSCODE 3) Enter new passcode via digits from dial keypad. CHANGE PASSCODE RING PLAN :0000 AA RECORD :4321 AA RECORD :9999 Press Right Soft button to return to step 2. Continue to change other passcodes. 2-46 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 410 MMC 507 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME Samsung Business Communications 2-47 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE Assigns ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer(UA) key is pressed or the UA pickup code is dialled. UA assignment is made in MMC 601, Assign Station Group, for a group and then the group is entered here. The device type is automatically determined by the Directory Number(DN) entered. Ringing Device Description NONE(NO UA) No phone number STATION Station number STN GROUP Station group number RING PAGE External speaker phone number COMMON BELL Common bell phone number When setting the MMC [203] Only one of the above options can be selected. If the ability to ring more than one item(e.g., all four external page zones) is required, a station group containing all four zone codes must be created. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 203. Display shows current assignment: ASSIGN UA PORT 2) Dial DN of UA device.(e.g., 205) OR Use Volume buttons to scroll through available devices. ASSIGN UA PORT NONE-NO UA 205 -STATION 3) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 204 MMC 601 MMC 605 2-48 COMMON BELL CONTROL ASSIGN STATION GROUP ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [204] COMMON BELL CONTROL Determines whether the common bell relay contacts have an interrupted or continuous closure when activated. If interrupted is chosen, the relay follows an internal Trunk Line ring pattern of one second closed followed by three seconds open. CONDITIONS When the common bell is not used for night time ring, the common bell must be set to a station group so that all stations in the group ring. DEFAULT DATA CONTINUOUS ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 204. Display shows current setting: [3801]COM. BELL 2) Dial common bell number. OR Press Volume button to make selection of common bell numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. [3801]COM. BELL 3) Dial 0 for continuous or 1 for interrupted operation. OR Use Volume button to scroll through options and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [3802]COM. BELL CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS INTERRUPTED 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 203 MMC 601 ASSIGN UA DEVICE ASSIGN STATION GROUP Samsung Business Communications 2-49 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL Designates the station that controls the loud bell ring output of a MIS card.(Each MIS card provides one loud bell port.) The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated station. CONDITIONS Only a station can be assigned to control the loud bell, not a station group. DEFAULT DATA UNASSIGNED ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 205. Display shows current setting. [3901]LOUD BELL 2) Dial loud bell number.(e.g., 3902) OR Use Volume button to scroll through loud bell numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. [3902]LOUD BELL 3) Enter station number.(e.g., 201) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [3902]LOUD BELL RING PAIR:NONE RING PAIR:NONE RING PAIR:201 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-50 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [206] BARGE-IN TYPE Sets the type of barge-in that is permitted. No 0 Type NO BARGE-IN Description Barge-in feature is unavailable regardless of a station’s barge-in status. 1 WITH TONE Barge-in will have an intrusion tone and display at the station barged-in on. 2 WITHOUT TONE Barge-in is allowed. There is no barge-in tone or display at the station barged-in on and the barging-in station will be muted. DEFAULT DATA NO BARGE-IN ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 206. Display shows: BARGE IN TYPE 2) Dial 0-2 to select barge-in type.(e.g., 2) OR Press Volume button to select barge-in type and press Right Soft button. BARGE IN TYPE NO BARGE IN WITHOUT TONE 3) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 MMC 701 ASSIGN STATION COS ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications 2-51 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT Enables SLI ports to be designated as NORMAL or VM/AA. VM/AA ports receive digits and also receive a true disconnect signal on completion of a call. Only SLI cards, not keyset daughter-boards, support disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports data; this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration. VM/AA ports have the equivalent of data protect written in the program and are protected against tones. When using the MMC [207] This MMC is not used to assign voice mail card ports. Voice mail card ports are assigned as voice mail ports automatically when the system detects an SVM-400 or SVMi-20 card. DEFAULT DATA NORMAL PORT ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 207. [209] VMAA PORT NORMAL PORT Display shows: 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] VMAA PORT 3) Dial 1 or 0 to select port type. (1:VMAA, 0:NORMAL) OR Press Volume button to select type and press Right Soft button. [205] VMAA PORT NORMAL PORT VMAA PORT 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS 2-52 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [208] ASSIGN RING TYPE Allows programming of single lines to have ICM ringing, Trunk Line ringing and data secure. With the many types of external ringing devices, all configurations can be met. All devices will also have a positive disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports data; this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration. No Type Description 0 ICM RING Follows normal SLI ring cadence. 1 CO RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence. 2 DATA RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence and does not support off-hook ring. DEFAULT DATA ICM RING ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 208. Display shows: [209] RING TYPE 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] RING TYPE 3) Dial 1, 2 or 0 to select port type.(e.g., 2) OR Press Volume button to select type and press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 above. [205] RING TYPE ICM RING ICM RING DATA RING 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-53 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE Designates to which phone an add-on module(AOM) is assigned. There is no limit to the number of AOMs that can be assigned in the system. A maximum of four AOMs can be assigned to a keyset. CONDITIONS An AOM cannot be designated as Master. If no AOM exists in the system, the ‘AOM NOT EXIST’ message is displayed. DEFAULT DATA MASTER:NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 209. Display shows first AOM: [301] AOM MASTER 2) Dial AOM number. OR Use Volume button to scroll through AOM numbers and use Soft buttons to move cursor. [301] AOM MASTER 3) Enter station number.(e.g., 301) OR Use Volume button for selection of stations and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [301] AOM MASTER MASTER:NONE MASTER:NONE MASTER:201 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-54 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT Allows the system administrator to set system features on a per-tenant basis. Each system option has a corresponding dialling number, as listed below. All options toggle ON/OFF. No 00 Option DISA PSWD Default ON Description When ON, a caller must enter extension number and DISA password when they call a DISA trunk. When OFF, extension number and DISA password are not required and the caller has full access to all features allowed on this trunk. 01 LCR ENABLE OFF This option determines whether the system will or will not route outgoing calls based on the information in the LCR routing tables 03 PERI UCD RPT OFF Periodic UCD Information provider. Enables UCD Statistics data on a per-UCD group basis to print out on the IO port which has been set as PERI UCD in real time(every 3~99 seconds). This allows the information to be interfaced and manipulated by an external package or third party provided software. 04 CID CODE INS OFF When ON, the system will insert the country code when receiving CID information. This feature can use the CID display callback feature. 05 DISA MOH OFF When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of dial tone from the time the system answers a DISA trunk until the caller dials a digit. 06 TRANSFER OFF MOH When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of ringback tone from the time a transfer is completed until the call is answered by an internal party. 08 DID BSY ROUT OFF When ON, a DID call directed to a busy station will re-route to the destination in MMC 406 for that trunk, if CW is set to OFF in MMC 714. If the CW option is set to ON the call will camp on. When OFF and the CW option is set to OFF, the call will re-route to the operator. 09 ALARM MOH ON When ON, a station user answering an alarm ring will hear station MOH instead of dial tone. 13 RECALL PIKUP OFF When ON, a call recalling to a station can be picked up using Direct Call Pickup, Pickup Group and My Group features. This applies to held calls recalling and transferred calls recalling to a station. Samsung Business Communications 2-55 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) No 14 Option ICM EXT FWD Default OFF Description When ON, call forward external is allowed when intercom calls are placed to a station that has Call Forward External programmed and set. 16 DID ERR TONE OFF This option provides error tone when an invalid DID number is received. 18 KTS DISC ALM OFF When ON, generates a system alarm when a phone disconnects or connects. 19 OFF HOOK ALM OFF When ON, generates a system alarm when a phone stays off-hook longer than this timer. 20 SL SELF RING OFF When ON, generates ring of 10 seconds when a single line phone dials itself and hangs up(self test). 21 SGR INC BUSY OFF When ON, generates busy tone when all station group members are busy for a group call. This does not work for station groups which have Unconditional Ring mode set. 24 TRANSFER OFF CANCEL When OFF, a single line phone can handle 2 calls simultaneously using the hook-flash to toggle between them. When ON, a single line phone can connect to the second call, but pressing the hook-flash will not toggle between the two calls it will disconnect the second call and reconnect the single line phone to the first call. 26 RECALL DISC OFF When ON, the system disconnects a transferred call when it recalls. 29 ARD TONE CHK ON When system detects CO BUSY TONE from Central Office, it returns to auto redial state. 30 VPN ENABLE OFF When ON, VPN is enabled.(Australia only.) 31 IN TOLL CHK OFF When OFF, the system doesn’t toll restrict incoming calls. ISDN PROG- OFF When ON, if an outgoing call receives PROGRESS mes- 32 CON sage from ISDN trunk, the call will connect without CONNECT message. 33 INCLUDE VAT OFF When ON, an ‘Inclusive VAT of’ line is printed on Hotel invoices(Hotel Application). 36 DSS KEY DPU OFF When ON, pressing a DS key will pick up the call at a ringing station 37 BEGN DGT DSP OFF When ON, and an outside call is made via speed dial or LNR where more than 11 digits are dialled, then only the first 11 dialled digits are shown on the phone display. 38 ONE TCH FACC 2-56 OFF When OFF, phone users cannot use one-touch account code(ACC) key. Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No 39 Option SGR ALL OUT Default OFF Description When ON, the last remaining station group member can leave a group. 40 CHAIN FWD ON If ON, an incoming call forwarded from a station to another station may then be forwarded to the mailbox of the second station, if the latter is set for ‘forward to voice mail’. If this option is OFF, the call may only be forwarded to the mailbox of the first station. 41 TRK MONITER OFF If ON, the system will monitor the trunk supervision signalling. That is, if a disconnection signal is received from the exchange, the call will be cleared and the extension will go back on hook. 42 VOIP MFRALOC OFF If ON, this allocates a DTMF receiver for a VOIP tandem caller breaking out on another trunk group. 43 NTWK OFF AUTOTMR 44 USE EURO If OFF, the call timer in the phone display will not function if the call is from a network connection(Q-SIG). OFF If ON, the unit of currency shown in call displays and on SMDR reports will be Euros(€).(This will also display on Hotel Application invoices.) 45 NO STAFF OFF COD 46 PERI UCD SIO When ON, the steps verifying the staff code will be omitted in Hotel operation. OFF When ON, the PERI UCD data will be sent to the SMDR IO port. 47 AUTO OFF CLEANED Normally, when a room is checked-out, the room status is changed to NEED CLEAN. When the option is set to ON, the room status will be changed to AVAILABLE instead.(Hotel Application.) 48 REDIAL REVW OFF When ON, the CALL LOG review will appear when the Redial or LNR button is pressed. 50 ISDN KEYFAC OFF If ON, allows Keypad Facility messages to be sent to the exchange to invoke network features. 52 CHK SPV TRK OFF When ON, if trunks don’t have the supervision feature they cannot make outgoing transfers or unsupervised conferences. 53 PRE FWD OFF BUSY When ON, and a call arrives at a busy station that is not set for forward busy, if a preset no answer destination is available the call is re-routed to that destination. 54 ORG DIAL LOG OFF When ON, all dialled digits will be saved in the outgoing call log for Large LCD phones. When OFF, invalid dialling such as dialling of a non-existent station number will not be saved in the outgoing call log for Large LCD phones. Samsung Business Communications 2-57 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) No Option 56 VOIP REALRBT Default OFF Description When ON, the system will connect the real path of the outgoing trunk to the incoming VoIP trunk user instead of providing virtual ringback tone. 57 CO-CO TM ALL OFF When ON, the system trunk call will be attached timer for preven the call from locking up 58 SMDR LOG OFF ALL 59 NO ITEM COST In case of admin or normal station, and although cost is 0, the smdr record can be saved when this option is set. OFF When ON, during check-in in hotel, item code and cost don’t have to be entered. It is possible to skip. 60 SMDR OFF AUT2ACC 64 IPNW REAL RB When ON, the AUTHORIZATION CODE will be printed in ACCOUNT field of SMDR. OFF When ON, the system will connect the real path of the outgoing trunk to the VoIP networking trunk user instead of providing virtual ringback tone. 66 TRK AUTO OFF MOH When ON, an incoming trunk call is connected to MOH automatically after the DISA ANSWR timer(MMC 503) expires and the caller hears MOH. If the TRK AUTOMOH DISC timer in MMC501 expires before the call is answered, it is disconnected.(To use this feature, MMC 400 AUTO ANSWER option must set to ON.) 67 TRSF VT KEY ON When ON, works like the VT key when the user transfers the call to Voice Mail using the TRSF key. 68 PAIR NO RING OFF When ON, if a paired phone is busy the call camps on and a message waiting indication is set at the busy phone and does not ring the free paired extension. 69 DISA NO ACT OFF When ON, a DISA call will go to the station assigned in MMC 406 after the DISA NO ACT timer expires. 70 ICM AUTO- OFF HOLD When ON, will allow internal calls to be put on hold automatically when another call is taken. 71 DTMF TO S0 OFF When ON, DTMF can be sent to S0 station 72 STNHOLD OFF The holded call can be picked up by other station. OFF When ON, if call is created by phonebook, area code can be PICK 73 AREA DELETE deleted. 74 ELCR DIALTON OFF In case of second lcr, dial tone can be different. 75 NET DTMF OFF When spnet and station is seizing trk port and listening dial FWD 2-58 tone, it can be forward to external. Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 210. Display shows: TEN. ON AND OFF 2) Dial option number.(e.g., 00) Press Right Soft button to move cursor. TEN. ON AND OFF 3) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. TEN. ON AND OFF DISA PSWD DISA PSWD DISA PSWD :OFF :OFF :ON 4) Repeat steps 2-3 for other options. OR Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-59 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT Designates which station or group of stations will ring when a door phone button is pressed. If the ring plan destinations are not entered the default ring plan 1 is used. Available ring plans are 1 to 6. DEFAULT DATA STATION GROUP: 500 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 211. Display shows first door phone: [229] DOOR RING 2) Dial door phone number.(e.g., 230) OR Press Volume button to scroll through door phone numbers and use the Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select All door ring. [230] DOOR RING 3) Enter new ring plan number selection via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. [250] DOOR RING 1:500 1:500 2:500 2:500 [ALL] DOOR RING 1:500 1:301 2:500 2:500 4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2. OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3. OR Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 601 2-60 ASSIGN STATION GROUP Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION Assigns the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone. It is recommended that the person who can clear the alarm also receives the notification. CONDITIONS y A valid destination can be either a station group or an individual station. y The alarm ringing station or group will follow the ring plan time destination. DEFAULT DATA ALL RING PLANS: 500 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 214. Display shows: DISA ALARM RING 2) Enter valid destination number for ring plan. (e.g., 217) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. DISA ALARM RING 3) Enter valid destination number for another ring plan.(e.g., 249) OR Press Volume button to make selection. DISA ALARM RING 1:500 1:217 1:217 2:500 2:500 2:249 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 202 MMC 601 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE ASSIGN STATION GROUP Samsung Business Communications 2-61 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [217] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION This MMC is used to print a traffic report and select options. The traffic report can be printed on demand, or every hour, or at a programmed time each day, or for up to three separately-timed shifts. Automatic printing will always clear the totals. When report MANUAL PRINT OUT is selected, the options are: No Option Description 0 PRINT AND CLEAR A report is printed and all totals are reset to 0. 1 PRINTOUT ONLY A report is printed and all the totals are saved. 2 CANCEL PRINTOUT Cancels printout. When AUTO PRINT OPTN is selected, the options are: No Option Description 0 AUTO PRINT OFF Automatic print feature is disabled. 1 DAILY A report is printed at a programmable time every day and all the totals are reset to ‘0’. 2 EVERY HOUR A report will be printed every hour. 3 THREE TIME SHIFT Up to three separate Start and End times may be programmed to report traffic within different shifts. A report is printed at the end of each End time and all totals are reset to ‘0’. When a report is printed, the totals represent call statistics accumulated from the date of the last report stated as BEGINNING: D & T up to the date of this printout stated as ENDING D & T. If there are no trunks in a group, the trunk group report for that group will not print. CONDITIONS If this function is required in an OfficeServ 7100 system with an MCP card, you must connect the LAN cable to the MCP card and be connected to a terminal supporting the TCP/IP function. DEFAULT DATA AUTO PRINT OFF 2-62 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 217. Display shows: TRAFFIC REPORT 2) Dial 0 for manual or 1 for automatic print. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button. TRAFFIC REPORT 3) If AUTO selected, dial 0, 1, 2 or 3 for automatic print option. OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button. TRAFFIC REPORT 4) Enter daily report time.(HHMM) TRAFFIC REPORT MANUAL PRINTOUT AUTO PRINT OPTN DAILY HHMM:2359 DAILY HHMM:2200 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS Samsung Business Communications 2-63 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [219] RELAY TYPE Assigns the service type of three relay ports of misc card. Service consists of External Page, Common bell , loud bell, NOT USED. DEFAULT DATA External Page ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 219. Display shows: [362] RELAY TYPE 2) Enter the station number. OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button. [362] ISDN SVC 3) Select service type.(0-3) OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button. [362] RELAY TYPE EXTERNAL PAGE EXTERNAL PAGE EXTERNAL PAGE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-64 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [220] ISDN SERVICE TYPE Assigns the ISDN service type of a single line telephone port. Service consists of BC (Bearer Capability) and HLC(High Layer Capability). No Type Description BC HLC 0 VOICE Voice service Speech - 1 FAX 3 G3 FAX service 3.1 kHz Audio FAX G2/G3 2 AUDIO 3.1 3.1 kHz Audio service 3.1 kHz Audio None 3 MODEM MODEM service 3.1 kHz Audio Telephony DEFAULT DATA VOICE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 220. Display shows: [209] ISDN SVC 2) Enter the station number.(e.g., 210) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button. [210] ISDN SVC 3) Select service type.(0-3) OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button. [210] ISDN SVC VOICE VOICE AUDIO 3.1 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-65 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [221] EXTENSION TYPE This MMC assigns station ports for a specific use. Each phone can be designated as one of five types(see table). These types can be changed by dialling the type number or by scrolling through the types and pressing the Right Soft button to select the type. No 0 Type NORMAL STATION Description This is the default setting. The station will operate in the normal manner associated with this type of station. Ports designated as VMAA in MMC 207 must be designated as normal in this MMC. 1 GUEST SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room status and check-in features as a smoking room. 2 GUEST NO SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room status and check-in features as a non-smoking room. 3 MEETING ROOM Stations designated as Meeting Rooms will have the same attributes as guest rooms with regard to cleaning and occupied status but will not show up while scrolling through room status lists. 4 ADMINISTRATOR Only stations designated as administrator stations can use Hotel features.(check in, etc.) 5 FAX STATION When a station is designated as this type it can be assigned as a ‘pair’ station to a GUEST SMOKING ROOM or GUEST NO SMOKING ROOM in MMC 222. CONDITIONS This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL OPERATION. DEFAULT DATA NORMAL STATION ACTION 2-66 DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 221. Display shows: [201] PHONE USE 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 214) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [214] PHONE USE NORMAL STATION NORMAL STATION Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 3) Dial 0 - 5 to select station type. OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button. [214] PHONE USE GUEST NO SMOKING 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION Samsung Business Communications 2-67 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [222] FAX PAIR Enables a guest room to have a normal phone line and fax line simultaneously. Only a Guest No Smoking Room or Guest Smoking Room can be assigned a fax pair station which is already assigned as a fax station in MMC 221. DEFAULT DATA NONE CONDITIONS This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL OPERATION. This MMC can be used only when there is station that set GUEST SMOKING, GUEST NO SMOKING in MMC 222, and if not, display ‘ROOM NOT EXIST’: ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 222. Display shows: [201] FAX PAIR 2) Dial guest extension number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button. [205] FAX PAIR 3) Dial fax station number.(e.g., 301) OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button. [205] FAX PAIR NONE NONE 301 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 221 MMC 813 2-68 EXTENSION TYPE HOTEL OPERATION Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [224] WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT This MMC is an enhanced Wake Up feature. The system will play a recorded message when a Wake Up call is answered by the user. The Wake Up Announcement feature requires an SVMi-20 card to be installed in the system. When a Wake Up call is answered, the system will access the customized Wake Up message(1-48) recorded in the card. The end user can record this message and also change it if desired. The Wake Up message will have no default ROM message assigned to it; however, a ROM message(49-64) may also be assigned as the Wake Up message if desired. This MMC has three options. No 0 Option AA GROUP Description Determines which AA group will be connected when a Wake Up call is answered. This destination can be any AA group. 1 MESSAGE NO Determines which message will be played when a Wake Up call is answered. This destination can be a custom recorded message (1-48) or one of the pre-programmed messages(49-64). 2 GROUP BUSY Determines which tone source will be connected when all AA group members are busy. This destination can be NONE, TONE or external music on hold. If NONE is set then dial tone is connected; if TONE is set then hold tone is connected. CONDITIONS NONE DEFAULT DATA AA GROUP: NONE MESSAGE NO: NONE GROUP BUSY: NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 224. Display shows: WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE 2) Dial 0, 1 or 2 for option select. OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button. WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE Samsung Business Communications AA GROUP :NONE AA GROUP :NONE 2-69 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 3) Enter the AA group number. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE AA GROUP :520 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-70 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION Allows the following features to be enabled/disabled on a per-station basis. No 00 Option ACCESS DIAL Default ON Description Determines whether a user can select a trunk or trunk group by dialling its Directory Number(DN). This selection should be turned off when using LCR. 01 MICROPHONE ON Allows phones to be used in speakerphone mode. 02 OFF-HOOK RING ON Will allow a short burst of ring tone to indicate another call. 03 SMDR PRINT ON When the station is set for no Trunk Line calls to and from this station, the station will not print on SMDR. This includes transferred calls or calls picked up from hold or park. 04 TGR ADV.TONE ON When this feature is set to ON, a warning tone will be heard each time LCR advances to the next route. 05 VMAA FORWARD ON This feature selects whether Trunk Line calls can be forwarded to voice mail: ON, permits forward to voice mail; OFF, no forward to voice mail. 07 NGT PASSCODE ON When ON, the steps verifying the ring plan passcode will be added in Ring Plan change. 08 INTRCOM SMDR OFF When the station is set to OFF, the station will not print intercom calls on SMDR. 09 FWD DELAY USE OFF When ON, calls will overflow to the Forward No Answer destination when the Forward No Answer timer expires even when the Forward No Answer feature is not activated at the called party extension. 11 FORWARD OVRD OFF When set to ON and the station calls another station which has forwarding set, the call will not forward. 12 RECL TO OPER OFF When the station is set to ON, if the station transfers a call and the destination doesn’t answer, the call will recall to the operator instead of the station. 13 SLT LP OPEN OFF When ON, SLI port receives real disconnect signal instead of busy or error tone.(VMAA or DATA ports always receive real disconnect signal.) 15 CID TO SLT OFF When a MIS card is installed and this option is set to ON, the system will provide the CID signal to SLTs. 22 NO RCL FLASH OFF When the hook switch is flashed or the flash key is pressed, a recall signal will not be sent to the system. 23 RBK STN NAME OFF When ringback, station name can be displayed, instead of “Ringing” Samsung Business Communications 2-71 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 300. Display shows: [201] CUS.ON/OFF 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR [205] CUS.ON/OFF Press Volume button to select station. OR Select all stations and press Right Soft button to move cursor. ACCESS DIAL :ON ACCESS DIAL :ON [ALL] CUS.ON/OFF ACCESS DIAL :ON 3) Press Volume button to select feature and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [ALL] CUS.ON/OFF 4) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button. [ALL] CUS.ON/OFF ACCESS DIAL :ON ACCESS DIAL :OFF 5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2. Press Right Soft button to return to step 1. OR Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS LCR PROGRAMMING: MMC 710 MMC 711 MMC 712 2-72 LCR DIGIT TABLE LCR TIME TABLE LCR ROUTE TABLE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [301] ASSIGN STATION COS Used to assign a class of service to each phone. There are 30 different classes of service (defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents) and six ring plans based on the Ring Plan Time in MMC 507 that can apply to the COS. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. The default is COS 01. DEFAULT DATA RING PLANS 1-6: 01 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 301. Display shows first station: [201] STN COS 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Use Volume button to scroll through stations. Press Right Soft button to advance step 3. OR Use Volume button to scroll through stations and press Left Soft button to advance to step 4. OR Select all stations. [205] STN COS 3) Enter new ring plan selection via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] STN COS 4) Enter ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05) OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to advance to the next ring plan. OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2. [205] STN COS Samsung Business Communications 1:01 2:01 3:01 1:01 2:01 3:01 [ALL] STN COS 1:01 2:01 3:01 1:01 2:01 3:01 1:05 2:01 3:01 2-73 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 5) Enter the next ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05) OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to move cursor to the next ring plan. OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to previous step. [205] STN COS 1:05 2:01 3:01 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 701 2-74 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [302] PICKUP GROUPS Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups. There is a maximum of 20 pickup groups. An unlimited number of members can belong to each group. Stations can only be in one pickup group at any given time. DEFAULT DATA NO PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGNED ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 302. Display shows: [201] PICKUP GRP 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Use Volume button to select station number and press Right Soft button. OR Select all stations. [205] PICKUP GRP 3) Dial pickup group number.(e.g., 05) OR Press Volume button to select group number. [205] PICKUP GRP PICKUP GRP:NONE PICKUP GRP:NONE [ALL] PICKUP GRP PICKUP GRP:?? PICKUP GRP:05 4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 to enter more stations. OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3. OR Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 MMC 722 MMC 723 KEY EXTENDER STATION KEY PROGRAMMING SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications 2-75 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY Assigns BOSS phones to SECRETARY phones. One BOSS station can have up to and including four SECRETARY stations and one SECRETARY station can have up to and including four BOSS stations. CONDITIONS y A dedicated BOSS button must be programmed on the SECRETARY phone(s). y A dedicated BOSS button must also be programmed on the BOSS phone. y A station designated as BOSS may not be assigned as a secretary of another BOSS. DEFAULT DATA NONE PROGRAM BUTTONS F BUTTON Used to toggle BOSS/SECRETARY field ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 303. Display shows. BOSS STN:NONE SECR 1:NONE 2) Dial BOSS station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button. BOSS STN:205 SECR 1:NONE 3) Dial SECRETARY number.(1, 2, 3 or 4) OR Press Volume button to select number and press Right Soft button. BOSS STN:205 SECR 1:NONE 4) Dial SECRETARY station number.(e.g., 201) OR Press Volume button to select station. Press Right Soft button to return to step 3 to enter more SECR numbers. BOSS STN:205 SECR 1:201 BOSS STN:205 SECR 2:202 5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 and continue entries. OR Press Transfer button and enter to exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 722 2-76 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE Allows you to select which stations are allowed to make calls through C.O. lines or to answer calls for C.O. lines.(on a station and trunk use group basis) CONDITIONS y Stations are set within use group numbers 001~100and trunks are set within use group numbers 101~200 in MMC 614, ASSIGN USE GROUP. y If a station group is set to NO Dial, stations cannot place calls on that trunk group. y If a station group is set to NO Answer, stations cannot answer incoming calls on that trunk group. Note: MMC 406, Trunk Ring Assignment, overrides this MMC for the Answer option. DEFAULT DATA DIAL: YES ANS: YES ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 304. Display shows: (001) USE (101) 2) Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 005) OR Press Volume button to select station use group and press Right Soft button. OR Select all station use groups. (005) USE (101) 3) Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 101) OR Press Volume button to select trunk use group and press Right Soft button. OR Select all trunk use groups. (005) USE (101) Samsung Business Communications DIAL:YES ANS:YES DIAL:YES ANS:YES (ALL) USE (101) DIAL:YES ANS:YES DIAL:YES ANS:YES (005) USE (ALL) DIAL:YES ANS:YES 2-77 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 4) Press Volume button to select YES/NO option. OR Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor to ANS option. Press Volume button to select YES/NO Option. OR Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. (005) USE (101) DIAL:NO ANS:YES (005) USE (101) DIAL:NO ANS:YES 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 316 MMC 614 2-78 COPY STATION USABLE STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE This MMC allows one of the four options to be selected: the assignment of account codes with verification, account codes without verification and authorization codes(or none of these) on a per-station basis or on an all-station basis. The system supports 500 authorization codes and 999 account codes which may or may not require verification. No Type Description 0 NONE No Account or Authorization code required.(strictly voluntary) 1 AUTHORIZE CODE Forces user to enter a valid Authorization code of four or more digits listed in the AUTHORIZATION CODE Table.(MMC 707) 2 ACCT VERIFIED Forces user to enter a valid Account code listed in the ACCOUNT CODE Table.(MMC 708) 3 ACCT NO VERIFIED Forces user to enter an Account code which is not verified. User can enter any code up to 12 digits.(including ∗ and #) DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 305. Display shows. [201] FORCD CODE NONE 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] FORCD CODE NONE 3) Dial a feature option 0-3.(e.g., 2) OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] FORCD CODE ACCT VERIFIED 4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 707 MMC 708 AUTHORIZATION CODE ACCOUNT CODE Samsung Business Communications 2-79 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION Allows a station to make a predetermined call, similar to a ring-down circuit, upon the expiration of a timer.(see MMC 502, STATION TIMERS, Off-Hook Selection Timer) CONDITIONS y The hotline destination can be a station, a station group, a trunk, a trunk group or an external number. y There is a maximum of 18 digits in the dial string for external numbers. The access code for trunk or trunk group access(e.g., 0 or 9) is not counted as part of the 18. DEFAULT DATA NONE PROGRAM BUTTONS B C D E Used to insert a flash code ‘F’ Used to insert a pause code ‘P’ Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’ Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’ ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 306. Display shows. [201] HOT LINE 2) Dial station number. OR Use Volume button to scroll through stations. Press Right Soft button to move the cursor. [205] HOT LINE 3) Enter the hot line destination of a station or trunk ID(e.g., 9 or 701) with a maximum of 18 outgoing digits after the access code for the CO call.(see above list of options if needed) [205] HOT LINE NONE NONE 9-1305P4264100_ 4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 502 2-80 STATION-WIDE TIMERS(OFF-HOOK SELECTION TIMER) Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE Assigns a background music source to phones. There is one internal music source/external music source. The default directory numbers for the music sources are 371. CONDITIONS To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the misc port of MP10/11 card. If ‘NONE’ is set for background music or if a sound source is not connected to the external sound source port designated as the background music source, music will not be played even if the background music function is enabled. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 308. Display shows current setting. [201] BGM SOURCE 2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) OR Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] BGM SOURCE 3) Enter source number.(e.g.,371) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] BGM SOURCE BGM SOURCE:NONE BGM SOURCE:NONE [ALL] BGM SOURCE BGM SOURCE:? BGM SOURCE: 371 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 309 MMC 408 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE Samsung Business Communications 2-81 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE Assigns a Music On Hold source to phones. There is one internal music source/external music source. The default directory numbers for the music sources is 371. CONDITIONS To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the external sound source of MISC port of MP10/11 card. DEFAULT DATA TONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 309. Display shows current setting: [201] STN MOH 2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205) OR Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. OR Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations. [205] STN MOH 3) Enter source number.(e.g., 371) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] STN MOH MOH SOURCE:NONE MOH SOURCE:NONE [ALL] STN MOH MOH SOURCE:? MOH SOURCE:371 4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 308 MMC 408 2-82 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE Assigns the LCR class of service allowed on a per-station/per-trunk basis. There are eight classes which may be assigned. LCR class of service allows specific users to ‘trunk advance’ up to a matching LCR class of service programmed in MMC 712. DEFAULT DATA LEAST COST ROUTING COS: 1 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 310. Display shows: [201] LCR CLASS 2) Dial station/trunk number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] LCR CLASS 3) Dial 1-8 to select class type.(e.g., 3) OR Press Volume button to select class type and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] LCR CLASS LCR CLASS 1 LCR CLASS 1 [ALL] LCR CLASS LCR CLASS ? LCR CLASS 3 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS LCR PROGRAMMING: MMC 710 MMC 711 MMC 712 MMC 713 LCR DIGIT TABLE LCR TIME TABLE LCR ROUTE TABLE LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE Samsung Business Communications 2-83 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [312] ALLOW CALLER ID Allows the system administrator or technician to allow or deny CID data to be sent from, or displayed at, LCD phones. Option Description RCV Set whether to display CID. SND Set whether to send CID for ISDN calls. DEFAULT DATA RCV: YES SND: YES ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 312. Display shows: [201] CID/ANI 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] CID/ANI 3) Dial 0 or 1 to select Receive option. OR Press Volume button to select receive option and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] CID/ANI 4) Dial 0 or 1 to select Send option. OR Press Volume button to select send option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] CID/ANI RCV:YES SND:YES RCV:YES SND:YES [ALL] CID/ANI RCV:YES SND:YES RCV:YES SND:YES RCV:YES SND:YES 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 119 2-84 CALLER ID DISPLAY Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL Allows outgoing call restriction by call duration time: calls can be disconnected or the user can receive ‘confirm tone’.(refer to the CO Confirm timer in MMC 501) No Type Description 0 NONE No action 1 CONFIRM TONE Caller hears confirmation tone at programmed time 2 DISCONNECT Call is disconnected. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 314. Display shows: [201] CO CONFIRM 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and use Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] CO CONFIRM 3) Dial a feature option 0-2. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] CO CONFIRM NONE NONE [ALL] CO CONFIRM NONE CONFIRM TONE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 501 SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS Samsung Business Communications 2-85 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [315] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION Customer Set Relocation allows the system administrator or technician to exchange similar stations in the system without hardware changes. All the button settings, features, etc. for a phone can be copied to another. The user can relocate to the new station and work as normal. CONDITIONS Refer to the Relocate Allowed Table(next page) listing which phones/AOMs can be exchanged. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 315. Display shows: SET RELOCATION 2) Enter number of original station.(e.g., 202) Press Right Soft button to move cursor. SET RELOCATION 3) Enter second station number.(e.g., 210) Press Right Soft button to enter data. SET RELOCATE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. SET RELOCATION EXT_ EXT EXT202 EXT_ EXT202 EXT210 EXT_ EXT RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-86 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Relocate Allowed Table SLT EURO EURO EURO 48B 64B iDCS iDCS 6B 12B 24B AOM AOM 28D 18D SLT YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO EURO 6B NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO EURO 12B NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO EURO 24B NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO 48B AOM NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO 64B AOM NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO iDCS 28D NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES iDCS 18D NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES iDCS 8D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS-5012L NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS-5014D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS-5021D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS-5007S NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS-5014S NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS-5038S NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO IP Phone* NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Samsung Business Communications 2-87 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. Relocate Allowed Table 2-88 iDCS DS- DS- DS- DS- DS- DS- IP 8D 5012L 5014D 5021D 5007S 5014S 5038S Phone* SLT NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO EURO 6B NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO EURO 12B NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO EURO 24B NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 48B AOM NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 64B AOM NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO iDCS 28D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO iDCS 18D NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO iDCS 8D YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO DS-5012L NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO DS-5014D NO NO YES NO NO NO NO NO DS-5021D NO NO NO YES NO NO NO NO DS-5007S NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO DS-5014S NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO DS-5038S NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO IP Phone* NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [316] COPY STATION USABLE Provides a tool for copying station/trunk use assignments in MMC 304 from one station user group to another. This can be done on a station use group basis or for all station use groups. Use groups are set up in MMC 614. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 316. Display shows: (001)COPY USABLE 2) Enter station use group number.(e.g., 005) OR Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (005)COPY USABLE 3) Enter station use group number to copy from. Cursor returns to step 2. OR Press Volume button to make selection. (005)COPY USABLE FROM:NONE FROM:NONE FROM:003 4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2. OR Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 304 MMC 614 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP Samsung Business Communications 2-89 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE This MMC is used to determine whether stations in one use group can make intercom calls to stations in other use groups.(within the same tenant) Use groups are set up in MMC 614. DEFAULT DATA DIAL: YES ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 317. Display shows: (001) USE (001) 2) Dial the first station use group number.(e.g., 005) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button. OR Select all station use groups. (005) USE (001) 3) Dial the second station use group number.(e.g., 004) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button. (005) USE (004) 4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.(NO means first group cannot dial second group) OR Press Volume button to select YES/NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (005) USE (004) DIAL:YES DIAL:YES (ALL) USE (001) DIAL:YES DIAL:YES DIAL:NO 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 614 2-90 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [318] DISTINCTIVE RINGING Allows the technician to select the ring tone heard at a keyset when called by a specific station or when a specific trunk rings that keyset. There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for SLTs. There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station option(default) for keysets. There are five cadences and a Follow Station option(default) for SLTs. See table, below. It also allows the technician to assign the call priority for a group call when called by a specific station or when a specific trunk rings that phone. When calls come into a station group and all group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to a specific station or a specific trunk so that high priority calls will be placed at the front of the group queue. If this option is set to NO, the call held longest in the group queue has the highest priority. There are nine priority levels: level 1 is the highest and level 9 is the lowest. Option TONE Option CADENCE Option No Description Calls will ring with the keyset user’s choice of ring frequency. 1~8 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with this frequency. Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences. 1 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the intercom ring cadence. 2 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the CO ring cadence. 3 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the DOOR ring cadence. 4 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the ALARM ring cadence. 5 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the CALLBACK ring cadence. CONDITIONS y Digital phone(keyset) rings are distinguished by their tone. If the T(TONE) of the calling internal/external phone is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the normal setting in MMC 111, PHONE RING TONE, for the receiving station. If T is set to 1-8, the bell rings according to the designated ring tone. y SLT rings are distinguished by their ringing interval. If the C(CADENCE) of the calling internal/external phone is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the interval set in MMC 510, SLI RING CADENCE, for each calling station type. If C is set to 1-5, the bell rings according to that interval regardless of the calling station type. Samsung Business Communications 2-91 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. DEFAULT DATA T: NO C: NO (FOLLOW STATION SETTING) (FOLLOW STATION SETTING) ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 318. Display shows first station: [201] RING TONE 2) Dial trunk or station number.(e.g., 705) OR Press Volume button to select trunk or station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [705] RING TONE 3) Dial 1-8 to select ring tone. OR Press Volume button to select ring tone and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [705] RING TONE 4) Dial 1-5 to select ring cadence. OR Press Volume button to select ring cadence and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [705] RING TONE 5) Enter priority level via dial keypad. (1-9 or NO) [705] RING TONE T:NO C:NO PRI:NO T:NO C:NO PRI:NO T:5 C:NO PRI:NO T:5 C:3 PRI:NO T:5 C:3 PRI:NO 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 111 MMC 510 2-92 PHONE RING TONE SLI RING CADENCE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [319] BRANCH GROUP Assign stations to branch groups. There is a maximum of four branch groups. When a C.O. line is ringing at a station, other stations assigned the same branch group can answer the incoming call by going off hook. MMC [319] This MMC is currently not valid in the UK/EU. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 319. Display shows. [201] BRANCH GRP 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205). OR Press Volume button to select station and use Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] BRANCH GRP 3) Dial a branch group number. (01-20). OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] BRANCH GRP BRANCH GRP:NONE BRANCH GRP:NONE [ALL] BRANCH GRP BRANCH GRP:?? BRANCH GRP:04 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-93 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [320] PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER Allows a technician to assign a default destination for Forward No Answer(FNA) to each station on the system. These destinations may be the same or different for each station. The preset FNA destination will be temporarily overwritten if the station user enters a different FNA destination. If you cancel the new destination, the preset destination will once more be in effect. Preset FNA time follows the station ‘NO ANS FWD’ timer(MMC 502). Preset FNA can be assigned respectively for each type of call. No Type Description 0 INT Preset FNA applies only to intercom calls. 1 EXT Preset FNA applies only to incoming calls. 2 BOTH Preset FNA applies to both intercom and incoming calls. When using PRE FWD BUSY option in MMC [210] If PRE FWD BUSY option in MMC 210 is set ON, the forward busy follows this feature. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 2-94 DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 320. Display shows: [201] PRESET FNA 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] PRESET FNA 3) Dial valid number via keypad. OR Press Volume button to select call type and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] PRESET FNA NONE NONE OPT:BOTH OPT:BOTH [ALL] PRESET FNA NONE 202 OPT:BOTH OPT:BOTH Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 4) Dial call type 0, 1 or 2.(e.g., 1) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] PRESET FNA 202 OPT:EXT 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 102 CALL FORWARD Samsung Business Communications 2-95 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER Allows a number up to 16 digits to be entered and associated with a station or trunk number on a per PRI/BRI basis. When this station makes an outgoing call on this PRI, the number entered here will be the Calling Party Number sent on the call. There are four tables for the system. If there are no entries in the tables the system uses the number for the trunk entered in MMC 405, TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER, for the Calling Party Number. DEFAULT DATA EMPTY ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 323. Display shows: [201] SEND CLIP 2) Dial extension or trunk number.(e.g., 230) OR Press Volume button to select extension and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. [230] SEND CLIP 3) Dial table number. OR Press Volume button to select table number and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. [230] SEND CLIP 4) Enter the Calling Party Number. [230] SEND CLIP 1: 1: 2: 2:3055922900 5) Repeat steps 3 & 4 to enter other tables and Calling Party Numbers. OR Repeat steps 2, 3, & 4 to enter other station or trunk and Calling Party Numbers. 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 419 MMC 420 MMC 834 2-96 BRI OPTIONS PRI OPTIONS H.323 OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [326] RINGBACK TONE MESSAGE Assigns Color Ring Message by using SVMi message. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 326. Display shows: [301] RBT MSG 2) Enter the VM station number. OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button. [302] RBT MSG 3) Select Ring Message. (0001-9999) OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button. [302] RBT MSG NONE NONE 0001 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS Samsung Business Communications 2-97 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [400] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK Assigns several options(listed below) on a per-trunk basis. No 0 Option 1A2 EMULATION Default OFF Description When this option is set to ON up to 4 internal stations can participate in a conversation on this trunk by pressing the trunk key. 1 TRUNK INC DND OFF When this option is set to ON a trunk that is programmed to ring a specific station(a private line or DIL) will ring at that station if the station is in DND. 2 TRUNK FORWARD ON When this option is set to OFF this trunk will not follow a ringing stations call forwarding. 3 LCR ALLOW OFF Allows LCR to be switched ON/OFF when a trunk is accessed using a DT key or by dialling its port number (e.g., 701). 6 EFWD EXT CLI ON This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be sent to the external forwarded outgoing call.(Station or Received CLI from Trunk) 7 REPEAT CLI ON This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be sent to the trunk to trunk call.(Trunk or Received CLI from Trunk) 8 TONECHK DISC OFF When this option is set to ON, loop trunk can be disconnected by detecting busy tone.(To use this feature, the LP TRK TONE DISC option in MMC 861 must be set to ENABLE.) 9 AUTO ANSWER OFF When this option is set to ON, Auto Answer mode can be assigned on a per-trunk basis. 10 COLORRING AS OFF When this options is set to ON, coloring service can be used by svmi message. DEFAULT DATA 1A2 EMULATE: OFF TRK INC. DND: OFF TRK FORWARD: ON EFWD EXT CLI: ON REPEAT CLI: ON TONECHK DISC: OFF AUTO ANSWER: OFF COLORRING AS: OFF 2-98 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 400. Display show: [701] TRK ON/OFF 2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) OR Press Volume button to select trunk. OR Select all trunks and press Right Soft button to move cursor to options. [704] TRK ON/OFF 3) Dial option number from above list OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [704] TRK ON/OFF 4) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF. OR Press Volume button to select ON/OFF and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [704] TRK ON/OFF 1A2 EMULATE:OFF 1A2 EMULATE:OFF [ALL] TRK ON/OFF 1A2 EMULATE:? TRK FORWARD:ON TRK FORWARD:OFF 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-99 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE Used to select the mode of the trunk lines: CO LINE or PBX LINE. If PBX mode is chosen, this allows PBX access codes to be recognized, thus allowing more complete toll restriction. (call barring) This mode is assigned on a per-trunk basis. DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS: CO LINE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 401. Display shows: [701] PBX LINE 2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) OR Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move. OR Select all trunks. [704] PBX LINE 3) Dial 1 for PBX or 0 for CO.(e.g., 1) OR Use Volume button to scroll through options Press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [704] PBX LINE CO LINE CO LINE [ALL] PBX LINE ? PBX LINE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-100 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE Used to determine the dialling type of each trunk line. There are two options: No Type Description 0 DTMF TYPE Dual Tone Multi-Frequency 1 DIAL PULSE TYPE Dial Pulse DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS: DTMF ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 402. Display shows: [701] DIAL TYPE 2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) OR Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. OR Select all. [704] DIAL TYPE 3) Dial 0 for DTMF or 1 for PULSE. OR Use Volume button to scroll through options Press Right Soft buttons to return to step 2. [704] DIAL TYPE DTMF TYPE DTMF TYPE [ALL] DIAL TYPE ? DIAL PULSE TYPE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 501 MMC 503 SYSTEM TIMERS TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS Samsung Business Communications 2-101 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS Assigns to ll class level assignments on a per-trunk or all-trunk basis in a day or night condition. The options for toll level will follow either the station class or the class of service defined in MMCs 702, Toll Deny Table, and 703, Toll Allowance Table. The toll classes available are listed below with their entry numbers. No Class Description 0 F-STN Follow station toll restriction 1 CLS-A Follow toll class A(Unrestricted) 2 CLS-B Follow toll class B 3 CLS-C Follow toll class C 4 CLS-D Follow toll class D 5 CLS-E Follow toll class E 6 CLS-F Follow toll class F 7 CLS-G Follow toll class G 8 CLS-H Follow toll class H(All restricted) DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS: F-STN ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 403. Display shows: [701] TOLL CLASS 2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) OR Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. OR Select all. [704] TOLL CLASS 3) Dial ring plan number.(1~6) OR Use Volume button to scroll through ring plan numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. [704] TOLL CLASS 2-102 1:F-STN 2:F-STN 1:F-STN 2:F-STN [ALL] TOLL CLASS 1:F-STN 2:F_STN 1:F-STN 2:F-STN Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 4) Enter day toll class.(e.g., 2 for CLS-B) OR Press Volume button to scroll through toll classes and use Right Soft button to move the cursor. [704] TOLL CLASS 1:CLS-B 2:F-STN 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 MMC 507 MMC 701 ASSIGN STATION COS ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications 2-103 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [404] TRUNK NAME Allows a name up to 11 characters long to be entered to identify an individual trunk. ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 404. Display shows: [701] TRUNK NAME 2) Dial trunk.(e.g., 704) OR Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. [704] TRUNK NAME 3) Enter trunk name. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [704] TRUNK NAME TELECOMS 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 104 MMC 405 2-104 STATION NAME TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER Allows a number up to 11 digits long to be entered to identify an individual trunk. ENTERING NUMBERS Numbers are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects the digit and moves the cursor to the next position. The # button can be used for special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , \ , " , ~. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 405. Display shows: [701] CO TEL NO. 2) Dial trunk.(e.g., 704) OR Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. [704] CO TEL NO. 3) Enter trunk number using the dial keypad. [704] CO TEL NO. 3054264100 4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2. OR Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 404 TRUNK NAME Samsung Business Communications 2-105 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT Enables ringing to a specific station or to a group of stations when incoming calls are received. This MMC controls ring plan destinations for ring down trunks. If the ring plan destinations are not entered, the default ring plan is ring plan 1. DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS RING DEFAULT OPERATOR GROUP ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 406. Display shows: [701] TRK RING 2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) OR Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. OR Select all. [704] TRK RING 3) Dial ring plan number or press Right Soft button to move to the next step. [704] TRK RING 4) Dial station number or station group number. (e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor to the next ring plan destination and repeat step 4. OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3. [704] TRK RING 1:500 1:500 2:500 2:500 [All] TRK RING 1:500 1:500 1:205 2:500 2:500 2:500 [704] TRK RING 1:205 2:501 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 202 MMC 507 MMC 601 2-106 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME ASSIGN STATION GROUP Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of a trunk lock-up. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 407. Display shows: [701] TRK RELS. 2) Dial in trunk number.(e.g., 704) OR Press Volume button selected trunk and press Right Soft button. OR Select all trunks. [704] TRK RELS. 3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. (Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2) [704] TRK RELS. RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0 RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0 [ALL] TRK RELS. RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0 RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-107 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE Allows the system administrator to select which Music-On-Hold(MOH) source can be heard on each trunk. There is one internal music source/external music source (371). CONDITIONS To use an external sound source, connects the corresponding port of the to the misc port of MP10/11 card. DEFAULT DATA TONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 408. Display shows: current setting. [701] TRK MOH MOH:TONE AA:TONE 2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) OR Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all. [704] TRK MOH MOH:TONE AA:TONE 3) Enter source number.(e.g., 371) OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [705] TRK MOH MOH:371 AA:TONE [ALL] TRK MOH MOH:? AA:? 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 756 2-108 ASSIGN VMMOH Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [409] TRUNK STATUS READ This is a READ-ONLY MMC. Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will enable the servicing personnel to quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk. No Type Description 00 PORT Port Number(Cabinet/Slot/Port) 01 TYPE LOOP, GND, E & M, DID, BRI, PRI, VOIP 02 1A2 EMULATE 1A2 Emulation On/Off 03 TRK FORWARD Trunk Forward On/Off 04 LINE CO/PBX 05 DIAL DTFM/Dial Pulse 06-11 TOLL TYPE 1-6 Ring Plan Toll Restriction(1-6) 12-17 RING PLAN 1-6 Ring Plan Ring Destination(1-6) 18 MOH SOURCE MOH Source 19 DISA LINE DISA Status DEFAULT DATA FOLLOWS TRUNK ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 409. Display shows: [701] TRK STATUS 2) Enter trunk number via dial keypad.(e.g., 704) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. [704] TRK STATUS 3) Enter desired option 00-19.(e.g., 01) OR Press Volume button to make selection. [704] TRK STATUS PORT:C1-S5-P01 PORT:C1-S5-P04 TYPE:LOOP TRUNK 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. Samsung Business Communications 2-109 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. RELATED ITEMS MMC 400 MMC 401 MMC 402 MMC 403 MMC 404 MMC 406 MMC 408 MMC 410 2-110 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE TRUNK DIAL TYPE TRUNK TOLL CLASS TRUNK NAME TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE ASSIGN DISA TRUNK Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK Allows the system to have Direct Inward System Access(DISA). Because there is a possibility that unauthorized calls will be made via this feature, several safeguards have been added. Users must be informed of these to prevent unnecessary service calls. DISA can lock out when a predetermined number of invalid consecutive calls are attempted. Callers will then receive error tone until the programmable timer has expired. CONDITIONS y The * key may be used to initiate new dial tone while in a station to station call. y The # button may be used to terminate the DISA call and disconnect the central office line. DISA lines must be assigned to the ring plan(s). DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS: NORMAL ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 410. Display shows: [701] 2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) OR Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button. OR Select all trunks. OR [704] 3) Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan.(e.g., 3) OR Using the dial keypad, press 1 to select or 0 not to select the Ring Plan.(e.g., 1 to select) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [704] 123456 DISA LINE:000000 123456 DISA LINE:000000 [ALL] 123456 DISA LINE:000000 123456 DISA LINE:001000 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 500 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS Samsung Business Communications 2-111 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL Allows the assignment of analogue DID or E & M cards for proper signalling. These trunks can also use the translation tables in MMC 714. No Signalling condition type 0 IMMEDIATE START 1 DELAYED START 2 WINK START 3 NO ANSWER BACK 4 DIRECT BACK CONDITIONS An analogue E & M/DID Trunk card must be installed in the OfficeServ 7100 system. Otherwise, the ‘NO E&M/DID TRUNK’ message is displayed. DEFAULT DATA IMMEDIATE START ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 412. Display shows: [701] TRK SIGNAL 2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all trunks. [705] TRK SIGNAL 3) Enter desired trunk type selection from above list. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. [705] TRK SIGNAL IMMEDIATE START IMMEDIATE START [ALL] TRK SIGNAL IMMEDIATE START WINK START 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 714 2-112 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [414] MPD/PRS SIGNAL Used on a per-trunk basis to define if a Trunk line is to be either a Metering Pulse Detection(MPD) or a Polarity Reversal Signal(PRS) trunk. An MPD Trunk will detect a C.O-provided meter pulse. A Polarity Reversal trunk will detect the line reversal signal which may be provided by the Trunk Line when the other party answers the outgoing call or the outside party clears the call. Type PRS 1 Description When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped. The call is not released. PRS 2 When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped and the call is released. PRS 3 The call duration timer starts based on the timer. When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped and call is released. MPD Metering Pulse Detection. CONDITIONS y If the trunk is designated as PRS, the call duration timer will be started and the results printed on the SMDR record. y PRS is also essential for dropping a trunk-to- trunk conversation which is unsupervised by an internal party. DEFAULT DATA NONE(NORMAL) ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 414. Display shows: [701] TRK PRS 2) Dial desired trunk number.(e.g., 705) OR Press Volume button to select trunk and use Right Soft button to move cursor. [705] TRK PRS Samsung Business Communications NONE NONE 2-113 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 3) Dial 0 for PRS 1, 1 for PRS 2, 2 for PRS 3, 3 for MPD or 4 for NORMAL. OR Press Volume button to scroll through options and use Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2. [705] TRK PRS PRS 2 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC503 2-114 TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of abandoned Trunk Line calls for which CLIP information has been collected on a per-trunk basis. There are two options for this MMC: No 0 Option Description REPORT: NO Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will not be printed on SMDR or stored in the system call abandon list. These records will continue to be stored in the station review list. 1 REPORT: YES Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will be printed on SMDR and stored in the system call abandon list. These records will also be stored in the station review list. DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS REPORT: YES ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 415. Display shows: [701] TRK ABNDN 2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705) OR Use Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [705] TRK ABNDN 3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. OR Use Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [705] TRK ABNDN REPORT:YES REPORT:YES REPORT:NO 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2-115 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [417] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION This option is used to enable/disable CRC4 generation and checking. CONDITIONS y This is useful with some networks which do not support CRC4 framing but only PCM30 framing. y After changing this option, MMC 418 must be used to restart the card to make the change effective. DEFAULT DATA CRC4: ON ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 417. Display shows: [701] E1/PRI CRC 2) Enter first trunk number in PRI card.(e.g., 701) OR Press Volume button to select trunk and use Right Soft button to move cursor. [701] E1/PRI CRC 3) Enter 1 for ON 0 for OFF. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button. [701] E1/PRI CRC ON ON OFF 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 418 2-116 BRI & PRI CARD RESTART Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [418] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART This MMC is used to restart a BRI or PRI card at the card level. This action is required to update the processor on the BRI or PRI card with any changes in the card setup MMCs and to put these changes into effect. CONDITIONS y A BRI card or TEPRI card or TEPRI2 card must be installed in the system. y Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI or TEPRI2 card must be set ON to PRI mode. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 418. Display shows first BRI or PRI circuit: [725] RESTART 2) Dial first trunk on a BRI or PRI card.(e.g., 733) OR Press Volume button to select the first trunk and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. [733] RESTART 3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. Pressing 1 will advance to step 4. [733] RESTART 4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2. [733] RESTART CARD RESTART?NO CARD RESTART?NO CARD RESTART?YES ARE YOU SURE?YES 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 419 MMC 420 MMC 423 MMC 424 BRI OPTIONS PRI OPTIONS S/T MODE BRI S0 MAPPING Samsung Business Communications 2-117 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [419] BRI OPTIONS Assigns several options on a per-BRI basis. There are different options depending on whether the BRI is programmed as a trunk or station in MMC 423. OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS TRUNKS No Option 0 CHANNEL ANY Description When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to NO, they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free. 1 BRI MODE BRI access mode select. P-P NOR Point to Point NORmal. This operates like a standard telephone line with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406. P-P DID Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel and translated within the system(MMC714) to a single device. P-M NOR Point to Multi-point NORmal. This type of circuit operates in a similar manner to P-P NORmal but allows multiple devices to be attached to the circuit. Ringing is defined in MMC 406. P-M MSN Point to Multi-point MSN. This setting is used when the line uses the MSN supplementary service. Ringing is defined in MMC 421. 2 3 DLSEND BRI dial sending mode select. ENBLOCK Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a Cellphone. OVERLAP Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user. CLIP TABLE Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. If NONE, MMC405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER is sent to the network; otherwise, the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with the selected number is sent to the network. 4 NB TYPE Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network. 2-118 UNKNOWN Unknown number INT.NAT International number NATIONAL National number NETWORK Network specific number SUBSCRIB Subscriber number EXTEN Local number ABBREV Abbreviated number Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No 5 Option NB PLAN Description Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the network. UNKNOWN Unknown numbering plan ISDN ISDN numbering plan(CCITT E.163-164) DATA Data numbering plan(CCITT X.121) TELEX Telex numbering plan(CCITT F.69) NATIONAL National standard numbering plan PRIVATE Private numbering plan EXTEN Local numbering plan OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS STATIONS No Option 0 ANY CHANNEL Description When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy.(e.g., Preferred channel selection) If set to NO, the user will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free.(e.g., Exclusive channel selection) 1 POWER FEED This field determines if power to a BRI access will be supplied.(YES or NO) CONDITIONS y A BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message is displayed. y If any changes are made in this MMC, the BRI card that is affected by these changes MUST be restarted using MMC 418 in order for the changes to become effective. DEFAULT DATA For BRI Ports programmed as Trunks: CHANNEL ANY: YES BRI MODE: P-P DDI DLSEND: OVERLAP CLIP TABLE: NONE NB TYPE: NATIONAL NB PLAN: ISDN For BRI Ports programmed as Stations: CHANNEL ANY: YES POWER FEED: NO Samsung Business Communications 2-119 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 419. Display shows first BRI channel. [725] BRI-TRK CHANNEL ANY:YES 2) Dial BRI trunk number.(e.g., 727) OR Press Volume button to select BRI trunk and press Right Soft button. [727] BRI-TRK CHANNEL ANY:YES 3) Select option item. OR Press Volume button to select option item and press Right Soft button. [727] BRI-TRK CHANNEL ANY:NO [727] BRI-TRK BRI MODE:P-M MSN [727] BRI-TRK DLSEND :OVERLAP [727] BRI-TRK CLIP TABLE :NONE [727] BRI-TRK NB TYPE:UNKNOWN 4) Select option. OR Press Volume button to select BRI station and press Right Soft button. [727] BRI-TRK CLIP TABLE:1 5) Dial BRI station number.(e.g., 729) OR Press Volume button to select BRI station and press Right Soft button. [729] BRI-STN CHANNEL ANY:YES 6) Select option item. OR Press Volume button to select BRI station and press Right Soft button. [729] BRI-STN CHANNEL ANY:YES 7) Select option. OR Press Volume button to select option item and press Right Soft button. [729] BRI-STN POWER FEED :YES [729] BRI-STN POWER FEED :NO 8) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. 2-120 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide RELATED ITEMS MMC 323 MMC 405 MMC 418 MMC 421 MMC 423 MMC 714 CALLING PARTY NUMBER TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER BRI & PRI CARD RESTART MSN DIGIT S/T MODE DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION Samsung Business Communications 2-121 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [420] PRI OPTIONS This MMC allows the technician to program a PRI trunk card. No Option 0 CHANNEL ANY Description When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free channel of that PRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to NO, they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that PRI is free. 1 PRI MODE PRI access mode select. NORMAL Point to Point NORMAL. This operates like a standard telephone line with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406. DID Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel and translated within the system(MMC714) to a single device. 2 3 DLSEND PRI dial sending mode select. ENBLOCK Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a cellphone. OVERLAP Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user. CLIP TABLE Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. If NONE, MMC405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network; otherwise, the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with the selected number is sent to the network. 4 NB TYPE Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network. 5 UNKNOWN Unknown number INT.NAT International number NATIONAL National number NETWORK Network specific number SUBSCRIB Subscriber number EXTEN Local number ABBREV Abbreviated number NB PLAN Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the network. 6 UNKNOWN Unknown numbering plan ISDN ISDN numbering plan(CCITT E.163-164) DATA Data numbering plan(CCITT X.121) TELEX Telex numbering plan(CCITT F.69) NATIONAL National standard numbering plan PRIVATE Private numbering plan EXTEN Local numbering plan SAME CONNID When this option is set to OFF, ISDN port is searched by CONN ID and if set to ON, searched by data channel id. 2-122 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide CONDITIONS y Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI or TEPRI2 card must be set to ‘ON’ for PRI mode. y After changing this program, run MMC 418, BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART, to apply the new setting. DEFAULT DATA CHANNEL ANY: YES PRI MODE: DDI DLSEND: OVERLAP CLIP TABLE: NONE NB TYPE: NATIONAL NB PLAN: ISDN ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 420. Display shows: [701] PRI OPTION 2) Dial first PRI trunk number in PRI card.(e.g., 730) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. [730] PRI OPTION 3) Enter option number. OR Press Volume button to select option. [730] PRI OPTION 4) Press Volume button to make selection. Then press Right Soft button. [730] PRI OPTION CHANNEL ANY:YES CHANNEL ANY:YES PRI MODE:DDI PRI MODE:NORMAL 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 323 MMC 405 MMC 418 MMC 714 CALLING PARTY NUMBER TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER BRI & PRI CARD RESTART DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION Samsung Business Communications 2-123 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [421] MSN DIGIT Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station. If any entry in the MSN DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call’s called party number, either the specific station is alerted, if it is programmed to accept the call, or the call is cleared if it is programmed to reject the call. If the incoming called party number does not have a matching entry in the MSN table, MMC 406 ringing destination is alerted or the call is optionally released. You can give each MSN number to a specific station and you can select the call waiting option: when a destination is busy, the incoming call must be cleared or camped-on to the station.(which is alerted to the call) CONDITIONS y A BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message is displayed. y For each BRI access, two adjacent ports are assigned. You need only change the value for one of the two ports; the value for the other port will be changed automatically. DEFAULT DATA 1-6: NONE CW: YES OPT: ACCEPT ACTION 2-124 DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 421. Display shows: [701] MSN DGT (1) 2) Enter trunk number.(e.g., 704) OR Press Volume button to scroll through ISDN ports and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [704] MSN DGT (1) 3) Enter the location 1-8.(e.g., 4) OR Press Volume button to select location and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [704] MSN DGT (4) 4) Enter digits to be translated(e.g., 4603881) via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move to the destination selection.(Max. Digit is 12) [704] MSN DGT (4) DGT: DGT: DGT: DGT:4603881 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 5) Enter destinations for the six ring plans via the dial keypad.(e.g., 204 for ring plan 1) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. [704] MSN DGT (4) 6) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. [704] MSN DGT (4) 7) Enter 1 for ACCEPT or 0 for REJECT. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. [704] MSN DGT (4) 1:204 2:NONE CW:NO OPT:ACEPT CW:NO OPT:ACEPT 8) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 423 S/T MODE [422] TRUNK COS Used to assign a class of service to each trunk for each of the six ring plans available. There are 30 different classes of service that are defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. Trunk COS applies on Tandem connections. DEFAULT DATA ALL RING PLANS: COS 01 ACTION 1) Press Transfer button and enter 422. Display shows first trunk: Samsung Business Communications DISPLAY [701] TRK COS 1:01 2:01 3:01 2-125 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705) OR Use Volume button to scroll through trunks. Press Right Soft button to advance to step 3. OR Use Volume button to scroll through trunks and press Left Soft button to advance to step 4. OR Select all trunks. [705] TRK COS 3) Enter ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05) OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to advance to step 4. OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2. [705] TRK COS 4) Enter the next ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05) OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. OR Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to the previous step. [705] TRK COS 1:01 2:01 3:01 [ALL] TRK COS 1:01 2:01 3:01 1:05 2:01 3:01 1:05 2:05 03:01 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 701 2-126 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [423] S/T MODE Allows the technician to select whether a BRI circuit is a station port or a trunk port. No Type Description 0 TRUNK The BRI trunk port used for ISDN trunk. 1 STATION The BRI trunk port used for ISDN phone. CONDITIONS The BRI card must be installed in the system, otherwise the message ‘NO BRI CARD’ is displayed. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 423. Display shows first BRI: [725] S/T MODE 2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 727) OR Use Volume button to scroll through BRI numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all. [727] S/T MODE 3) Enter circuit type.(e.g., station). OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [727] S/T MODE TRUNK TRUNK [ALL] S/T MODE TRUNK STATION 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 424 MMC 418 MMC 419 MMC 421 BRI S0 MAPPING BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART BRI OPTIONS MSN DIGIT Samsung Business Communications 2-127 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [424] BRI S0 MAPPING This MMC assigns an ISDN terminal number to a BRI station port. CONDITIONS This function can be used only when the BRI card or BRM is installed in the system. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 424. Display shows first terminal number: [8701]S0 MAPPING 2) Dial terminal number. OR Press Volume button to make selection of terminal numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. [8704]S0 MAPPING 3) Dial BRI port number. OR Use Volume button to scroll through ports and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [8704]S0 MAPPING NONE NONE 712 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 419 MMC 423 2-128 BRI OPTIONS S/T MODE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [425] CID TRUNKS This MMC assigns a TRUNK number to a CID TRUNK. CONDITIONS This function can be used only when the TRM or trunk card is installed in the system. DEFAULT DATA NORMAL TRUNK ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 425. Display shows first terminal number: [701]CID TRUNKS 2) Enter trunk number. OR Press Volume button to make selection of trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. OR Select all. [702]CID TRUNKS 3) Enter trunk type.(e.g., CID TRUNK). OR Press Volume button to select option and Press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [ALL] CID TRUNKS NORMAL TRUNK NORMAL TRUNK [ALL] CID TRUNKS NORMAL TRUNK CID TRUNK 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS Samsung Business Communications 2-129 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [426] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL Allows loss levels to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmission level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk. There are four types of adjustment: No Trunk Gain Description 0 +0.0 No adjustment 1 +1.9 Up 1.9 dB 2 -6.0 Down 6.0 dB 3 -2.5 Down 2.5 dB DEFAULT DATA TX: +0.0 RX: +0.0 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 426. Display shows: [701] TRUNK GAIN 2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705) via the dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all. [705] TRUNK GAIN 3) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [705] TRUNK GAIN 4) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor and return to step 1. [701] TRUNK GAIN RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0 RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0 [ALL] TRUNK GAIN RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0 RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0 RX:+0.0 TX:-2.5 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-130 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [428] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE This MMC is used to allow or restrict trunks from making outgoing calls to other trunks within the same system. By default(DIAL=YES) all trunks can use other trunks. To prevent use, select NO. DEFAULT DATA DIAL: YES ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 428. Display shows: (301) USE (301) 2) Dial the trunk use group number.(e.g., 305) OR Press Volume button to selection and press Right Soft button. OR Select all trunk use groups. (305) USE (301) 3) Dial the trunk use group number.(e.g., 304) OR Press Volume button to selection and press Right Soft button. (305) USE (304) 4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. OR Press Volume button to select YES/NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (305) USE (304) DIAL:YES DIAL:YES (ALL) USE (301) DIAL:YES DIAL:YES DIAL:NO 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP Samsung Business Communications 2-131 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [432] SET H-TRK This MMC is used to select the type of signalling for each H- trunk. There are three operation types available.(E & M, DID, R/D) DEFAULT DATA E&M ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 432. Display shows: [701] SET H-TRK 2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705) OR Press Volume button to make selection. Press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all trunks. [705] SET H-TRK 3) Press Volume button to select trunk type and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [705] SET H-TRK E&M E&M [ALL] SET H-TRK E&M DID 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-132 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [433] COST RATE In this MMC, the TRUNK COST RATE flags are entered for each trunk. DIAL PLANs are defined in MMC 746(Costing Dial Plan). RATE CALCULATION TABLES are defined in MMC 749. Each trunk may be defined with up to eight cost rates. Enter one or more of the eight COST RATES per trunk. If an entry is left blank, no call costing will be calculated for that particular DIAL PLAN. Call type 8 is fixed for incoming calls. Select cost rate type 8 only if you want incoming call costing for a trunk. DEFAULT DATA ALL TRUNKS/ALL DIAL PLANS: ALL COST RATES ASSIGNED ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 433. Display shows trunk number and Cost Rate table numbers: [701] :12345678 2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705) OR Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all. [705] :12345678 3) Press Volume button to move cursor along the line until the cursor is under the Cost Rate number.(e.g., 2) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right Soft button to return to step 1. OR [701] :12345678 CR CR CR :11111111 :11111111 :10111111 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. RELATED ITEMS MMC 746 MMC 747 COSTING DIAL PLAN RATE CALCULATION TABLE Samsung Business Communications 2-133 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [434] CONNECTION STATUS This read-only MMC will confirm the connection status of stations or trunks. Display status displays the status of a station or trunk at the time requested. If a conference is in progress with the selected trunk or station, the display will show one of the conference parties and an arrow(Æ). The technician or system administrator can then display the other parties in the conference. If a station or trunk is in an idle state, the display will show ‘IDLE’. If the station or trunk selected is not a valid selection, the display will show ‘INVALID DATA’. If the station or trunk is made busy by the CPU, the display will show ‘MADE BUSY’. If the station is in busy state with no other connection, the display will show ‘BUSY’ only. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY Display trunk connection status 1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2) Enter station or trunk number. Display show connection status: DISPLAY STATUS 3) Enter another station or trunk. OR Press Transfer button to exit. DISPLAY STATUS 702 227 702 227 Display station connection status 1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2-134 2) Enter station or trunk number. Display show connection status. DISPLAY STATUS 3) Enter another station or trunk. OR Press Transfer button to exit. DISPLAY STATUS 235 715 235 715 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Display trunk status in conference 1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2) Enter station or trunk number. Display shows connection status: DISPLAY STATUS 3) Press Right Soft button to display the next station or trunks involved. DISPLAY STATUS 4) Enter another station or trunk. OR Press Transfer button to exit. DISPLAY STATUS 702 227 ,215 Æ 702 216 Æ 216 702 ,227 Æ Display status no connection 1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2) Enter station or trunk number. Display show connection status. DISPLAY STATUS 3) Enter another station or trunk. OR Press Transfer button to exit. DISPLAY STATUS 702 NONE 702 NONE Display status no connection 1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2) Enter invalid station or trunk number. Display show INVALID DATA: DISPLAY STATUS 3) Enter another station or trunk. OR Press Transfer button to exit. DISPLAY STATUS Samsung Business Communications INVALID DATA 201 IDLE 2-135 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. Display connection status with invalid trunk or station number 1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2) Enter invalid station or trunk number Display show INVALID DATA: DISPLAY STATUS 3) Enter another station or trunk. OR Press Transfer button to exit. DISPLAY STATUS INVALID DATA 201 IDLE Display connection status with trunk or station number in maintenance busy 1) Press Transfer button and enter 434. DISPLAY STATUS 201 IDLE 2) Enter station or trunk number. Display show connection status: DISPLAY STATUS 3) Enter another station or trunk. OR Press Transfer button to exit. DISPLAY STATUS 725 MADE BUSY 725 MADE BUSY RELATED ITEMS MMC 108 MMC 409 2-136 STATION STATUS TRUNK STATUS READ Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [436] TRUNK TMC GAIN Allows loss levels of TMC for analogue trunks to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmission level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk. DEFAULT DATA TX: +0 dB RX: +0 dB ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 436. Display shows: [701] TMC GAIN 2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705) via the dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all. [705] TMC GAIN 3) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [705] TMC GAIN 4) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor and return to step 2. [701] TMC GAIN RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB [ALL] TMC GAIN RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB RX:+0 dB TX:-2 dB 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-137 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [437] 16TRK GAIN CONTROL Allows gain levels to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmission level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk. CONDITIONS This function can be used only when the TRM or trunk card is installed in the system. DEFAULT DATA TX: 3 RX: 3 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 437. Display shows: [701] TRK TYPE:3 2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705) via the dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all. [701] TRK TYPE:3 3) Press Volume button to select trunk type (1~4) and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (e.g. 4) [ALL] TRK TYPE:4 4) Press Volume button to select RX value(1~6) and press Right Soft button to move cursor (e.g. 1) [ALL] TRK TYPE:4 5) Press Volume button to select TX value(1~6) and press Right Soft button to move cursor (e.g. 5) [ALL] TRK TYPE:4 RX:3 RX:3 TX:3 TX:3 [ALL] TRK TYPE:3 RX:3 RX:3 RX:1 RX:1 TX:3 TX:3 TX:3 TX:5 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-138 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS Used to set the values of the system counters. The counters are listed below with a brief description of each. No 0 Counter ALARM REM. Default 5 CNTER 1 AUTO RDL Description The number of times that an alarm reminder will ring a station before cancelling. RANGE = 1-99. 5 COUNTER The number of times the system will redial an outside number after the auto redial feature has been activated. RANGE = 1-99. 2 DISA CALL CNTER 99 Sets the maximum number of intercom calls that can be made after accessing a DISA line. RANGE = 1-99. 3 DISA LOCK CNTER 3 Number of attempts the system will allow to incorrectly access a DISA line before locking out the DISA line. RANGE = -99 4 NEW CALL 99 COUNTER Number of times the system will allow a user to signal New Call on a Trunk line during one call. RANGE = 1-99. 5 UCDS VISUAL 0 ALARM Used to set the Visual alarm threshold. It is triggered when the number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group reaches this value. RANGE = 0-25. 6 UCDS AUDIO ALARM 0 Used to set the Audio alarm threshold. It is triggered when the number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group reaches this value. RANGE = 0-25. 7 UCD CS LEVEL 1 0 Provides call wait indication level 1 if number of calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value. RANGE = 0-25. 8 UCD CS LEVEL 2 0 Provides call wait indication level 2 if number of calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value. RANGE = 0-25. DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION Samsung Business Communications 2-139 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 500. Display shows: ALARM REM.CNTER 2) Enter number from above list.(e.g., 6) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. UCDS AUDIO ALARM 3) Enter in new value via dial keypad. If entry is valid, system will return to step 2. UCDS AUDIO ALARM 05Æ 00Æ 00Æ02 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-140 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [501] SYSTEM TIMERS Allows the technician to adjust individual timers as necessary. TIMER TABLE Timer Name ALARM TIME Default Range Unit Description 100 0-2500 MIN This is the time the system alarm key will start ringing after the alarm key has been silenced. ALERT TONE TIME 1000 100-2500 This timer sets the duration of the attention MSEC tone preceding a call to a phone in the Voice Announce or Auto Answer mode. This tone will also precede a forced Auto Answer call. ALM REM.INTERVAL 25 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between ring attempts at a station when alarm reminder is set. ALM REM RING OFF 10 1-25 SEC This timer controls the length of the ring cycle duration when an alarm reminder is set at a station. ATT. RECALL TIME 30 0-250 SEC This controls how long a transfer recall will ring at a station before recalling the operator. AUTO REDIAL INT. 30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between attempts after RETRY dialling is set on a station. AUTO REDIAL RLS. 45 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a Ring No Answer condition on a retry number dialled before the auto redial is automatically cancelled. BOOTH TIME OUT 005 0-250 MIN (Hotel application only) CALLBACK NO ANS Controls the time for which a booth phone is enabled. 30 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time before the callback is automatically cancelled when a callback detects Ring No Answer. CAMP ON RECALL 30 0-250 SEC This timer controls the time a camped-on call will stay at a destination before recalling to the transferring station. CID MSG RECEIVE 6 1-25 SEC The amount of time that the system will allow a valid message from the analogue CID trunk. CLI DISPLAY TIME 5 1-25 SEC The amount of time that the Caller ID information remains on the phone’s display. CO CLEAR TIME 30 0-250 SEC The length of time a Direct Trunk Select key remains busy after cleardown. Samsung Business Communications 2-141 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) Timer Name CO CONFIRM TIME Default 3 Range Unit 0-250 MIN Description According to MMC 314 CO CONFIRM type, the outgoing call will be disconnected after this timer expires or the outgoing caller will hear the confirm tone. CO-CO DISCONNECT 20 1-250 MIN This timer monitors the duration of an unsupervised conference; when it expires, both trunks are disconnected. CONFIRM TONE TM CRD TONE INT TM 1000 30 100-2500 The tone heard when a feature is activated or MSEC deactivated. 0-250 SEC This is the call record tone interval time. An entry other than zero will cause a tone to be heard by all the parties in a recorded conversation. The range for the tone is 001(every second) to 255 (every 255 seconds). A value of 000 means no tone. Requires an SVMi card. DIAL PASS TIME 3 0-25 SEC This timer monitors the time before connecting the transmit of the phone to the trunk side of an outgoing call. DISA DISCONNECT 30 1-250 MIN This timer controls the maximum duration of a DISA call. DISA LOCK OUT TM 30 1-250 MIN This timer controls how long a DISA call is not allowed to be made after the DISA error counter has expired(MMC 500). DISA NOANS DISC. 30 0-250 SEC This timer determines when a DISA call is disconnected by force when a called party does not answer. DISA PASS CHECK 30 1-250 MIN This timer defines the period before the system clears the incorrect passcode counter. DISA NO ACTION 10 0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a DISA line will wait for further action from the caller. DISPLAY DELAY TM 2 1-250 SEC This timer controls how long a display is shown in the LCD and how long error tone is heard. DOOR LOCK RELES. DOOR RING DETECT DOOR RING OFF TM 500 50 30 100-2500 This timer controls how long the door lock MSEC relay will be activated. 10-250 This timer controls the time before a call is MSEC answered by the door phone. 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of ringing at the door ring destination before automatically cancelling. E-HOLD RECALL TM 45 0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a call is held exclusively at a station before recalling. 2-142 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) Timer Name FIRST DIGIT TIME Default 10 Range Unit 1-250 SEC Description This timer controls how long the system will wait for dialling to begin before dropping the dial tone and returning the you to error tone. HOK FLASH MAX TM 120 20-2500 This timer monitors the duration of a hook- MSEC switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce LONGEST duration. HOK FLASH MIN TM 80 20-2500 This timer monitors the duration of a hook- MSEC switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce SHORTEST duration. HOOK OFF TIME HOOK ON TIME INQUIRY RELEASE 100 200 30 20-2500 This timer controls the time before dial tone is MSEC sent to a single line station. 20-2500 This timer sets the minimum amount of time that MSEC the system will recognize as an SLT hang up. 1-250 SEC This timer monitors the duration of the interaction of the Soft button to determine when to return the LCD back to a normal status. This timer affects only display phones. INTER DIGIT TIME 10 1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before dropping the call and returning you back to error tone. ISDN INT DGT TM 7 1-15 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits and the end of the dialling string on an ISDN call. KMMC LOCK OUT TM 30 10-50 SEC This timer controls the grace period between programming actions while in a programming session. The timer automatically returns the system to secure programming status. LCR ADVANCE TIME 5 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time before selecting the next allowable route when a station is allowed to route advance. LCR INTER DIGIT 5 1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before accessing a trunk. LONG KEY DETECT LONG KEY REPEAT MCL DELAY TIME 600 300 4 0-2500 This timer controls the time a key must be held MSEC down before the key press is repeated. 0-2500 This timer controls the time between repeated MSEC digits on a long key press. 0-9 SEC This timer controls the time when the system should start transmitting Authorisation Code after sending MCL access code(Cable& Wireless 131 access). Available in UK only. Samsung Business Communications 2-143 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) Timer Name MS LED ON TIME Default 5 Range Unit 1-10 SEC Description This timer controls the duration a Manual Signalling key will remain on after use. OFF HOOK RING INT 15 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between ring bursts to a user who has a camped-on call. OHVA ANSWER TIME 10 1-250 SEC This timer controls the time allowed to answer an OHVA call before automatic rejection. PAGE TIME OUT 20 1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a page announcement. PAGE TONE TIME 500 100-2500 This timer controls the duration of tone burst MSEC heard over the page prior to the page announcement. PARK RECALL TIME 45 0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a call is parked before recalling to the call park originator. AP-MMC LOCK TIME 5 1-60 MIN This timer monitors the PCMMC activity, drops the link if no action is created by PCMMC and returns the system back to secure program status. PERI UCD REPORT 5 3-99 SEC This timer determines the interval between periodic UCD reports provided to an SIO port. POWER DOWN TIME RECALL 2000 2 500-9900 This timer monitors the power to the ROM MSEC pack to begin shutdown status. 1-250 MIN This is the time an attendant recall will ring DISCONNECT RECALL WAIT TIME before being disconnected. 15 0-250 SEC This is the time any recall(hold or transfer) continues to recall at your station before it recalls to the operator. ROUTE OPTIMISE 5 0-250 SEC When a call is made via Q-SIG signalling, route optimization is activated after this time. SMDR START /DP 30 1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for rotary dialing. SMDR START /DTMF 15 1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for touchtone dialling. This timer also controls the LCD duration timer on the phones. The duration time displayed and the SMDR time duration will be the same. SYS HOLD RECALL 45 0-250 SEC This timer determines the time calls can be left on hold before recalling to the holding station. This is a system-wide timer. Setting the timer to 000 means that no recalling will take place. 2-144 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) Timer Name TRANSFER RECALL Default 20 Range Unit 0-250 SEC Description This timer determines how long transferred calls ring before recalling. This is a systemwide timer. TRK AUTOMOH DISC 60 1-250 SEC When set to ON, incoming trunk calls are connected to MOH automatically after the DISA ANSWR timer(MMC 503) expires. In this case the caller hears MOH. If the TRK AUTOMOH DISC timer expires before the call is answered, the call is disconnected. TSW CONN. DELAY 0 0-10 SEC When an incoming trunk makes an outgoing call to another trunk, the system connects the voice path after this time. UCDS AUDIO ALARM 0 0-990 SEC When an SVMi-20 card is installed and the digital UCD package enabled, this counter determines the maximum number of seconds a call has been waiting at the UCD group before the UCD group’s SUPV key begins to flash along with an audio alarm. For more UCD alarm conditions, see MMC 500. UCDS VISUAL ALARM 0 0-250 SEC When an SVMi-20 card is installed and the digital UCD package enabled, this counter determines the maximum number of seconds a call at the UCD group before the UCD group’s SUPV key begins to flash as an alarm. For more UCD alarm conditions, see MMC 500. VOIP RE-ROUTE TM 15 0-25 SEC If an outgoing call made via a VoIP trunk does not receive an acknowledgement message from the called party within this time, the call is treated as failed. When timers value is ‘0’ Some timers are disabled when their value is set to ‘0’. DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME TIMERS DEPEND ON COUNTRY Samsung Business Communications 2-145 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 501. Display shows first timer value: AA INT DGT TIME 2) Press Volume button to select timer and press Right Soft button to move cursor. KMMC LOCK OUT TM 3) Enter new value using keypad; if valid, system returns to step 2 with new value. KMMC LOCK OUT TM 05 SECÆ 060 SECÆ 060 SECÆ250 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-146 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS Allows certain station timer values to be changed on a per-station basis or for all stations. No Item 0 NO ANS FWD Description This timer controls how long the station will ring before Forward on No Answer takes place.(1-250 sec) 1 DTMF DUR. This timer governs the duration of DTMF digits which are transmitted to an external VMS system port. This can be used when a VMS system fails to recognise the default DTMF digit duration being transmitted from the SLT port.(100-9900 ms) 2 F-DGT DELY This timer will be valuable for the system administrator to insert a suitable delay before generating DTMF digits for In-Band integration.(1009900 ms) 3 OFFHK SEL. This timer controls the grace period before placing an internal/external call as programmed in MMC 306.(0-250 sec) 4 EFWD DELAY This timer controls the External Call Forward feature which will allow a station to ring before the call is placed on external call forwarding. (1-250 sec) 5 CC RNG DLY If a station does not answer an incoming call within this time, other stations with a CC key for that station will ring. CONDITIONS NONE DEFAULT DATA NO ANS FWD: 015 SEC DTMF DUR: 100 MSEC F-DGT DELY: 600 MSEC OFFHK SEL: 008 SEC EFWD DELAY: 010 SEC CC RNG DLY: 010 SEC Samsung Business Communications 2-147 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 502. Display shows: [201] NO ANS FWD 2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button. OR Select all stations and press Right Soft button. [205] NO ANS FWD 015 SECÆ 015 SECÆ_ [ALL] NO ANS FWD 015 SECÆ_ 3) Enter new value(must be three digits) via dial keypad.(e.g., 020) System will return to step 2. [205] NO ANS FWD 4) Dial timer number from above list.(e.g., 1) OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] DTMF DUR. 5) Enter new timer value.(must be four digits, e.g., 0200) System returns to step 2. [205] DTMP DUR. 015 SECÆ020 0100 MS Æ_ 0100 MS Æ0200 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 102 MMC 306 2-148 CALL FORWARD HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS Allows certain trunk timer values to be changed on a per-trunk basis or for all trunks. No Item Description Range 00 ANS.BAK TM ANSWER BACK TIME. This timer is used for certain types of E & M signalling and does not affect normal CO lines. 0-2500 MSEC 01 CLEARING This timer ensures that a call is fully disconnected at the CO by preventing CO access outgoing or receiving incoming ring between a disconnect and the expiration of this timer. 100-9900 MSEC 02 CO SUPV TM CO SUPERVISION TIME. this is the minimum length of loop open disconnect received from the CO that will be seen as a valid hang up on the system. 10-2500 MSEC 03 DTMF DUR. DTMF DURATION. This is the length of the DTMF digits that will be sent to the CO on this line. 100-9900 MSEC 04 F-DGT DELY First-DIGIT DELAY. This is the length of time the system will wait for CO line conditions to stabilize after seizure before sending DTMF digits. 100-9900 MSEC 05 FLASH TIME This is the duration of the momentary open sent on a circuit when FLASH key is pressed. 20-2500 MSEC 06 NO RING TM This is the length of time the system will wait after detecting a ring burst on a line before deciding the call has disconnected. 1-25 SEC 07 PAUSE TIME This is the length of time the system will wait before sending the next digit for a pause in a speed dial bin. 1-25 SEC 08 PRS DET TM This means the duration of PRS signal pulse. If the PRS signal is reversed when opposite party is answered and maintain the status before the opposite party disconnect the call, the PRS DET TM must be set to 0. 0-2500 MSEC 09 RNG DET TM RING DETECT TIME. This is the minimum length of ring signal the system will regard as a valid ring. 10-2500 MSEC 10 WINK TIME This is the duration of the acknowledgment signal that the system will send on an E&M circuit 100-300 MSEC 11 MF/DP INT This is the interval between sending digit. In case of DTMF signal, over the 500ms will be serviced as 100 ms. 100-9900 MSEC 12 MFR DLY TM This is a delay time to allocate the MFR after incoming trunk is detected. This is to prevent the wrong detection of DTMF signal by noise. 0-25 SEC Samsung Business Communications 2-149 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) No Item Description Range 13 DISA ANSWR This is a delay time to answer the DISA trunk call or to answer the trunk when TRK AUTO ANSWER is set to ON(MMC400). 0-9 SEC 14 CONN DELAY This is the delay time to connect a voice path when users make outgoing calls via a loop trunk. This is to prevent users hearing noise when the loop trunk is seized. 0-2500 MSEC DEFAULT DATA ANS.BAK TM: 0600 MSEC CLEARING: 2000 MSEC CO SUPV TM: 0400 MSEC DTMF DUR.: 0100 MSEC F-DGT DELY: 0600 MSEC FLASH TIME: 0090 MSEC NO RING TM: 04 SEC PAUSE TIME: 03 SEC PRS DET TM: 0000 MSEC RNG DET TM: 0300 MSEC WINK TIME: 200 MSEC MF/DP INT: 0800 MSEC MFR DLY TIME: 00 SEC DISA ANSWR: 01 SEC CONN DELAY: 0000 MSEC ACTION 2-150 DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 503. Display shows: [701] ANS.BAK TM 2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704) OR Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all trunks. [704] ANS.BAK TM 3) Dial timer number from the list. OR Press Volume button to select timer and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [704] DTMF DUR. 4) Enter new timer value.(must be four digits, e.g., 0200) System returns to step 2. [704] DTMF DUR. 0600 MS Æ 0600 MS Æ [ALL] ANS.BAK TM 0600 MS Æ_ 0100 MS Æ_ 0100 MS Æ 0200 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-151 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO Allows the ability to change the value of pulses per second and the duration of the make/break time. This will only affect rotary dial trunks. No Item Description 0 MAKE/BREAK RATIO Make/Break ratio of dial pulse(01-99) 1 PULSE PER SECOND Number of dial pulses per second(10 or 20) DEFAULT DATA MAKE/BREAK: 33 MAKE PULSES PER SECOND: 10 PPS ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 504. Display shows: MAKE/BREAK RATIO 2) Dial 0 or 1 for option. OR Press Volume button for selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. PULSE PER SECOND 3) Dial new value. System returns to step 2. PULSE PER SECOND 33 MAKE Æ 10 PPS Æ_ 10 PPS Æ 20 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 402 2-152 TRUNK DIAL TYPE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME Allows the system date and time to be set. This will set the system-wide clock. Type Description Range YY Year 00-99 MM Month 01-12 DD Date 01-31 W Day 0-6(0: SUN, 1: MON, 2: TUE, 3: WED, 4: THU, 5: FRI, 6: SAT) HH Hour 00-23 MM Minute 00-59 DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 505. Display shows: OLD:0111095:0901 2) Enter new time and date using above table. System returns to step 2. OLD:0111095:0901 3) Verify time and date. Re-enter if necessary. OLD:0111121:1445 NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM NEW:0111121:1445 NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS(AUTO UPDATE TIME) Samsung Business Communications 2-153 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [506] TONE CADENCE Provides the ability to customize the tone cadence on a system-wide basis. The system provides 11 types of tone and three types of tone provided from Central Office or a PBX system can be detected. When changing the MMC [506] MMC [506] should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor. No Item Description 00 BUSY TONE The called station is busy. 01 CONFM/BARGE A feature has been successfully activated/cleared or a Barge-In with Tone has been performed. 02 DIAL TONE The system is ready to interpret key presses/dialled digits. 03 DND/NO MORE The called station is in DND or has no free CALL buttons. 04 ERROR TONE An error has been made. 05 HOLD/CAMPON This is the system generated hold tone. 06 MSGWAT TONE This is the tone heard at an SLT with a message waiting. 07 RGBACK TONE The called station is ringing. 08 RING TONE This is the tone heard from a ROP device or Loud Bell when these devices are called. 09 TRANSFER This is the tone heard when the transfer button is pressed or an SLT TONE hook flashes. 10 DID RNGBACK This is the tone heard by the outside party when they dial a DID number. 11 CO BUSY This is used to detect the busy tone provided from Central Office or a PBX system. 12 CO RINGBACK This is used to detect the ring back tone provided from Central Office or PBX system. 13 CO DIAL This is used to detect the dial tone provided from Central Office or PBX system. DEFAULT DATA (unit: milliseconds) TONE ON OFF ON OFF BUSY TONE 500 500 500 500 CONFIRM/BARGE-IN 200 200 200 5000 DIAL TONE 2-154 CONTINUOUS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (unit: milliseconds) TONE ON OFF ON OFF DND/NO MORE TONE 250 250 250 250 ERROR TONE 500 500 500 500 HOLD/CAMP-ON TONE 500 3500 500 3500 MESSAGE WAIT TONE 1000 250 1000 250 RING BACK TONE 400 200 400 2000 RING TONE 1000 3000 1000 3000 100 100 100 100 1000 3000 1000 3000 CO BUSY TONE 350 350 350 350 CO RINGBACK TONE 400 200 400 2000 TRANSFER TONE DID RINGBACK TONE CO DIAL TONE ACTION 1) Press Transfer button and enter 506. Display shows: CONTINUOUS DISPLAY BUSY TONE INTERRUPT TONE TRANSFER TONE 2) Dial tone number from above list.(00-13, e.g., 09) INTERRUPT TONE OR Press Volume button to select tone, press Left Soft button and advance to step 3. TRANSFER TONE 3) Dial tone option 0 for CONTINUOUS or 1 for ININTERRUPT TONE TERRUPT. OR Press Volume button to select tone control and press Right Soft button to advance step 4. OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2. 4) Dial new value for interrupt times. (must be four digits) Press Right Soft button advances cursor and press Left Soft button retreats cursor. If valid entry, system returns to step 2. TRANSFER TONE:0100 9900 0100 9900 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-155 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME Use this MMC to program Ring Plans time settings. Ring Plans provide six separate ringing destinations based on day of the week and time of day. The start time within a plan is the time the system will switch from one ringing destination to the next. The end time is the time the system will switch from that plan to the previous plan. An RPO(Ring Plan Override) button is not needed as the system will switch automatically; however, it is helpful to have a dedicated button so the status can be manually changed if needed. If a ring plan has no time entry the ring plan defaults to ring plan 1. The ring plans correlate with all MMCs that program ring or termination destinations and station and trunk COS. The following example may be useful when assigning ring plan times: RING PLAN Start Time End Time (MON: 1) ST: 0000 END: 23:59 (MON: 2) ST: 0800 END: 2200 (MON: 3) ST: 1000 END: 2000 (MON: 4) ST: 1200 END: 1800 (MON: 5) ST: 1300 END: 1600 (MON: 6) ST: 1400 END: 1500 Using a 24-hour clock in the example above, notice that the END time is within the same 24-hour period as the START time. The system will stay in the last active Ring Plan from the previous day until the end time which is 23:59. Monday starts Ring Plan 1 at 00:00. The system will stay in Ring Plan 1 until Ring Plan 2 starts(08:00) and will stay in Ring Plan 2 until Ring Plan 3 starts(10:00), and so on. As each ring Plan start it will override the previous Ring Plan. If a Ring Plan expires and there are no additional Ring Plans set, the system will default to the Ring Plan with a time that extends past the expired Ring Plan time. CONDITIONS 2-156 y When using a Samsung built-in Voice Mail card that only has day/night mode, the day/night must be set for each RING PLAN in MMC 758, VM DAY/NIGHT. y Ring Plans must be programmed in sequence.(RP 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) A Ring Plan cannot be omitted.(i.e. you cannot program RP 1, 2, 5, etc.) y A higher numbered Ring Plan cannot have a START time which begins before a lower numbered Ring Plan. Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Ring Plan 1 Ring Plan 1 is the default Ring Plan for each day. If no Ring Plan destination is entered, the operator group is the default destination. DEFAULT DATA START: NONE END: NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 507. Display shows: RING PLAN (SUN:1) 2) Dial day number.(0-6, e.g., 3 for Weds) OR Press Volume button to select day. Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 3. RING PLAN (WED:1) 3) Dial ring plan number.(1-6, e.g., 2) OR Press Volume button to select day. Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 4. RING PLAN (WED:2) 4) Dial start time.(e.g., 1030) If valid, cursor moves to end time. Enter end time. If valid, system returns to step 2. Begin again. RING PLAN (WED:1) ST: ST: ST:_ END: END: END: ST:1030 END:1800 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 722 MMC 723 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications 2-157 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [508] CALL COST Set the Call Cost attributes generated by the system during a call. This information can be displayed on the phone during a call or as an SMDR record. No Display 0 UNIT COST PER MP Description When the system is installed to receive metering pulses on a C. O. outgoing call. It is used for generating total call cost by multiplying it by the number of pulses. Allows a maximum value of 9999.(Currency is PENCE or ECENTS depending on USE EURO option setting in MMC 210.) 1 CALL COST RATE This generates additional call cost calculated by multiplying this rate by the original call cost. Ranges from 100 to 255. CALL COST Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate call cost. This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk card. DEFAULT DATA UNIT COST PER MP: 0200 PENCE, CALL COST RATE: 100 PERCENT ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 508. Display shows: UNIT COST PER MP 2) Dial 0 or 1. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. CALL COST RATE 3) Enter new value.(e.g., 110) System returns to step 2. CALL COST RATE 0200 PENCE ™ 100 % ™ 110 % ™ 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 110 2-158 STATION ON/OFF(CALL COST OPTION) Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [510] SLI RING CADENCE Provides the ability to customize the ring cadence for single line ports on a system-wide basis. There are five cadences available. When changing the MMC [510] MMC [510] should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor. No Item Description 1 STN RING This is the cadence intercom calls will ring at. 2 TRK RING This is the cadence trunk calls will ring at. 3 DOOR RING This is the cadence door phone calls will ring at. 4 ALM RING This is the cadence alarm reminder calls will ring at. 5 CBK RING This is the cadence callbacks will ring at. DEFAULT DATA (unit: milliseconds) Item ON OFF ON OFF STN RING 1000 3000 1000 3000 TRK RING 0400 0200 0400 2000 DOOR RING 0400 0100 0400 2000 ALM RING 0400 0200 0400 3000 CBK RING 1000 4000 1000 4000 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 510. Display shows: 1:STN RING :0400 2) Dial cadence number from above list.(e.g., 3) OR Press Volume button to select Press Left Soft button and advance to step 3. 3:DOOR RING:0400 3) Dial new value for interrupt times. (must be four digits) Press Right Soft button to advance cursor. Press Left Soft button to retreat cursor. If valid entry, system returns to step 2. 3:DOOR RING:0100 Samsung Business Communications 0200 0400 3000 0100 0400 2000 9900 0100 9900 2-159 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-160 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE This MMC defines the cadence(flash rate) of single line telephone message waiting lamps on phones connected to systems with an MWSLI card. There are two choices for the MW lamp cadence: continuous and interrupted. No Item 0 INTERRUPTED Description The MW lamp will flash at a rate determined by the timer settings. The shortest ‘on’ time is 100 ms and the longest ‘on’ time is 3000 ms. The timer is adjusted in 100 ms increments. 1 CONTINUOUS When an MWSLI port has a message, the lamp will be lit steady. CONDITIONS Systems with MWSLI cards only. DEFAULT DATA INTERRUPT LED: 1000MS-ON 1000MS-OFF ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 511. Display shows: MW LAMP CADENCE 2) Press 0 or 1 to select CADENCE. OR Press Volume button to make selection. Press Right Soft button to advance step 3. MW LAMP CADENCE 3) Dial new values for interrupt times.(four digits) MW LAMP CADENCE INTERRUPT LED INTERRUPT LED 2000 2000 Press Right Soft button to move cursor back. If valid entry, system returns to step 2. Press Left Soft button to move cursor back. If valid entry, system returns to step 2. 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-161 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [512] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT This MMC defines up to 60 holiday dates throughout the year. The system will override the normal ring plan for these days and remain in the ring plan associated with the holiday. Dates are entered in a month-day format: for example, July 4th would be 0704. One ring plan applies to all holidays. DEFAULT DATA NO HOLIDAY ASSIGNED FOLLOWS RING PLAN 1 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 512. Display shows the Ring Plan: RING PLAN 2) Press Right Soft button advance cursor. Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan. OR Use the dial keypad to select a Ring Plan.(e.g., 2) RING PLAN 3) Press Right Soft button to enter and advance cursor. RING PLAN FOLLOW 1 FOLLOW 2 FOLLOW 2 4) Press Volume button to scroll to assign Holiday and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. ASSIGN HOLIDAY 5) Press Volume button to select entry and press Right Soft button enter and advance cursor. ASSIGN HOLIDAY 6) Dial date for holiday using the dial keypad. (e.g., 0704) ASSIGN HOLIDAY 01: 05: 05:0704 7) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 507 2-162 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [513] HOTEL TIMER This MMC is where the Hotel timers for guest-rooms are set. These are system-wide timers that affect all rooms. Refer to your Hotel documentation for more details. No 0 Item CHECK OUT TIME Description If a room is occupied after the checkout time, an additional day’s room charge will be automatically added to the room bill.(If a room is flagged as Occupied and HOLD then the additional day’s room charge will not be added. Setting a room status to HOLD allows a late checkout to be performed.) 1 ROOM CLEAN TIME This is the time each day that the system will flag all occupied rooms as NEEDS CLEANING. 2 CHECK IN END TM This is used to decide if an additional day’s room charge will be automatically added to the room bill when the first Check Out Time is reached. For example, if you set the Check In End time as 5 am, all rooms checked in before 5 am will be automatically charged an extra day at the Check Out Time(which might be, say, 11 am). Rooms checked in after 5 am will not be charged extra until the next day, if still occupied at the Check Out Time. CONDITIONS This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL OPERATION. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 513. Display shows: CHECK OUT TIME 2) Select the timer using the Volume buttons. ROOM CLEAN TIME HH:MM : HH:MM : 3) Enter new time using 24-hour clock format system returns to step 2. : : ROOM CLEAN TIME HH:MM : 11:30 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-163 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [514] TONE SOURCE This program can assign an external tone source(e.g., a music source) instead of the normal system tone(TONE) for certain calls. The tones that can be changed are: No Type 0 BUSY TONE 1 DIAL TONE 2 DND TONE 3 TRANSFER TONE 4 MSG WAIT TONE 5 ERROR TONE 6 RINGBACK TONE DEFAULT DATA TONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 514. Display shows: BUSY TONE 2) Enter the tone number 0-6.(e.g., 1) OR Press Volume button to select tone number and press Right Soft button to move cursor. DIAL TONE 3) Dial a number for external tone source.(e.g., 3762) OR Press Volume button to select tone number and press Right Soft button to store. DIAL TONE TONE TONE 3762 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-164 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [515] DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT Defines up to 10 summertime periods. The system time will automatically increase by an hour at 2 a.m. on the assigned Start date and will automatically decrease by an hour at 3 a.m. on the assigned End date. Dates are entered as follows: NO= entry number 01–10 YY= year(last 2 digits, e.g., 05 for 2005) START = start date(MMDD, e.g., 0801 is 1st August) END = end date(MMDD, e.g., 0910 is 10th September) For example, the entry might be: NO : YY : START : END 01 : 05 : 3103 : 2710 DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 515. Display shows: NO : YY : START : END 2) Dial 01–10 to select entry number.(e.g., 01) OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. NO : YY : START : END 3) Enter dates as described above. NO : YY : START : END 01 : 01 :_ : : : : 01 : 05 : 3103 : 2710 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 505 MMC 861 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME SYSTEM OPTIONS(AUTO UPDATE TIME) Samsung Business Communications 2-165 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP Used to assign an operator group for each ring plan. DEFAULT DATA RING PLAN 1-6: 500 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 600. Display shows: OPERATOR GROUP 2) Dial the ring plan number.(1~6) OR Press Right Soft button to advance the cursor. OPERATOR GROUP 3) Dial the group number. OR Press Volume button to select group and press Right Soft button. OPERATOR GROUP 1:500 1:500 1:501 2:500 2:500 2:500 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 601 2-166 ASSIGN STATION GROUP Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [601] ASSIGN STATION GROUP This MMC is used to build all station groups. There are 40 programmable groups available. The options for setting up these groups are as follows: No 0 Option TYPE Description This is the type of group you are creating and can be one of the following: 0 NORMAL: Used to assign stations in a ring group. The members can be stations, common bell contacts or Ring over Page relays. 1 VMAA: Used to group a number of voice mail port extensions. These must have been defined in MMC 207 as VMAA ports or they cannot be entered here.. 2 UCD: Used to build a UCD group. The system will support two methods of UCD: TYPE 1 UCD The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined as an SLT port to which you must connect some type of announcement device to play to callers while they are on hold. Please note that this type of UCD group has the following limitations. a) The announcement device must be able to terminate the announcement with a hook-flash and a transfer back to the UCD group. b) Only one caller at a time can hear the announcement. c) Each caller connected to the announcement must hear the announcement in its entirety. d) It is possible that a new caller may ‘jump ahead’ in the queue if a previous caller is currently connected to the announcement device. TYPE 2 UCD The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined as an AA port or group. This will only work if an AA card has been installed in the system. The digital announcer in the AA card will supply two recorded announcements to callers in queue. The first announcement is played only once, the second announcement will repeat for as long as the caller is in queue. This type of UCD group has the following advantages: a) No external device need be installed to provide an announcement. b) Multiple callers can hear the announcement(s) simultaneously. c) Callers hearing the announcement will be transferred to a free UCD group member(agent) as soon as the agent becomes available. Samsung Business Communications 2-167 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) No 0 Option Description TYPE(contd) d) The callers place in queue is always maintained. Additional programming for this type of UCD group is in MMC 607. There is a maximum of 20 UCD groups available on a system due to availability of system resources. 3 AA: This is used to group a number of AA ports. An Auto Attendant(AA) card must be installed in the system to do this. 4 BI-VMS: This is the voice mail group for the Built-In Voice Mail card. 5 MESSAGE: Used to group a number of extensions to serve as a message desk or message group. When one of the stations in this type of group leaves a message to another station the messaged station will return the message to the message group so any member can answer the call. If a station is a member of more than one message group, then any message indications made by that station would be for the first numerical message group they are a member of. It is not recommended to program stations in to multiple station groups. 6 S0 STN GRP: This is used to group a number of S0 stations for a video conference. 7 VMSUCD GRP: This is used to collect UCD queuing prompts from the SVMi-20. The group members will be the VM ports. 1 RING MODE Each group can have one of the following ring modes. This will decide how calls are placed to the group. 0 SEQUENTIAL: The stations listed as ‘members’(see below) will be called on a ‘first available’ basis. Calls will first go to the first member; if the first member is busy, calls will go to the second member; if the second member is busy, calls will go to the third member, and so on. This type of group is useful for placing the bulk of the incoming calls with a selected individual, and other members only getting the calls when that member is busy. The number of members allowed for a sequential group is 48. 1 DISTRIBUTED: The first call will go to the first member, the second call will go to the second member, the third call will go to the third member. This type of group is useful for evenly distributing the call among all group members. The number of members allowed for a distributed group is 48. 2 UNCONDITIONAL: Calls are placed to all group members simultaneously. This reduces the number of members of the groups to 32. If a group member is busy, they can receive off-hook ring if defined in MMC 300. This ring mode option is not available for UCD or VMAA groups. The SGR INC BUSY option is not available for unconditional ring mode. 2-168 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No 2 Option OVERFLOW Description This is the timer value that will cause unanswered calls to a group to begin also ringing the NEXT PORT(see below) after this timer has elapsed. If set to 000, no overflow will take place. 3 GROUP This is a timer that will determine how long Trunk Line calls transferred TRANSFER to the group will ring at the group before recalling. If set to 000, no recall will take place. 4 NEXT PORT This is the station or group number that callers will also ring at if the OVERFLOW feature has been programmed. The OVERFLOW DESTINATION can be defined as: 1 COMMON BELL There is a common bell port on each MIS card. 2 RING OVER PAGE The ROP port can be defined as the NEXT port. 3 STATION OR STATION GROUP. Any station or station group can be defined as the NEXT port. 5 MEMBER List all members that are to be in the group. Up to 32 members for the system are allowed in each group, but stations can be assigned to multiple station groups. 6 NEXT HUNT The length of time a call will ring at a station before it hunts to the next group member. 7 GROUP BUSY When this option is set to ON, a busy signal will be sent to the caller if all group members are busy. When this option is set to OFF, the ring back tone is sent to the caller even if all group members are busy. UCD is an exception to this rule. This option only works when MMC 210 SGR INC BUSY is set to OFF. When MMC 210 SGR INC BUSY is set to ON, all station groups will follow this setting. 9 ALLOUT NEXT If all members are log-out, the call would be send to next port. 10 RBT MSG If set ON, coloring service can be used by using svmi message. Calls to a group Calls to a group do not follow the call forwarding instructions of any station in the group. Samsung Business Communications 2-169 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. CONDITIONS y A station can be assigned to all station groups. A station group can accommodate up to 32 members. y To enable off-hook ring for incoming calls to busy members, set OFFHOOK RING in MMC 300, CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION, to ON. Even in this case, however, the off-hook ring is enabled only when the RING MODE is UNCONDITIONAL. DEFAULT DATA NORMAL GROUP ACTION 2-170 DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 601. Display shows: [501] STN.GROUP 2) Dial group number.(e.g., 505) OR Press Volume button to select group and Press Right Soft button to move cursor. [505] STN.GROUP 3) Dial feature option number.(0-7, e.g., 0) OR Press Volume button to scroll options and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [505] STN GROUP 4) DIAL group type.(e.g., 1) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Left Soft button to move cursor to TYPE. [505] STN GROUP 5) Dial feature option number.(0-6, e.g., 1) OR Press Volume button to scroll options and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [505] STN GROUP 6) Dial ring option.(0-2, e.g., 0) OR Press Volume button to make selection. Press Left Soft button to move cursor back to RING or press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [505] STN GROUP TYPE:NORMAL GRP TYPE:NORMAL GRP TYPE:VMAA GROUP TYPE:VMAA GROUP RING:DISTRIBUTE RING:SEQUENTIAL Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 7) Dial next feature option and continue. OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button. OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2. [505] STN GROUP RING:SEQUENTIAL 8) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 203 MMC 204 ASSIGN UA DEVICE COMMON BELL CONTROL Samsung Business Communications 2-171 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [602] STATION GROUP NAME Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to identify an individual station group. ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 602. Display shows: [500] SGR NAME 2) Dial group number.(e.g., 505) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Left or Right Soft button to move cursor. [505] SGR NAME 3) Enter name. [505] SGR NAME TELECOMS 4) Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2. OR Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 104 MMC 404 MMC 601 2-172 STATION NAME TRUNK NAME ASSIGN STATION GROUP Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP Allows the assignment of trunks to a specific trunk group or to several trunk groups. This is useful in the programming of LCR when more than one trunk is to be in several dialling plans. There are two different modes of operation: (1) sequential and (2) distribute. There are 30 programmable trunk groups with up to 60 members per group. Trunk group One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group. If necessary, delete the trunk member from other groups to prevent accidental access. DEFAULT DATA ALL LOOP/ISDN TRUNKS: 9 ALL TIE TRUNKS: 801 ALL VOIP NETWORKING TRUNKS: 803 ALL VOIP H.323 TRUNKS: 804 ALL VOIP SIP TRUNKS: 805 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 603. Display shows: [9] 2) Enter valid trunk group.(e.g., 9) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. [9] 3) Press Right Soft button to change mode. OR Press Volume button to change mode to member. [9] 4) Press Right Soft button to move cursor to number of member and enter valid member number (e.g., 05) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [9] Samsung Business Communications TRK GROUP MODE:SEQUENTIAL TRK GROUP MODE:SEQUENTIAL TRK GROUP MEMBER 01:NONE TRK GROUP MEMBER 05:NONE 2-173 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 5) Enter valid trunk number.(e.g., 729) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [9] TRK GROUP MEMBER 01:729 6) Repeat steps 1-5 to remove trunk from group 9 if necessary. 7) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS LCR PROGRAMMING MMC 710 MMC 711 MMC 712 MMC 713 LCR DIGIT TABLE LCR TIME TABLE LCR ROUTE TABLE LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE VoIP PROGRAMMING MMC 832 MMC 833 2-174 VoIP ACCESS CODE VoIP IP TABLE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE Allows the technician to assign a phone to any of the five internal paging zones. Each page zone can have up to 32 members. A phone may be assigned to more than one zone. Page zone(*) will page all external page zones as well as all phones that are members of page zone 0. DEFAULT DATA NO STATIONS ASSIGNED ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 604. Display shows: INT.PAGE ZONE(0) 2) Enter the page zone number.(0-4, e.g., 3) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. INT.PAGE ZONE(3) 3) Enter index number(e.g., 05) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. INT.PAGE ZONE(3) 4) Enter station number(e.g., 205) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. INT.PAGE ZONE(3) MEMBER 01:NONE MEMBER 01:NONE MEMBER 05:NONE MEMBER 05:205 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-175 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE Determines which relays will close when one of the four external page zones is accessed. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 605. Display shows first page zone: EXT. PAGE ZONE(5) 2) Dial page zone number.(e.g., 6) OR Use Volume button to select desired page zone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. EXT. PAGE ZONE(6) 3) Dial member number.(e.g., 3) OR Use Volume button to select member numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2. EXT. PAGE ZONE(6) 4) Dial relay number via dial keypad.(e.g., 3751) and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 above. EXT. PAGE ZONE(6) MEMBER 1 :NONE MEMBER 1 :NONE MEMBER 3 :NONE MEMBER 3 :3751 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-176 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK Provides a means of adding or deleting speed dial blocks to the system or an individual phone. With the ability to delete a block or blocks of speed dial, it will not be necessary to waste these on such items as voice mail, DPIMs or stations that do not require the ability to use speed dial. The Free List will show how many bins are left to be assigned. A library of up to 200 speed dial numbers may be allocated as needed. The system list can have up to 50 numbers(or 95 numbers if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS) and each station can have up to 5 numbers. Speed dial numbers are assigned in blocks of 10. Each speed number may contain up to 24 digits. DEFAULT DATA SYSTEM: 200 ENTRIES STATIONS: 1 BLOCK ASSIGNED ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 606. Display shows: FREE LIST:20 2) Press Right Soft button to advance to next line. OR FREE LIST:20 You can view BUSY LIST using Volume button. SYSTEM:20 SYSTEM:20 BUSY LIST:180 SYSTEM:20 3) Make a selection of SYSTEM or EXT using Volume button and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. FREE LIST:20 4) Enter desired extension number via dial keypad. (e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. FREE LIST:20 Samsung Business Communications EXT201:1 EXT205:1 2-177 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 5) Enter valid number for bins. (e.g., 0-5 for EXT or 00-50 for SYSTEM) OR Press Volume button to make selection. OR Press Hold button to delete bin(s). FREE LIST:20 EXT205:5 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 105 MMC 106 MMC 705 MMC 706 2-178 STATION SPEED DIAL STATION SPEED DIAL NAME ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [607] UCD OPTIONS Sets up UCD options when an AA card has been installed. MMC 601 must have already been used to define a UCD group with an overflow destination of an AA port or group. (A group is preferred over a port because a group allows multiple paths into the AA card and therefore has greater traffic handling capabilities.) When the group overflow timer in MMC 601 expires, the caller will be routed to the AA card. It is here that the caller is played the UCD ‘FIRST MESSAGE’ and ‘SECOND MESSAGE’ while in queue. This will continue until an agent becomes free or the caller is transferred to a final destination. The following program options apply: No 00 Option FIRST MESSAGE Description After the caller has overflowed from the UCD group, the first message will immediately play. This message will only be played once for the caller. 01 SECOND MESSAGE If no agent has become free after the UCD recall time(see UCD Recall Time), the caller will be played the second message. This message will be repeated for as long as the caller is in queue, at an interval specified in the UCD Recall timer below. 02 EXIT CODE While the caller is hearing a message(but not during MOH), the caller may dial the DTMF digit specified here and be transferred immediately to the final destination.(see Final Destination) The exit code is optional and does not need to be used. If used, the first and second messages may be modified to provide instructions on its use. 03 RETRY COUNT The UCD program is designed to route a caller to a ‘final destination’ after a programmable number of ‘loops’ through the UCD message. The range of this counter is 0 to 99. 00 means that there is no retry counter and the caller will remain in the UCD queue until answered. Any non zero value will route a caller through the UCD loop that many times before going to the final destination. The UCD will route calls to the final destination immediately if all members of the group are either out of group or in DND. Example: If this counter is set to 02, callers reaching a busy group will hear the first UCD message, be placed on hold, hear the second UCD message, be placed on hold, and finally hear the second message again before being transferred to the final destination. Samsung Business Communications 2-179 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) No Option 04 FINAL DESTINATION Description This is the final destination for the caller if not answered by a UCD agent. This destination is only reached if(a) the caller dials an exit digit during a message or(b) the retry count has expired. The final destination can be a station number, a group number, a disconnect or another plan. Plans are entered by pressing button ‘A’ plus two digits 01-12. A disconnect is entered as a destination of NONE.(Hold button) If the final destination is a voice mail port, the port will receive a FWD from UCD group integration message. The final destination will forward or overflow. If the forward to destination is a voice mail port the port will receive FWD from UCD group integration message. If the final destination is not forwarded, the call will ring or camp on to the final destination indefinitely. To ensure that you do not get a situation where all the call buttons are busy on the final destination it is advisable to make the final destination a group.(even if the group has only one station in it.) 05 RING NEXT TIME This timer must be shorter than the overflow timer in MMC 601. If a higher value is entered, the display will show invalid entry. In the case where a UCD group has the ring next timer set at 000, an unanswered call will rotate evenly among all agents until it is answered. The UCD greetings will be heard during this routing process, but can be removed by defining the UCD messages in MMC 607 as unrecorded message numbers. This will simulate a circular hunt group. 06 UCD RECALL TIME After a caller has heard a UCD announcement, they will be placed on hold until an agent becomes available or the UCD recall timer expires. When the UCD recall timer expires, the caller will again hear the UCD announcement. The range is 00-99. The default is 10. 07 MOH SOURCE This option determines what Music-On-Hold source callers will be connected to between messages. 08 WRAP-UP TIME This option will make a UCD agent unavailable to receive additional UCD calls after hanging up from the last one. This is to allow agents to complete work associated with the previous call before the next call begins ringing. The range is 000-250. The default is 010. 2-180 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No 09 Option AUTO LOG OUT Description This YES/NO option determines if a station will automatically log out of the UCD group when the RING NEXT timer expires. This setting will be ignored if the RING NEXT timer is set to 000. 10 ALLOUTÆFINAL This YES/NO option determines if calls forward to the UCD final destination when all stations are logged out of the UCD group. If no UCD final destination is assigned then the call will disconnect. 11 AGENT PIN NO This YES/NO option determines if an agent is required to enter an Agent ID when logging on to this group. The Agent ID can be entered in MMC 717. 12 GROUP BUSY NEXT This YES/NO option determines if all agents are busy, specifies whether the next port is called immediately during overflow time. DEFAULT DATA FIRST MSG: 61 SECOND MSG: 62 EXIT CODE: NONE RETRY COUNT: 03 FINAL DEST: 500 RING NEXT: 30 SEC UCD RECALL: 10 SEC MOH SOURCE: NONE WRAP-UP: 10 SEC AUTO LOG OUT: ON ALL OUT TO FINAL: OFF AGENT PIN NO: OFF GROUP BUSY NEXT: OFF Samsung Business Communications 2-181 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 607. Display shows: [530] UCD OPTION 2) Press Volume button to select UCD group or dial group number. OR Press Left Soft button to position cursor under message number and enter new message. OR Press Right Soft button and advance to next option using the Volume buttons to select an option. [542] UCD OPTION 3) Press Right Soft button and advance to next option. Use the Volume buttons to make a selection. OR Make a selection using the dial keypad. [530] UCD OPTION 4) Press Left Soft button to enter the selection and to return to step 1. OR Press Right Soft button to return to step 3. [530] UCD OPTION FIRST MSG :61 FIRST MSG :61 [530] UCD OPTION FIRST MSG :25 [530] UCD GROUP UCD RECALL:10 SEC UCD RECALL:10 SEC EXIT CODE :NONE 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 601 2-182 ASSIGN STATION GROUP Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK Provides a means of adding or deleting CID review blocks to an individual phone. With the ability to delete a block or blocks of CID review, it will not be necessary to waste these on items such as voice mail and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays. The free list will show how many bins are left to be assigned. The system has 1000 total bins. Each phone may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins. DEFAULT DATA PHONES: 10 BINS ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 608. Display shows first station: [201] REVIEW BLK 2) Enter desired EXT number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. [205] REVW BLOCK 3) Enter valid number for bins.(e.g., 50) OR Press Volume button to make selection. OR Press Hold button to delete bin(s). [205] REVW BLOCK 10:0060 FREE 10:0060 FREE 50:0010 FREE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 119 MMC 312 MMC 725 CALLER ID DISPLAY ALLOW CALLER ID SMDR OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2-183 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [609] CALL LOG BLOCK Provides a means of adding or deleting Call Log blocks for an individual phone. With the ability to delete blocks it will not be necessary to waste these on items such as voice mail and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays. The free list will show how many bins are left to be assigned. The system has 1000 total bins. Each phone may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins. DEFAULT DATA PHONES: 10 BINS ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 609. Display shows first station: [201] LOG BLOCK 2) Enter desired EXT number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. [205] LOG BLOCK 3) Enter valid number for bins.(e.g., 50) OR Press Volume button to make selection. OR Press Hold button to delete bin(s). [205] LOG BLOCK 10:0070 FREE 10:0070 FREE 50:0030 FREE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-184 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING This program allows stations to send text messages to other stations if they are busy or during an OHVA. Up to 20 stations can be allowed text messaging. DEFAULT DATA y y NOT USED(no text messaging allowed) ITP-5012L(Large LCD) keysets are automatically set to USED(text messaging allowed) ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 611. Display shows: [201] TMSG STN 2) Enter the number of a station. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. [202] TMSG STN 3) Specify whether text messaging will be used or not. [202] TMSG STN NOT USED:100 FREE NOT USED:100 FREE USED 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE Samsung Business Communications 2-185 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE This program allows a station to use the Group Conference call feature. Up to 20 stations can be allowed this feature. Each allowed station can have up to five pre-programmed conference groups. CONDITIONS This feature is only for Large LCD phones.(e.g., ITP-5012L, DS-5012L, WIP-5000M) DEFAULT DATA Large LCD phones are automatically set to allow this feature.(USED) ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 612. Display shows: [201] CONF STN 2) Enter the number of a station. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. [202] CONF STN 3) Specify whether Group Conference feature can be used or not. [205] CONF STN NOT USED:100 FREE NOT USED :100 FREE USED 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 118 2-186 CONFERENCE GROUP Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP This program allows you to assign stations to station use groups and trunks to trunk use groups. This is useful if you want to restrict calling between stations, outgoing calls through a trunk lines, or call answering. CONDITIONS Station use groups are numbered from 001 to 100, and trunk use groups from 101 to 200. DEFAULT DATA ALL STATIONS: 001 ALL TRUNKS: NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 614. Display shows first station: STATION GROUP 2) Enter 0 if you want to set a station group. Enter 1 if user want to set a trunk group. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. TRUNK GROUP 3) Enter number of station/trunk. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. TRUNK GROUP 4) Enter the number of the use group. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. TRUNK GROUP 201 :001 701 :101 702 : 101 702 : 101 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 304 MMC 317 MMC 428 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE Samsung Business Communications 2-187 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [615] MGI GROUP This program assigns designated MGI ports to specific services. This allows ‘grading’ of MGI card(s) for traffic conditions. The MGI ports can be segregated into groups. Any entries made here may be ineffective if conflicting entries exist in MMC 616. No 0 Type LOCAL ITP Description This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones across a private IP network. 1 PUB IP ITP This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones on a public IP network. 2 VOIP NTWK This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7100 systems across a private IP network. 3 PUB IP NTWK This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7100 systems on a public IP network. 4 VOIP TRUNK This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications across a private network 5 PUB IP TRK This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications on a public network. 6 MGI3 NEEDED This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile communications across a private network. 7 PUB IP MGI3 This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile communications on a public network. 8 ITP PAGED This determines what MGI ports can be used with station page to ITP phones across a private IP network. The MGI ports have two selection modes: Sequential or Distributed. The members for each selection are the actual ports on the MGI card(s). DEFAULT DATA LOCAL ITP: MGI1, MGI2, MGI3 PUB IP ITP: MGI2, MGI3 VOIP NTWK: MGI2, MGI3 PUB IP NTWK: MGI2, MGI3 VOIP TRUNK: MGI2, MGI3 PUB IP TRK: MGI2, MGI3 MGI3 NEEDED: MGI3 PUB IP MGI3: MGI3 ITP PAGED: MGI1, MGI2, MGI3 2-188 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 615. Display shows the first available option: USER: LOCAL ITP 2) Press Volume button to select an user type. Press Right Soft button to move cursor. USER: LOCAL ITP 3) Press Volume button to select an option and press Right Soft button to move cursor. USER: LOCAL ITP 4) Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to store data and return to step 1. USER: LOCAL ITP MODE:SEQUENTIAL MODE:SEQUENTIAL MODE:SEQUENTIAL MODE:SEQUENTIAL 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-189 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [616] MGI USER This program selects which specific MGI ports will be dedicated on a per-port basis for IP station/trunk devices. If this MMC is not used, allocation of MGI ports will be controlled by MMC 615. By defining dedicated MGI port usage, the IP station/trunk selected will always use the port programmed. MGI ports can be assigned for digital stations (2XX~2XXX), private and public ITP stations(32XX), VoIP Networking trunks(83XX), H.323 trunks(84XX), SIP trunks(85XX) and MGI3 facsimile. Only one assignment per MGI port is permitted. Any entries made here will override entries made in MMC 615. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 616. Display shows the first available option: [3801] MGI USER 2) Enter MGI dial number. OR Press Volume button to select an MGI port and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [3801] MGI USER 3) Enter MGI user dial number. OR Press Volume button to select an MGI user and press Right Soft button to store and move cursor. [3801] MGI USER NONE NONE NONE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-190 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [700] COPY COS CONTENTS This MMC allows the technician to duplicate classes of service. DEFAULT DATA NONE PROGRAM BUTTONS ‘F’ KEY Used to advance to MMC 701 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 700. Display shows: COPY COS ITEMS 2) Dial selected COS to copy.(e.g., 05) OR Press Volume button to select COS and press. Right Soft button to move cursor and advance to next step. COPY COS ITEMS 3) Dial target COS.(e.g., 06) OR Press Volume button to select COS and press Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2. COPY COS ITEMS 4) Press F key to advance MMC 701 and press Right Soft to advance cursor. COS CONTENTS(06) COS01ÆCOS01 COS05ÆCOS01 COS05ÆCOS06 TOLL LEVEL:A 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications 2-191 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Similar to MMC 700 but does not allow a copy command. This MMC is primarily used for creating a new class of service(COS). If the unsupervised conference feature is allowed, a programmed CONF key must be available to allow re-entry into a conference call. There are 30 classes of service available. This MMC is divided into 5 categories. No 0 1 Category TOLL LEVEL USABLE FEATURE Description TOLL LEVEL 0 A Follow toll class A(Unrestricted) 1 B Follow toll class B in MMC 702, 703 2 C Follow toll class C in MMC 702, 703 3 D Follow toll class D in MMC 702, 703 4 E Follow toll class E in MMC 702, 703 5 F Follow toll class F in MMC 702, 703 6 G Follow toll class G in MMC 702, 703 7 H Follow toll class H(All restricted) No COS Default Description 00 AA CALER YES Auto answer control by caller 01 ABSENCE YES Absence 02 ALM CLR YES Alarm Clear 03 AUTO RDL YES Retry on busy 04 CALLBACK YES Callback 05 CLIP ABN YES Caller ID Abandon 06 CLIP INQ YES Caller ID Inquire 07 CLIP INV YES Caller ID Investigate 08 CONFER. YES Conference 09 DALM CLR YES DISA alarm ring clear 10 DIRECT. YES Directory dial 11 DISA YES Allow DISA use 12 DND YES Do Not Disturb 13 DND FWRD YES Forward Do Not Disturb 14 DND OVRD NO Do Not Disturb Override 15 DOOR YES Door ring answer 16 DSS YES Direct station select 17 DTS YES Direct trunk select 18 EXT AREC NO Intercom call automatic record (SVM-800) 19 2-192 EXT FWD YES External call forward Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No 1 Category USABLE FEATURE Description No COS Default Description 20 FEATURE YES Transfer button 21 FLASH YES Trunk flash 22 FOLLOW-ME YES Call forward-follow me 23 FORWARD YES Call forwarding 24 FWDTOVMS YES Call forward to SVM-800 25 GRP I/O YES Group in/out 26 HOLD YES Hold 27 HOTLINE YES Hot line and Off-hook selection 28 INTERCOM YES Intercom call 30 MESSAGE YES Message 31 MM PAGE YES Meet me page 32 NEW CALL YES New call 33 OHVAED YES Receive Off-hook voice announcement 34 OHVAING YES Make Off-hook voice announcement Samsung Business Communications 35 ONEA2 YES 1A2 emulation 36 OPERATOR YES Call to Operator 37 OUT TRSF YES Outgoing transfer 38 OVERRIDE NO Barge-In 39 PAGE 0 YES Page zone 0 Paging 40 PAGE 1 YES Page zone 1 Paging 41 PAGE 2 YES Page zone 2 Paging 42 PAGE 3 YES Page zone 3 Paging 43 PAGE 4 YES Page zone 4 Paging 44 PAGE 5 YES Page zone 5 Paging 45 PAGE 6 YES Page zone 6 Paging 46 PAGE 7 YES Page zone 7 Paging 47 PAGE 8 YES Page zone 8 Paging 48 PAGE 9 YES Page zone 9 Paging 49 PAGE * YES Page zone * Paging 51 PICKUP YES Call pickup 52 PRB YES Privacy Release and Bridge 2-193 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) No 1 Category USABLE FEATURE Description No COS Default Description 53 REM. HOLD YES Remote Hold 54 RNG PLAN YES Ring Mode Change 55 SECURE YES Barge-In secure 56 SET RLOC NO Set Relocation 57 SSPD TOL YES System Speed dial toll check 58 STN LOCK YES Station Lock 59 SYS SPD YES System Speed dial 60 TRK AREC NO Trunk call automatic record (SVM-800) 61 TRK EHLD YES Trunk call exclusive hold 62 UNCO CNF YES Unsupervised Conference 63 VM AREC NO Auto Record(SVMi) 64 VM AME NO Answer Machine Emulation (SVMi) 2 CALL STATION 65 VM REC NO Call Record(SVMi) 66 VMS PSWD NO VMS password(SVM-800) 67 VMS REC NO VMS Call Record(SVM-800) STN GROUP 01-80 YES Station group 01~80 calling TRK GROUP 01-30 YES Trunk group 01~30 calling BIVMS STN 01-16 YES SVMi port 01~16 calling GROUP 3 CALL TRUNK GROUP 4 CALL TO BIVMS STN(SVMi). DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION 2-194 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 701. Display shows: COS CONTENTS(01) 2) Dial COS.(e.g., 06) OR Press Volume button to select COS number and press Right Soft button to move cursor. COS CONTENTS(06) 3) Dial COS contents categories. (e.g., 1 for Usable Features) OR Press Volume button to select COS categories and press Right Soft button to move cursor. COS CONTENTS(06) 4) Dial COS usable feature option.(e.g., 12) OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to move cursor. COS CONTENTS(06) 5) Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES. OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 4. COS CONTENTS(06) TOLL LEVEL:A TOLL LEVEL:A 00:AA CALER :YES 12:DND 12:DND :YES :NO 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 700 COPY COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications 2-195 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [702] TOLL DENY TABLE Provides a way to make toll restriction(call barring) very easy and flexible. There are 500 entries allowed in the deny table and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service. Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards(MMC 704, Assign Wild Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Wild cards can be used repeatedly in the dial string, limited only to what is allowed or denied in MMC 704. Six toll levels, B to G, are programmable. Toll level A is set as ‘unrestricted’ by default and toll level H is set as ‘in-house only’ by default. DEFAULT DATA ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0 PROGRAM BUTTONS A B C Used to enter wild card X Used to enter wild card Y Used to enter wild card Z ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 702. Display shows: DENY(001):BCDEFG 2) Dial index number.(e.g., 005) OR Press Volume button to select index and press Right Soft button to move cursor. DENY(005):BCDEFG 3) Enter toll pattern via dial keypad.(e.g., 212) DENY(005):BCDEFG :000000 :000000 212 OR Enter wild card(e.g., 21X) and press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS options. 4) Press Volume button to move cursor along line until under toll class mark.(e.g., E). Enter a 1 for ‘Yes’ or 0 for ‘No’. Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1. OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2. 2-196 :000000 DENY(005):BCDEFG 21X :000000 DENY(001):BCDEFG 212 :000100 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 703 MMC 704 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER [703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE Provides a way to make toll restriction very easy and flexible. There are 500 allowable entries in the allow table for an OfficeServ 7100-main system and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service. Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards(MMC 704, Assign Wild Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Six toll levels, B to G, are programmable. Toll level A is set as ‘unrestricted’ by default, and toll level H is set as ‘in-house only’ by default. DEFAULT DATA ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0 PROGRAM BUTTONS A B C Used to enter wild card X Used to enter wild card Y Used to enter wild card Z ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 702. Display shows: ALOW(001):BCDEFG 2) Dial index number.(e.g., 005) OR Press Volume button to select index and press Right Soft button to move cursor. ALOW(005):BCDEFG 3) Enter toll pattern via dial pad.(e.g., 202) ALOW(005):BCDEFG :000000 :000000 202 OR Enter wild card(e.g., 20X) and press Right Soft ton to move cursor to COS options. Samsung Business Communications but- :000000 ALOW(005):BCDEFG 20X :000000 2-197 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 4) Press Volume button to move cursor along line until under toll class mark.(e.g., E). Enter a 1 for ‘Yes’ or 0 for ‘No’. Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1. OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 2. ALOW(001):BCDEFG 202 :000100 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 702 MMC 704 2-198 TOLL DENY TABLE ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER Provides flexibility to toll restriction(call barring) when a specific numbering plan is desired. There are only three entry tables but more than one digit can be assigned per table if needed. DEFAULT DATA X ENTRIES SET TO 1 Y AND Z ENTRIES SET TO 0 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 704. Display shows: 2) Press Volume button to select X, Y, or Z(e.g., Z) and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to option line. 3) Press Volume button to move cursor to option digit desired(e.g., 5) and enter 1.(put under other digits as required) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2. OR Press Right Soft button to return to step 1. :0123456789*# X:111111111111 :0123456789*# Z:000000000000 :0123456789*# Z:000001000000 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 702 MMC 703 TOLL DENY TABLE TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE Samsung Business Communications 2-199 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL Enables the assignment of system speed dialling numbers. There are up to 450 entries available for programming.(or 950 entries if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS) Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dialled. These dialled digits may consist of 0-9, and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the separator. NOTE: If 500 entries are allowed, the bin numbers are 500-945; if 950 entries are allowed, the bin numbers are 050-999. DEFAULT DATA NONE PROGRAM BUTTONS B C D E F ANS/RLS Used to insert a flash code ‘F’ Used to insert a pause code ‘P’ Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’. Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’ Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 706) Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation table(MMC 728) ACTION 2-200 DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 705. Display shows: SYS SPEED DIAL 2) Dial speed index desired.(e.g., 505) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. SYS SPEED DIAL 3) Enter access code(e.g., 9) plus the phone number up to 24 digits(digits will scroll under) and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. SYS SPEED DIAL 4) Press F key to toggle to MMC 706 step 3 to enter name. SYS SPEED NAME 500: 505: 505:9–121223456789 505: Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 5) If you want to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation table.(MMC 728) Press the ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES. (The speed dial name must exist) SYS SPEED DIAL ADD CLI XLT ?NO 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 606 MMC 706 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME [706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each system speed dial location. This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial feature. ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA NO NAMES PROGRAM BUTTONS ANS/RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation table(MMC 728). ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 706. Display shows: SYS SPEED NAME 2) Dial system speed entry number.(e.g., 505) OR Press Volume button to select entry number and press Right Soft button to move cursor. SYS SPEED NAME Samsung Business Communications 500: 505: 2-201 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 3) Enter name using dial keypad and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. OR Press the F key to return to MMC 705, step 3. SYS SPEED NAME 505:TELECOMS SYS SPEED DIAL 505: 4) If you want to save the speed dial number and name data to the CLI translation table.(MMC 728) Press ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES. (The speed dial number must exist) SYS SPEED NAME ADD CLI XLT ?NO 5) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above. OR Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 606 MMC 705 2-202 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [707] AUTHORIZATION CODE Enables the authorization feature on a per-class of service selection. There are 500 available entries. Authorization codes must be 4-10 digits long. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 707. Display shows: AUTHOR.CODE(001) 2) Dial code index number.(e.g., 005) OR Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor. AUTHOR.CODE(005) 3) Enter authorization code(minimum of four digits and a maximum of 10 digits) via dial keypad (e.g., 1234567890) and press Right Soft button to move cursor. AUTHOR.CODE(005) 4) Enter class of service number 01-30.(e.g., 05) OR Press Volume button to select COS and press Right Soft button to select and return to step 2. AUTHOR.CODE(005) C:01 C:01 1234567890 C:01 1234567890 C:05 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 305 MMC 701 ASSIGN FORCED CODE ASSIGN COS CONTENTS Samsung Business Communications 2-203 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [708] ACCOUNT CODE Enables the account code entry feature. There are 999 available entries. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 708. Display shows: ACCOUNT CODE 2) Dial code index number.(e.g., 005) OR Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor. ACCOUNT CODE 3) Enter account code(maximum 12 digits) via dial keypad(e.g., 1234) and press Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2. ACCOUNT CODE 001: 005: 005:1234 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 305 2-204 ASSIGN FORCED CODE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE This MMC provides a means to program trunk code tables as described below. No 0 Special Code PBX CODE Description This table contains up to five entries and is used to identify the trunk access codes needed for toll restriction when the system is used with either a PBX or a CENTREX-supplied dial tone. Toll restriction will only be applied on trunks flagged as PBX in MMC 401 if a trunk access code entered in this table is dialled. Toll restriction will be applied to the digits following the trunk access code. 1 SPECIAL CODE This table identifies the special feature codes used to activate central office custom-calling features such as CID Block and Call Waiting Disable. The special feature codes can be used on a per-call basis without affecting LCR or toll restriction programming. There is a maximum of 10 entries available, each of which may be up to four digits long. 2 TOLL OVERRIDE This table of eight entries is used to identify the numbers that will bypass all dialling restrictions. This bypass includes toll restriction, trunk access and forced authorization or account codes. Each entry in the table can be up to 14 digits long. 3 OVRD USE TRK GRP This entry designates the trunk group that toll override calls will access. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 709. Display shows: PBX ACCESS CODE 2) Select PBX, SPECIAL CODE, TOLL OVERRIDE or OVRD USE TRK GRP. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. TOLL OVERRIDE 3) Enter index number.(e.g., 3) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. TOLL OVERRIDE Samsung Business Communications 1: 1: 3:_ 2-205 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 4) Enter via dial keypad the desired access/feature code.(e.g., 911) Press Right Soft button to enter and return to step 3 and enter more entries. TOLL OVERRIDE 3:911 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 401 MMC 702 MMC 703 MMC 305 TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE TOLL DENY TABLE TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE ASSIGN FORCED CODE TOLL RESTRICTION MMC 702 MMC 703 MMC 704 2-206 TOLL DENY TABLE TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [710] LCR DIGIT TABLE The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing call placement. This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE, LCR TIME TABLE and LCR MODIFY DIGITS TABLE. There is a maximum 2000 entries with a digit string length of 10 numerical digits. This system automatically maintains entered digit strings in numerical order. The characters * and # are also accepted for use with feature codes. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 710. Display shows: LCR DIGIT (0001) 2) Dial LCR entry.(e.g., 0005) OR Press Volume button to select entry and press Right Soft button to move cursor. LCR DIGIT (0005) 3) Enter LCR digit string via the dial keypad and press Right Soft button. OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 1. LCR DIGIT (0005) 4) Enter digit length.(max. 31) Cursor will move to RT.(route selection) LCR DIGIT (0005) 5) Enter RT(01-32) Valid entry will return you to step 1. LCR DIGIT (0005) DIGIT: DIGIT:_ DIGIT:305426 LENGTH:10 RT:01 LENGTH:10 RT:01 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE Samsung Business Communications 2-207 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [711] LCR TIME TABLE This table, through the LCR ROUTES, allows calls placed at any given time of day to use the least cost trunk route that is available. When LCR ROUTE ADVANCE is allowed, it is possible for calls to be placed on more expensive trunks on any given time of day. There are four possible time entries per day; the start time of the next time period is the end time of the previous time period. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 711. Display shows: LCR TIME (SUN:A) 2) Dial day of week.(SUN-SAT, e.g., WED) OR Press Volume button to make day selection and press Right Soft button. LCR TIME (WED:A) 3) Dial time band.(A-D, e.g., B) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. LCR TIME (WED:B) 4) Dial time via keypad.(24-hour format, e.g., 0800) Cursor moves to LCRT.(see MMC 712) LCR TIME (WED:B) 5) Dial time table number.(1-4) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. LCR TIME (WED:B) HHMM: HHMM: HHMM: LCRT:- LCRT:- LCRT:- HHMM:0800 LCRT:- HHMM:0800 LCRT:1 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 710 MMC 712 MMC 713 2-208 LCR DIGIT TABLE LCR ROUTE TABLE LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [712] LCR ROUTE TABLE The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in the completion of an outward bound call. This table works in conjunction with LCR DIGIT TABLE, LCR TIME TABLE, LCR COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLE. After you dial a valid digit string, the system uses the LCR ROUTE TABLE to select a specific predetermined trunk group. There is a maximum of 99 routes available. If more than one trunk group is available for call completion, the system uses the first designated trunk group and then the succeeding trunk groups. If all trunk groups are busy in a selected route, call queue becomes active and allocates trunks as they become available. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 712. Display shows: LCR ROUTE (01:1) 2) Dial LCR ROUTE table number.(e.g., 05) OR Press Volume button to selected table and press Right Soft button to move cursor. LCR ROUTE (05:1) 3) Dial TIME BAND index number 1-4.(e.g., 2) OR Press Volume button to selected index and press Right Soft button to move cursor. LCR ROUTE (05:2) 4) Dial LCR COS number 1-8.(e.g., 4) OR Press Volume button to selected COS and press Right Soft button to move cursor. LCR ROUTE (05:2) 5) Dial TRUNK GROUP access code.(e.g., 801) OR Press Volume button to selected access code and press Right Soft button to move cursor. LCR ROUTE (05:2) Samsung Business Communications C:1 G:NONE M:--- C:1 G:NONE M:--- C:1 G:NONE M:--- C:4 G:NONE M:--- C:4 G:801 M:--- 2-209 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 6) Dial MODIFY DIGITS index number.(e.g., 050) OR Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Press Right Soft button to skip step and move cursor to step 2. LCR ROUTE (05:2) C:4 G:801 M:050 LCR ROUTE (05:2) C:4 G:801 M:--- 7) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 310 MMC 710 MMC 711 MMC 713 2-210 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE LCR DIGIT TABLE LCR TIME TABLE LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE This program is sometimes referred to as Outgoing Dial Rules. It enables the system to add or delete a digit string or singular digit if needed to complete a call. With these digits inserted, a long distance call will be placed over a local line using the common carrier network. The characters * and # can also be entered. There are 200 modify digit entries available. Option Description Max. No. of Digit Entries NOF DEL DGT Number of digits to delete 15 I Insert(before dialling string) 14 A Append(after dialling string) 14 DIGIT STRING KEY Insert String + Digit String(delete) + Append String DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 713. Display shows: LCR MODIFY (001) 2) Enter index number.(e.g., 005) OR Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. LCR MODIFY (005) 3) Enter number of digits to delete. OR Press Right Soft button to skip step and move cursor to next step. LCR MODIFY (005) 4) Enter digits to be inserted.(e.g., 10288) OR Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store information and advance to next step. LCR MODIFY (005) Samsung Business Communications NOF DEL DGT:00 NOF DEL DGT:00 NOF DEL DGT:01 I:10288_ 2-211 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 5) Enter digits to be appended.(e.g., 45678) OR Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store information and return to step 2. LCR MODIFY (005) A:_ 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 310 MMC 710 MMC 711 MMC 712 2-212 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE LCR DIGIT TABLE LCR TIME TABLE LCR ROUTE TABLE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION Assigns an incoming DID call to a specific ring plan destination. It also provides a call waiting option, if needed, so that a second incoming DID call can be received. The table is also used to define which MOH source a caller to that DID number will hear when placed on hold. A name up to 11 characters can be added to the number. There is a maximum of 999 entries. If there is no matching number on DID service, the call is routed to the operator group. Option Description DGT Digits to be received from Trunk line.(up to 16 digits may be entered) MOH SOURCE Allows the technician to select what the calling party will hear if the call is placed on hold. There are four possible music selections. PRI DID priority option. There are nine priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest. When calls come into a station group and all group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to the DDI numbers so that calls from a high-priority DDI number will be placed at the front of the group queue. If this option is set to NO, the call held longest in the group queue has the highest priority. RING PLAN Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a 1: XXX, 2: XXX, station, station group, trunk or trunk group. If a trunk or trunk group is se- 3: XXX, 4: XXX, lected the trunks must be programmed as E & M trunks to allow the re- 5: XXX, 6: XXX ceived digits to be re-sent. This is referred to as DID Repeat digits over tie line. Entering the character ‘B’ means to repeat the received digits. CW Call Waiting Yes/No.(Allows a second DID call to be received.) MC The maximum call count. When this is set to 99, the feature will not work. When set to 0, if a call comes in that matches DID digits and DGT field then the system will reject the call. When set between 1 and 98, if a call comes in that matches DID digits and DGT field then the system counts the same DID digits, and if the count is the same or higher than this value, the system sends busy signal to caller. DC The number of digits to delete. This is useful with Tandem switching, mixed numbering plans and DID Repeat digits over tie line. Maximum number of digits that can be deleted is 16. NAME Enter up to 11 characters to identify call. Refer to MMC 104, STATION NAME, for how to enter the name. TONE Assigns ring tone to DLI port. CADENCE Assigns ring cadence to SLT port. Samsung Business Communications 2-213 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. DEFAULT DATA INDEX DIGIT MOH PRI 1-6 CW MC DC NAME 001 2*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE 002 3*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE 003 5*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE 004 8*** NONE NO B N 99 0 NONE ACTION 2-214 DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 714. Display shows: DID DIGIT (001) 2) Enter valid index number(e.g., 005) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. DID DIGIT (005) 3) Enter digits to be translated(e.g., 5065) via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move cursor. DID DIGIT (005) 4) Enter the MOH source for this entry. OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 3 above. DID DIGIT (005) 5) Enter priority level via dial keypad. (1-9 or NO) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft buttons to advance to next step. DID DIGIT (005) 6) Enter station or group number for each Ring Plan destination via dial keypad.(e.g., 530) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance to next step. DID DIGIT (005) DGT: DGT: DGT:5065 MOH:NONE PRI:NO MOH:NONE PRI:NO 1:530 2: Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 7) Enter call wait option via dial keypad. (1 for YES, 0 for NO) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance to next step. DID DIGIT (005) 8) Enter maximum call count via dial keypad.(00-99) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance to next step. DID DIGIT (005) 9) Enter number or delete digit via dial keypad.(0-16) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance to next step. DID DIGIT (005) 10) Enter the name via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to return to Step 1. CW:N MC:99 DC:0 CW:N MC:99 DC:0 CW:N MC:99 DC:0 DID DIGIT (005) NAME: 11) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS Samsung Business Communications 2-215 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [715] PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE Allows custom messages to be programmed or default messages to be changed. ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME. There are 15 messages in the system: MESSAGES 01-10 are 16-character pre-programmed default messages. Any of them can be changed. MESSAGES 11-15 are 16-character blank messages that can be created. DEFAULT DATA TEN PROGRAMMED MESSAGES: 01. 02. 03. 04. 05. IN A MEETING OUT ON A CALL OUT TO LUNCH LEAVE A MESSAGE PAGE ME 06. 07. 08. 09. 10. OUT OF TOWN IN TOMORROW RETURN AFTERNOON ON VACATION GONE HOME ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 715. Display shows: PGM.MESSAGE (01) 2) Enter message number.(e.g., 11) OR Press Volume button arrow to make selection. Press Right Soft button to move cursor. PGM.MESSAGE (11) 3) Enter message via dial keypad.(maximum 16 characters) Use ‘A’ button to toggle upper case/lower case. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2. PGM.MESSAGE (11) IN A MEETING Blank Message IN MEETING ROOM 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 115 2-216 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [716] UK LCR OPTION This MMC provides UK LCR options. No Option 0 NETWORK CODE Description This table is used to network access code when the call is routed to the secondary network. This table contains up to 16 entries. Each code has 4 digits maximum in length and use option for None, CCC, PIN or Both.(Default: all codes are empty and all use options are none) 0 NONE: This code doesn’t use. 1 CCC: This code uses with Call Cast Code(CCC). 2 PIN: This code uses with PIN Code. 3 BOTH: This code uses with PIN code and Call Cast Code. 1 PIN CODE This table is used to PIN code when the call is routed to the secondary network. This table contains up to 4 entries and each code has 10 digits maximum in length.(Default: all tables are empty) 2 CCC OPTION This is used to which number used for Call Cost Code. (Default: Station Number) 0 STATION NUMBER: Station number uses for Call Cost Code. 1 NONE: Doesn’t use Call Cost Code. 3 STATION PIN NO. This is assigned to PIN code table number for each station number.(Default: all stations are 1) DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 716. Display shows: NETWORK CODE 2) Enter option number 0-3. OR Press Volume buttons to select number and press Right Soft button to move cursor. NETWORK CODE 3) Enter number 0-16. OR Press Volume buttons to select number and press Right Soft button to move cursor. NETWORK CODE 4) Enter network access code via dial keypad. NETWORK CODE 01: 01: 02:_ USE:NONE USE:NONE USE:NONE 02:1234 USE:NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-217 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 5) Enter use option number.(0-3) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3. NETWORK CODE 02:1234 USE:CCC 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 400 MMC 310 MMC 710 MMC 711 MMC 712 MMC 713 2-218 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK LCR CLASS OF SERVICE LCR DIGIT TABLE LCR TIME TABLE LCR ROUTE TABLE LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [717] UCD AGENT ID This MMC defines UCD agent ID numbers or PIN numbers. These numbers are used to log UCD agents into the UCD groups. There are 100 available entries and each entry is tied to a specific UCD group. Agent ID codes can be up to 4 digits long. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 717. Display shows: AGENT PIN (001) 2) Dial code entry number.(e.g., 005) OR Press Volume buttons to select number and press Right Soft button to move cursor. AGENT PIN (005) 3) Enter ID code via dial keypad(e.g., 1234) and press Right Soft button to move cursor. AGENT PIN (005) 4) Enter group number.(e.g., 505) OR Press Volume button to select group and press Right Soft button to select and return to step 2. OR Select all groups. AGENT PIN (005) ID: ID:_ GRP:NONE GRP:NONE ID:1234 GRP:NONE ID:1234 GRP:505 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2-219 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [718] MY AREA CODE This MMC defines the home area code and country code. This information is used for caller ID and ISDN calls in defining the area code on incoming calls. This MMC removes the local area code to allow callback without digit modifications in LCR. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 718. Display shows: MY AREA CODE 2) Enter 0 for COUNTRY or 1 for AREA. OR Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. MY AREA CODE 3) Enter area code(maximum 4 digits) via dial keypad (e.g., 2) and press Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2. MY AREA CODE AREA AREA AREA : : :2 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS 2-220 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [719] IDLE DISPLAY This program allows you to enter guidance data to be displayed on large LCD phones. ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 719. Display shows: IDLE DISPLAY (01) 2) Enter the number of the line on a large LCD phone (01~12) on which guidance data is to be displayed. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. IDLE DISPLAY (02) 3) Enter guidance data via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to save and move to step 2. IDLE DISPLAY (02) WELCOME TO ABC 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 120 LARGE LCD OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2-221 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING Provides a tool for duplicating key assignments from one phone to another. This can be done on a per-station basis or on all stations, but not on a group of stations. A limitation is that the original and target phones must be of the same type.(the same number of buttons) DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 720. Display shows: [201] COPY KEY 2) Enter the station number to copy to.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all stations. [205] COPY KEY 3) Enter station number to copy from.(e.g., 203) and cursor returns to step 2. OR Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [205] COPY KEY FROM:NONE FROM:NONE FROM:203 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 MMC 721 MMC 722 MMC 723 2-222 KEY EXTENDER SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING STATION KEY PROGRAMMING SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING Provides a service tool which minimizes the accidental loss of programmable buttons on phones. First the data is saved and then the station can be replaced with another station type or the keys can be reprogrammed to other features. Once testing or replacement is completed, the data can be restored to the individual station, providing the same type is in place. CONDITIONS This program must be used carefully because key programming data is saved to a common programming database. When a new phone is connected, the system copies data from this database to the new phone. DEFAULT DATA RESTORE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 721. Display shows: [201] SAVE KEY 2) Enter desired station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. [205] SAVE KEY 3) Press Volume button to make function selection and press Right Soft button to enter and return to step 2. [205] SAVE KEY RESTORE RESTORE SAVE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 MMC 722 MMC 723 KEY EXTENDER STATION KEY PROGRAMMING SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications 2-223 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING Allows the customizing of programmable buttons on specific phones and add-on modules (AOMs). For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default. For AOMs, all buttons are set as DS keys by default. Features are selected by pressing the dial keypad buttons the required number of times. For example, for OHVA, the number 6 is pressed three times. If the BOSS key is required, 2 is pressed for the first letter B and then the Volume button used to change the selection from BARGE to BOSS. DIAL KEYPAD COUNT 1 2 3 DIAL 2 AB BARGE CAD DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO DIAL 4 GPIK HDSET ICONF DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB DIAL 8 TG UA VG DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP 4 SETDND WAKEUP Programmable Button Assignments Feature Description Feature Description AB ABSENCE MMPG MEET ME PAGE ABAND ABANDONED CALL MS MANUAL SIGNALLING ABW AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP MSG MESSAGE ACC ACCOUNT MUTE MUTE MW MESSAGE WAIT AN/RLS ANSWER/RELEASE NEW NEW CALL BARGE BARGE-IN NND NAME NUMBER DATE BILL BILL(Hotel Feature) NOCLIP NO CID SEND BLOCK OHVA BLOCK NPG NETWORK PAGE BOOTH BOOTH(Hotel Feature) NS NETWORK STATION BOSS 2-224 BOSS/SECRETARY NXT CID NEXT Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) Feature Description Feature Description CAD CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY OHVA OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE CALL CALL BUTTON OPER OPERATOR CAMP STATION CAMP-ON PAGE PAGE CANMG MESSAGE CANCEL PAGPK PICKUP PAGE HOLD CBK CALLBACK PARK CALL PARK ORBIT CC CALL COVERAGE PAUSE PAUSE CCBS ISDN CALL BACK CHIN CHECK IN(Hotel Feature) PMSG PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE CHOUT CHECK OUT(Hotel Feature) PRB PRIVACY RELEASE AND BRIDGE CHOICE CHOICE PROG SET PROGRAM (Related to News Server) CLIP CALLER ID PTHR PATH REPLACEMENT CONF CONFERENCE RB ROOM BILL(Hotel Feature) CONP CONNECTED NAME REJECT OHVA REJECT RETRY AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY DISPLAY CR CALL RECORD (Requires SVMi card) CREDIT CREDIT(Hotel Feature) REVW REVIEW CS CALL STATUS RP RING PLAN CSNR CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER RSV ROOM STATUS VIEW REDIAL DGPALM EASY ALARM SET TO (Hotel Feature) RTO RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE REMOTE STATION DICT DICTATION SETDND SET DO NOT DISTURB DIR DIRECTORY SETMG SET MESSAGE W/O RING DIVERT EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT SG STATION GROUP SLOCAT STAFF LOCATOR(Hotel Feature) SMDR SMDR KEY TO SECRETARY DLOCK DOOR LOCK DND DO NOT DISTURB SNR SAVED NUMBER REDIAL DNDO DO NOT DISTURB SP UCD SUPERVISOR OVERRIDE DP DIRECT PICKUP SPD SPEED DIAL DROP CALL DROP SPKR SPEAKER DS DSS KEY SSET ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE SET Samsung Business Communications 2-225 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) Feature Description DT DTS KEY ECT EXPLICIT CALL TRANSFER EP ESTABLISHED CALL Feature Description STATE SET EXECUTIVE STATE STORE STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER SYSALM SYSTEM ALARMS TCLIP TEMP CLIP PICKUP EXTMIC EXTERNAL MIC FAUTO FORCED AUTO ANSWER TG TRUNK GROUP FLASH FLASH TIMER TIMER FWRD CALL FORWARD TP TERMINAL PORTABILITY TRARPT TRAFFIC REPORT GPIK GROUP PICKUP TRSF TRANSFER HDSET HEADSET MODE UA UNIVERSAL ANSWER HLDPK HOLD PICKUP HOLD HOLD VM VOICE MAIL MEMO (Requires SVMi card) HOTEL HOTEL(Hotel Feature) VMADM VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION (Requires SVMi card) ICONF ISDN 3 PTY CONFERENCE VMAME ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION (Requires SVMi card) IDISC ISDN 3 PTY VMMSG DISCONNECTION IG IN/OUT GROUP IHOLD ISDN 3-PARTY HOLD INFDSP INFORMATION DISPLAY VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY (Requires SVMi card) (Requires News/Call Plus) INQIRE INQUIRE IRET ISDN 3 PTY RETRIEVE ISPY CID SPY LCR LEAST COST ROUTING VT VOICEMAIL TRANSFER WAKEUP WAKE UP(Hotel Feature) XCHIN EXPRESS CHECK IN (Hotel Feature) 2-226 LISTN GROUP LISTENING LNR LAST NUMBER REDIAL LOG CALL LOGGING MMPA MEET ME PAGE ANSWER Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide DEFAULT DATA For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default.(Other settings depend on the keyset type.) For AOMs, all buttons are set as DSS buttons by default. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 722. Display shows: [201] KEY (MAST) 2) Enter selected station number.(e.g., 205) OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [205] KEY (MAST) 3) Enter selected key number.(e.g., 18) OR Press Volume button to select key number and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [201] KEY (MAST) 4) Using table above, press dial keypad to select number. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to enter extender, if required, or to return to step 2. [201] KEY PROG. 5) Enter extender if required.(e.g., 03) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. [201] KEY PROG. 01:CALL1Æ 01:CALL1Æ 18:NONEÆ_ 18:NONEÆGPIK_ 18:NONEÆGPIK03 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 MMC 720 MMC 721 KEY EXTENDER COPY KEY PROGRAMMING SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications 2-227 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING This MMC is similar to MMC 722, Station Key Programming, except that changes are made system-wide rather than on a per-station basis. Features are entered via the dial keypad by pressing numbers as shown in the table. TYPE OF PHONE No Type of Phone Description 00 24 BTN SETS Phone with 24 program buttons 01 12 BTN SETS Phone with 12 program buttons 03 EU 6B SETS EU phone with 6 program buttons 05 48/64 BTN AOMS AOM with 48/64 program buttons 06 20 BTN SETS Phone with 20 program buttons 07 28 BTN SETS Phone with 28 program buttons 08 18 BTN SETS Phone with 18 program buttons 09 8 BTN SETS Phone with 8 program buttons 10 99 BTN SETS Phone with 99 program buttons 11 38 BTN SETS Phone with 38 program buttons 12 21 BTN SETS Phone with 21 program buttons 13 14 BTN SETS Phone with 14 program buttons 14 DS-07S SETS 7000 Range phone DIAL KEYPAD COUNT 1 2 3 DIAL 2 AB BARGE CAD DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO DIAL 4 GPIK HDSET ICONF DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB DIAL 8 TG UA VG DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP 4 SETDND WAKEUP See Programmable Button Assignments in MMC 722. 2-228 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide DEFAULT DATA SEE DEFAULT DATA IN MMC 722 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 723. Display shows: TYPE:24 BTN SETS 2) Enter type of set via dial keypad.(e.g.,1) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. TYPE:12 BTN SETS 3) Enter key number.(e.g., 03) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. TYPE:12 BTN SETS 4) Using table above, press dial keypad to select number. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to enter extender, if required. OR Press Left Soft button to return to step 3. TYPE:12 BTN SETS 5) Enter extender if required.(e.g., 03) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. TYPE:12 BTN SETS 01:CALL1Æ 01:CALL1Æ 03:NONEÆ 03:NONEÆGPIK 03:GPIKÆGPIK03 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 MMC 720 MMC 721 KEY EXTENDER COPY KEY PROGRAMMING SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications 2-229 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN This MMC allows the technician to change directory numbers for stations, trunks, station groups, trunk groups and feature access codes. The system can be pre-programmed with default 3- or 4-digit numbering for stations, station groups and trunk numbers depending on the position of the DIP switches on the MCP card. There is an error message provided to prevent the accidental duplication of a directory number or feature access code. No 00 Type of Dial No STN DIAL NO. Description This is where station directory numbers are changed or assigned. Default: 201-2xx, 3xx(last 319) or 2001-2xxx 01 TRK DIAL NO. This is where trunk directory numbers are changed or assigned. Default: 701-7xx or 7001-7xxx 02 AA/VD DIAL NO Not used 03 MISC DIAL NO. This is where directory numbers for relays, MOH ports and the alarm sensor are changed or assigned. Default: MISC01:371 MISC02: 361 MISC03:362 MISC04:3999 04 05 06 STNG DIAL This is where station group numbers are changed or assigned. NUMBER Default: 500-5xx or 5001-5xxx TRKG DIAL This is where trunk group numbers are changed or assigned. NUMBER Default: The first is 9 or 0, 800-809 FEAT DIAL NUMBER This is where feature access codes are changed or assigned. Dialling codes are entered via the dial keypad by pressing a number the required number of times to select the feature. For example, for OHVA, the number 6 would be pressed three times. Please remember that this program is system-wide. 07 S0 STN DIAL NO. This is where directory numbers for BRI station ports are changed or assigned. Default: 8701-8708 09 NTWK LCR DIAL NO This is where additional LCR access codes are entered if two or more OfficeServ 7100 systems are networked together. Default: NONE 2-230 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No 10 Type of Dial No VIRT EXT DIAL NO Description This is where virtual station directory numbers are changed or assigned. Default: SLT: 3501-3508, DGP: 3401-3416 11 MGI DIAL NO. This is where MGI port directory numbers are changed or assigned. Default: 3801-38xx 12 IP STN DIAL NO. This is where IP-based station directory numbers are changed or assigned. Default: 3201-3208 13 WLAN DIAL NO, This is where IP-based station directory numbers are changed or assigned. Default: 3301-3308 14 SPNET DIAL NO This is where Samsung proprietary switch-to-switch VoIP networking trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned. Default: 8301-8308 15 H323 TRK DIAL NO This is where VoIP H.323 trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned. Default: 8401-8408 16 SIP TRK DIAL NO This is where VoIP SIP trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned. Default: 8501-8508 FEATURE NUMBERING DIAL KEYPAD COUNT 1 2 3 DIAL 2 AB BARGE CAD DIAL 3 DGPALM EP FAUTO DIAL 4 GPIK HDSET ICONF DIAL 5 LANREQ LANREQ LANREQ DIAL 6 MMPA NEW OHVA DIAL 7 PAGE PAGE RB DIAL 8 TG UA VG DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP Samsung Business Communications 4 SETDND WAKEUP 2-231 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. Feature Code Assignments and Default Feature 2-232 Default Description ABAND 64 ABANDONED CALL ABS NONE ABSENCE ABW NONE AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP ACCT 47 ACCOUNT ALLCLR NONE ALL CLEAR AUTH NONE AUTHORIZATION CODE BARGE NONE BARGE-IN BILL NONE BILL(Hotel Feature) BLOCK NONE OHVA BLOCK BOSS NONE BOSS/SECRETARY CAMP 45 STATION CAMP-ON CANMG 42 MESSAGE CANCEL CBK 44 CALLBACK CHIN NONE CHECK IN(Hotel Feature) CHOUT NONE CHECK OUT(Hotel Feature) CHOICE NONE CHOICE(Related to News Server) CONF 46 CONFERENCE CONP NONE CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY CR NONE CALL RECORD(Requires SVMi card) CREDIT NONE CREDIT(Hotel Feature) DGPALM NONE EASY ALARM SET TO REMOTE STATION DICT NONE DICTATION DIR NONE DIRECTORY DIRPK 65 DIRECT PICKUP DISALM 58 DISA ALARM CLEAR DIVERT NONE EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO SECRETARY DLOCK 13 DOOR UNLOCK DND 40 DO NOT DISTURB DNDO NONE DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE E-LCR1 NONE SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION E-LCR2 NONE SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION E-LCR3 NONE SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION E-LCR4 NONE SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION FAUTO 14 FORCED AUTO ANSWER FLASH 49 FLASH FWD 60 CALL FORWARD Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) Feature Default Description GRPK 66 GROUP PICKUP HDSET NONE HEADSET MODE HLDPK 12 HOLD PICKUP HOLD 11 HOLD HOTEL NONE HOTEL(Hotel Feature) ICONF NONE ISDN 3-PARTY CONFERENCE IDISC NONE ISDN 3-PARTY DISCONNECTION IG 53 IN/OUT GROUP IHOLD NONE ISDN 3-PARTY HOLD INFDSP NONE INFORMATION DISPLAY(Requires News/Call Plus) IRET NONE ISDN 3-PARTY RETRIEVE LCR # LEAST COST ROUTING LISTN NONE GROUP LISTENING LNR 19 LAST NUMBER REDIAL LOG NONE CALL LOGGING MMPA 56 MEET ME PAGE ANSWER MMPG 54 MEET ME PAGE MSG 43 MESSAGE MYGRPK 28 MY PICKUP GROUP CALL PICKUP NEW NONE NEW CALL NOCLIP NONE NO CID SEND NPAGE NONE NETWORK PAGE OHVA NONE OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE OPER 0 OPERATOR PAGE 55 PAGE PAGPK 10 PICKUP PAGE HOLD PARK NONE CALL PARK ORBIT PMSG 48 PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE PTHR NONE PATH REPLACEMENT RB NONE ROOM BILL(Hotel Feature) REJECT NONE OHVA REJECT RP NONE RING PLAN RSV NONE ROOM STATUS VIEW(Hotel Feature) RTO NONE RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE SELFID NONE SELF SYSTEM ID Samsung Business Communications 2-233 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) Feature Default Description SETMG 41 SET MESSAGE W/O RING SLOCAT NONE STAFF LOCATOR(Hotel Feature) SLTALM NONE EASY ALARM SET TO SELF STATION SLTMMC 15 NORMAL PHONE PROGRAMMING SNR 17 SAVED NUMBER REDIAL SPEED 16 SPEED DIAL SRELOC NONE SET RELOCATION SSET NONE ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE SET STATE NONE SET EXECUTIVE STATE TCLIP NONE TEMP CLIP TP NONE TERMINAL PORTABILIY UA 67 UNIVERSAL ANSWER VMADM NONE VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION(Requires SVMi card) VMAME NONE ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION(Requires SVMi card) VMMEMO NONE VOICE MAIL MEMO(Requires SVMi card) VMMSG NONE VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY(Requires SVMi card) VMSCMT NONE VMS COMMENT(Requires SVM -800) VMSMSG NONE VMS MESSAGE(Requires SVM -800) WAKEUP 18 WAKE UP(Hotel Feature) WCOS 59 WORKING CLASS OF SERVICE DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION FEATURE CODES DEPEND ON COUNTRY 2-234 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 724. Display shows: STN DIAL NUM:C1 2) Dial option number to make selection.(e.g., 06) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. FEAT DIAL NUMBER 3) Dial first letter of feature name.(e.g., 7) OR FEAT NUMBER PLAN Press Volume button to make selection then press Right Soft button to advance cursor. 4) Enter digits(e.g., 63) via the dial keypad. S2-P01:201Æ ABAND :64Æ_ PAGE :55Æ FEAT NUMBER PLAN PARK :NONEÆ_ FEAT NUMBER PLAN PARK :NONEÆ63 5) Press Right Soft button to enter change and continue to make changes. If an error message appears indicating duplication of access code, enter 1 for YES for change or enter 0 for NO for no change. FEAT NUMBER PLAN PARK :NONEÆ63 SAME DIAL EXIST CHANGE? Y:1,N:0 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS ALL MMCs Samsung Business Communications 2-235 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [725] SMDR OPTIONS Allows the system administrator to select the information printed on the SMDR report. The following options may be selected: No 00 Option PAGE HEADER Default YES Description This option determines whether a page header will print at the top of each page. This would normally be turned off if SMDR is being sent to a Call Accounting machine. 01 LINE PER PAGE 66 This option selects the length of each page to determine when to print the SMDR header. The number of lines is in the range 01-99. 02 INCOMING CALL YES This option determines whether incoming calls will print on SMDR. 03 OUTGOING CALL YES This option determines whether outgoing calls will print on SMDR. 04 AUTHORIZE NO CODE This option determines whether authorization codes will print on SMDR. If this option is set to NO, ‘****’ is printed on SMDR. 05 SMDR START YES TIME 06 IN/OUT GROUP This option determines whether valid calls will include the minimum call time in total call duration. NO This option allows a message, IN GROUP or OUT GROUP, to be printed in the ‘digits dialled’ column each time a station enters or leaves a group. 07 DND CALL NO This option allows a message, IN DND or OUT DND, to be printed in the ‘digits dialled’ column each time a station enters or leaves DND. 08 WAKE-UP CALL YES This option determines whether stations receiving an alarm reminder call will print on SMDR. 09 DIRECTORY NONE NAME This option allows the system administrator to enter a name up to 16 characters which will appear on the SMDR header. 10 CALLER ID DATA NO This option can be selected to print Caller ID data received from the Central Office on incoming calls. This option requires the use of a 132-column wide carriage printer or an 80-column printer set for condensed print. 11 ABANDON CALL NO If this option is set to YES, unanswered calls for which CID information was received will print on SMDR. 13 NO. OF DIAL MASK 0 If this option is set to a numeric value, the selected last digits of the number dialled field will be masked as asterisks(*) on the SMDR print out. Maximum masked digits is 18. First 4 digits will not mask. 2-236 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No 15 Option INCOMING Default NO ANSWER 16 INTERCOM CALL Description If this option is set to YES, the duration of calls ringing before being answered will print on SMDR. NO This option determines whether intercom calls will print on SMDR. 17 KEY MMC IN/OUT NO If set to YES the SMDR record will show programming being opened and closed in MMC 200 and MMC 800. 20 HOTEL PAGE END FEED 21 HOTEL START 0 LINE 23 DID NUM/NAME This option determines where the page feed is inserted on HM REPT.(Hotel Application Only) This option determines that the number of empty lines per each page on HM REPT.(Hotel Application Only) YES If this option is set to YES, received DID information will print on SMDR. 24 ITP NO REGISTRATION 25 SET RELOCATION If set to YES the SMDR record will show registration of ITP phones. NO If set to YES the SMDR record will show Set Relocations. ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY Samsung Business Communications 2-237 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 725. Display shows: PAGE HEADER 2) Dial the option number.(e.g., 01) OR Use the Volume buttons to scroll through the options and press Right Soft button to select an option. LINE PER PAGE 3) Enter the option data. OR Use the Volume buttons to press Right Soft button to save the data and return to step 2. LINE PER PAGE PRINT: YES 60 LINE/PAGE 50 LINE/PAGE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 300 2-238 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [727] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY This MMC is used for system version display only.(READ ONLY) The displays depend on which modules are included in the system DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 727. Display shows: MP10-MAIN VERS 07.02.26 V4.01.p 2) Press Volume button to show other modules, e.g.,: SP Modules MP10-SP VERS 07.02.26 V1.01.e VMS Modules MP10-VMS VERS 07.02.26 V4.01.p DATA Modules MP10-DATA VERS NO VERSION DATA 3) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-239 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID number received from the central office with a name programmed in this translation table. If there is no match between a received number and a name in this table, ‘no CID name’ will be displayed. The translation table consists of 1000 entries. Each entry comprises a telephone number up to 14 digits and a name up to 16 digits. ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 728. Display shows first entry CLIP XLAT(0001) 2) Dial entry number.(e.g., 0005) OR Use Volume button to scroll through entries and press Right Soft button to select entry. CLIP XLAT (0005) 3) Enter telephone number and press Right Soft button to advance to name entry. OR Enter telephone number and press Left Soft button to return to step 2. CLIP XLAT (0005) 4) Enter associated name and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. CLIP XLAT (0005) DGT: DGT:_ DGT:3054264100 SAMSUNG TELECOM 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 312 MMC 608 2-240 ALLOW CALLER ID ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [740] STATION PAIR Assigns a secondary station to a phone. This secondary station can be a keyset or single line phone. The secondary station assumes the Call Forwarding, Class of Service, LCR Class, and DND attributes of the primary station. The secondary station will ring when the primary station rings, and vice versa. Features can be set or cancelled at either station. When changing the COS If the COS is changed for either station in MMC 301, the change affects both stations. Messages from the secondary extension will display the secondary extension number. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 740. Display shows [201] PRIMARY 2) Enter the primary station number via dial [201] PRIMARY Keypad.(e.g., 201) SECONDARY:NONE SECONDARY:NONE OR Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft button. 3) Enter the secondary station number via dial Keypad.(e.g., 205) OR Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft button. [201] PRIMARY SECONDARY:205 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 102 MMC 301 MMC 310 CALL FORWARD ASSIGN STATION COS LCR CLASS OF SERVICE Samsung Business Communications 2-241 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [746] COSTING DIAL PLAN The COSTING DIAL PLAN is used to analyze the leading dialled digits of a dialled number and determine what DIAL PLAN it is to follow. Data entry for this program is in three fields: ENTRY, DIGITS and COST RATE table reference. DIGITS Up to 500 entries may be made. Each entry can be up to 10 digits. These are the entries that will be searched to find a match with the digits dialled by the station making the call. This is a leading digits table and the system will look for the exact leading digits in the table that match the number dialled. For example, if a user dials 1305 and the COSTING DIAL PLAN contains 1, 1308 and 1312, the dialled digits will be matched to 1 because 1308 and 1312 do not form a complete match. When this table is created by the technician or when any new entries are added, the system automatically places all entries in numerical order. Wild cards(∗) can be used to represent any digit. The Toll Restriction Wild Card Character assignment(MMC 704) is common with Call Costing and Toll Restriction. When all entries are used, [LAST ENTRY] is displayed. DIAL PLAN This shows in the programming display as DP and represents a pattern(1-7, 8). This pattern is used by MMC 433, TRUNK COST RATE, to determine the correct billing according to MMC 749, RATE CALCULATION TABLE When the system finds a DIAL PLAN match for the digits dialled, the system checks MMC 749 to see what RATE CALCULATION to use for costing the call. EXAMPLES When a station user dials a number, the system will search the COSTING DIAL PLAN to find a match. If 13056 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1, 13, 1305 and 1401, the closest match is 1305 and this will be selected. If 1305 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1, 13, 13056 and 1401, no action will be taken until the station user dials another digit. If the next digit is 6, the 13056 entry is the closest match and this entry will be selected, but if the next digit is anything other than 6, the 13 entry is the closest match. Whenever a new entry is added, the system will sort all entries in numerical order because this is the logical order in which the system analyzes digits. Wild cards are checked after exact digits. If 1813 and 18∗∗ are entered, the system will check 1813 first. If no match is found, it will check 18∗∗. 2-242 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 746. Display shows: COST DP 2) Dial CALL COST entry.(e.g., 005) OR Press Volume button to select entry and press Right Soft button to move cursor. COST DP 3) Enter digit string via the dial keypad and press Right Soft button. COST DP 4) Enter DIAL PLAN 1-8.(e.g., 8) OR Press Volume button to select dial plan and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2. COST DP (001) DIGIT: (005) DIGIT:_ (005) DIGIT:1305 (005) CALL RATE: 8 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 433 MMC 747 COST RATE RATE CALCULATION TABLE Samsung Business Communications 2-243 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [747] RATE CALCULATION TABLE The RATE CALCULATION TABLE is used to define the billing charges for each COST RATE. These rate tables correlate with the Trunk Cost Rate and the Costing Dial Plan. There are eight call costing rates. Each rate has the following data fields. No 0 1 Type Description 1ST DUR This is the amount of time at the beginning of each call to which a (FIRST INTERVAL fixed cost is applied. DURATION) The range is 0-999 seconds; e,g. 180 seconds(three minutes). 1ST COST This is the cost for the first interval duration in £s sterling or Euros. (FIRST INTERVAL The range is 0 to 999; e.g., 345(£3.45 or €3.45). COST) 2 3 4 2ND DUR This is the duration of each billing increment after the first interval (SECOND INTER- has expired. VAL DURATION) The range is 0-999 seconds; e.g., 006 seconds(six seconds). 2ND COST This is the cost for each billing increment, in £s sterling or Euros, (SECOND INTER- after the first interval has expired. VAL COST ) The range is 0-999; e.g., 100(£1.00 or €1.00). SURCHARGE This is a one-time charge, in £s sterling or Euros, that is applied to the call over and above the time charges. The range is 0-999; e.g.,150(£1.50 or €1.50). Currency values(£ or €) Currency values(£ or €) depend on the setting for the USE EURO option in MMC 210. DEFAULT DATA ALL COST RATES: NO DATA ACTION 2-244 DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 747. Display shows: COST RATE (1) 2) Dial COST RATE number 1-8.(e.g., 3) OR Press Volume button to select COST RATE and press Right Soft button to move cursor. COST RATE (3) 1ST DUR :000 SEC 1ST DUR :000 SEC Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 3) Dial option number 0-4.(e.g., 1) OR Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to move cursor. COST RATE (3) 4) Enter data via dial keypad.(e.g., 125=1.25) OR Press Volume button to select data and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3. COST RATE (3) 1ST COST:000 1ST COST:125 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 433 MMC 746 COST RATE COSTING DIAL PLAN Samsung Business Communications 2-245 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [750] VM CARD RESTART This MMC is used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card. There are four options available in this MMC: No 0 Option MBX DOWNLOAD Description When the Built-In Voice Mail module starts, part of the power up procedure will download data from the system to determine time, date, what mailboxes to create, and system numbering plan. This must be done at least once, but once done this download feature can be turned NO to save boot up time. 2 VIRTUAL NUMBER This option is determine which type virtual port include during DOWNLOAD mailbox and system numbering plan downloading procedure. The virtual port type are followed: No Type Description 0 VIRTUAL EXT Virtual extension number 1 DESKTOP ITP DESKTOP IP-based phone number 2 DECT PHONE DECT terminal number 3 MOBILE ITP Wireless IP-based mobile phone number 3 VM CONNECTION 4 BRI STATION ISDN terminal number 5 VOIP NET TRK VoIP networking trunk number 6 VOIP 323 TRK VoIP H.323 trunk number 7 VOIP SIP TRK VoIP SIP trunk number 8 REMOTE STN Remote station number via networking Select VMS Type. There are 3 types: SVMi CARD, DLI CONNECT, IP-UMS SERVER(impossible simultaneously use all type) DEFAULT DATA ALL OPTIONS ARE NO 2-246 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 750. Display shows: MBX DOWNLOAD 2) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. VM RESTART 3) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. VM RESTART NO RESET NOW ? NO RESET NOW ? YES 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-247 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [751] ASSIGN MAILBOX This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card. It assigns mailboxes to each station or group as required. During Voice Mail card power up, mailboxes will be created for each directory number with a ‘YES’ entry. Once the Voice Mail database has been created, new mailboxes can be added: y Through Voice Mail administration. y By adding a new mailbox in this MMC. If a mailbox is to be removed, this must be done through Voice Mail administration. If a station that does not have an associated mailbox calls the Voice Mail system, it will be answered by the Voice Mail system main greeting. CONDITIONS Mailboxes that are needed for users who do not have an extension must be added through Voice Mail programming. DEFAULT DATA ALL STATIONS: YES ALL GROUPS: NO ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 751. Display shows:. ASSIGN MAIL BOX 2) Dial station number. OR Press Volume button to scroll the number and press Right Soft button to move cursor. ASSIGN MAIL BOX 3) Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2. ASSIGN MAIL BOX [201] YES [202] YES [202] NO 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-248 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [752] AUTO RECORD This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card. Specific stations in the phone system can be assigned to automatically record conversations. When this option is set, all incoming, all outgoing, or all calls(incoming and outgoing) can be recorded. In this MMC you can assign: y Station number: Which station can use this feature. y Mailbox number: What mailbox the conversations are recorded in. y I, O or B: What type of calls are recorded.(in, out or both) y Voice mail port number: What port is dedicated to the station. Before using the Auto Record feature Before using the Auto Record feature, make sure that you are not violating any laws. Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature. CONDITIONS A maximum of eight stations can use this feature at one time. The same port cannot be assigned to more than one station. Attempts to do this will result in an error message. When a Voice Mail port is assigned here, it is automatically removed from the Voice Mail group defined in MMC 601. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 752. Display shows: AUTO RECORD 2) Dial station number via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. AUTO RECORD 3) Dial mailbox number via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. AUTO RECORD Samsung Business Communications STN:201 MB:NONE STN:201 MB:NONE STN:201 MB:201 2-249 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 4) Dial VM number via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. AUTO RECORD 5) Dial call type via dial keypad.(0: I, 1: O or 2: B) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. AUTO RECORD PORT:209 CALL:I PORT:209 CALL:B 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-250 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [753] WARNING DESTINATION This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card. It provides an emergency destination for calls destined for the card if the card is removed or is offline. In addition, any calls that are forwarded to the card will not forward; they will remain ringing at the ‘fwd from’ station until answered. This destination can be a station number or a group number. DEFAULT DATA 5000 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 753. Display shows: WARNING DEST. 2) Dial station number or group number. OR Press Volume button to scroll through numbers and select. WARNING DEST. DEST:500 DEST:501 3) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-251 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [754] VM HALT This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It is used to halt the Voice Mail Module. If the Voice Mail module is halted by using this MMC, system has to restart to use the Voice Mail module again. At that time, ‘RESTART’ option can be used. DEFAULT DATA RESTART ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 754. Display shows: VM HALT 2) Enter 1 to HALT or 0 to PROC OR Press Volume button to select. VM HALT 3) If you select 1 to halt, display shows: VM HALT Press 1 to confirm. STATUS:RESTART STATUS:RESTART ARE YOU SURE? YES 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-252 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [755] VM ALARM This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It will generate an alarm message in the mailbox defined in MMC 751 whenever the Voice Mail disk drive reaches a threshold. The threshold is measured as a percentage of capacity. This means that if the MMC is set for 80, the alarm will be generated when the disk exceeds 80% of the available drive space. DEFAULT DATA THRESHOLD: 80% ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 755. Display shows: VM ALARM 2) Enter new threshold level.(e.g., 70) VM ALARM THRESHOLD:80 THRESHOLD:70 3) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-253 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [756] ASSIGN VMMOH This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It is used to assign each port a Music-On-Hold source for the system from a sound file located on the Voice Mail card hard disk drive. The 100 available sound files are defined as numbers 5000 to 5099. To use the default music, select the number; otherwise, make sure you record the sound file first. Then, assign the sound file to a Voice Mail port. For example, if you record sound file 5025 you would associate 25 with a specific Voice Mail port, e.g., 301. This will dedicate the port for use only as MOH and remove it from group 529 or 549. Now 301will show up as a valid music source in MMCs 308, 309 and 408. Each Music-On-Hold source assigned here requires one Voice Mail port. When the first Built-In Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH If the first Built-In Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH, it must be disabled before boot up since Built-In Voice Mail and the system use port 1 during boot up to exchange critical information. For this reason we suggest you use the last port as VMMOH ports. DEFAULT DATA NOT USED ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 756. Display shows: SET VMMOH 2) Dial VM number.(e.g., 301) OR SET VMMOH 301 : NOT USED 301: NOT USED Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 3) Enter VM message number.(e.g., 25) OR Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. SET VMMOH 301: 25 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-254 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [757] VM IN/OUT This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It is used to assign each Voice Mail port as used for incoming, outgoing or both-way calls. This MMC must support outgoing calls if off-premises notification(beeper, outbound follow me or outbound notification) is used. DEFAULT DATA IN/OUT ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 757. Display shows: VM IN/OUT 2) Dial VM number.(e.g., 301) OR Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. VM IN/OUT 3) Enter option via dial keypad.(e.g., IN) OR Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. VM IN/OUT 301: IN/OUT 301: IN/OUT 301: IN 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-255 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [758] VM DAY/NIGHT This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. The module can operate in either a DAY or NIGHT operating mode. The mode determines what main menu greetings and options are played to callers and can change automatically (if enabled in the card) according to the settings in this MMC. This MMC contains either a DAY or NIGHT instruction for each Ring Plan. DEFAULT DATA ALL RING PLANS: DAY ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 758. Display shows: VM DAY/NIGHT 2) Enter ring plan number. OR Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. VM DAY/NIGHT 3) Dial 0 for day or 1 for night. OR Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor. VM DAY/NIGHT RING 1 : DAY RING 3 : DAY RING 3 : DAY 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 507 2-256 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [759] CLI RINGING This MMC assigns a specific CID number received from the central office to a specific ring plan destination. Also allows you to reject a specific CID number and assign priorities. There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest. It also allows you to select the ring tone heard at a phone when called by a specific CID number. There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for SLTs. There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station(NO) option. There are five cadences and a Follow Station option(NO) for SLTs. The CID Ringing table consists of 100 entries. DEFAULT DATA NONE Option Description CLI CID number to be received from the central office. Up to 16 digits may be entered. REJ CID call reject option. When this sets YES, if a call comes that matched CID number and CLI field then the system will be reject call. PRI CID priority option. There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest. When calls into station group come and group members are all busy, the system will assign a priority to the CID number so that calls from a high priority CID number will be placed at the front of the group queue. If this option sets NO, the longest call that placed at the group queue has the highest priority. R1: XXX, R2: XXX, R3: XXX, R4: XXX, R5: XXX, R6: XXX Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a station, station group. TONE Ring Tone options for a specific CID Number.(NO, 1~8) No 1~8 CAD Calls from the programmed CID number will ring phones with this ring frequency. Ring Cadence options for a specific CID Number at SLT’s(NO, 1~5) No Samsung Business Communications Calls will ring with the phone users choice of ring frequency. Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences. 1 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the intercom ring cadence. 2 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the CO ring cadence. 3 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the DOOR ring cadence. 4 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the ALARM ring cadence. 5 Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the CALLBACK ring cadence. 2-257 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 759. Display shows: CLI RINGING(001) 2) Dial entry number.(e.g., 005) OR CLI RINGING(005) CLI: CLI:_ Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 3) Enter CID number and press Right Soft button to advance to next entry. CLI RINGING(005) CLI:1234567 OR Enter CID number and press Left Soft button to return to step 2. 4) Enter reject option via dial keypad. (1 for YES, 0 for NO) CLI RINGING(005) REJ:NO PRI:NO OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 5) Enter priority level via dial keypad.(1-9 or NO) OR CLI RINGING(005) REJ:NO PRI:NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 6) Enter station or group number for each Ring. Plan destination via dial keypad.(e.g., 501) CLI RINGING(005) R1:501 R2:NONE OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 7) Dial 1-8(or NO) to select ring tone.(e.g., 2) OR CLI RINGING(005) TONE:2 CAD:NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 8) Dial 1-5(or NO) to select ring cadence. OR CLI RINGING(005) TONE:2 CAD:NO Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 9) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 312 2-258 ALLOW CALLER ID Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [760] ITEM COST TABLE This MMC provides a means to assign a code to a billable item along with a 10-character name for the item. There are a maximum of 100 entries(00 to 99) in the table with item 00 reserved as the code for room deposits, 01 reserved as the code for phone deposits and items 89 to 99 reserved for other PMS stream items. These item codes, with the exception of codes 93 to 99, will appear on the guests’ bills at checkout and will serve to identify what each charge on the bill is for. The room bill, when printed, will also show telephone calls with an item designation of TEL and the name field will show the number dialled. In addition to the name, up to eight of the tax codes or rates defined in MMC 761 can be applied to each item. PRE DEFINED CODES No Code Description 00 Room Deposit This is the code used for pre-pay room deposits. 01 Phone Deposit This is the code used for pre-pay phone deposits. 02-88 - User-Assignable code 89 W/UP SET A wake up call was set. 90 W/UP ANS A wake up call was answered. 91 W/UP N/ANS A wake up call was not answered. 92 W/UP CANCL A wake up call was cancelled. 93 Check In A guest has checked into a room. 94 Check out A guest has checked out of a room. 95 Available A room has been flagged as AVAILABLE. 96 Occupied A room has been flagged as OCCUPIED. 97 Clean Room A room has been flagged as NEEDS CLEANING. 98 Fix Room A room has been flagged as NEED MAINTENANCE. 99 Hold A room has been flagged as HOLD. CONDITIONS This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL OPERATION. ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA NO ENTRIES Samsung Business Communications 2-259 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 760. Display shows: ITEM CODE (00) 2) Enter valid code number(e.g., 02) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. ITEM CODE (02) 3) Enter item name(e.g., ROOM COST) via keypad. ITEM CODE (02) 4) Press Right Soft button to move cursor to tax entries. ITEM CODE (02) 5) Enter the tax rates that apply to this item(‘1’ selects each rate) and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. ITEM CODE (02) NAME:RM Deposit NAME: NAME: ROOM COST TAXES:00000000 TAXES:11000000 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 761 2-260 TAX RATE SETUP Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [761] TAX RATE SETUP This MMC allows the technician to set up the eight tax rates used in MMC 760. Each tax rate may be defined as a fixed value or as a percentage of the item cost. In addition, a 10character name may be used to define the reason for the tax. The options are detailed below. Option TAX RATE Description The number assigned to this tax rate. Tax rates are numbered 1 to 8 to match the rate field in MMC 760, counting from left to right. TYPE The type of tax. Defines if the VALUE is applied as a percentage(%) of the cost of an item(e.g., service charge) or is added as a fixed currency value(C) to an item or is applied as a Inclusive VAT percentage(I) of the cost of an item. VALUE The actual tax rate that will be applied to the item cost. NAME A 10-character name that will be displayed on the room bill alongside the tax. CONDITIONS This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL OPERATION. ENTERING CHARACTERS Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME. DEFAULT DATA ALL RATES ARE % ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 761. Display shows: TAX RATE 2) Enter valid tax number, e.g., 2, via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. TAX RATE 3) Dial 0 for ‘%’, 1 for ‘C’ or 2 for ‘I’. (Refer to table above) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. TAX RATE Samsung Business Communications (1) TYPE:% VAL:00.00 (2) TYPE:% VAL:00.00 (2) TYPE:C VAL:00.00 2-261 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 4) Enter the tax rate or value via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection. If valid entry, system advances cursor. TAX RATE 5) Enter name and press Right Soft button to return to step 2. TAX RATE (2) TYPE:C VAL:01.25 (2) NAME:MIA BED 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 760 2-262 ITEM COST TABLE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [762] ROOM COST RATE This MMC allows the technician to set up the cost rates for a week. Each room cost rate can be assigned with a percentage of the actual room cost from Sunday to Saturday. EXAMPLE: If you set SUN: 150%, 1. MON: 100%, 2.TUE: 090% . Then, if you set £100 as the room cost when checking in a guest, the real room cost will be £150 on Sunday, £100 on Monday and £90 on Tuesday. CONDITIONS This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in ‘MMC 813, HOTEL OPERATION’. DEFAULT DATA ALL RATES ARE 100% ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 762. Display shows: RM COST RAT(SUN) 2) Dial day number 0-6.(e.g., 2) OR Press Volume button to select day and press Right Soft button to move cursor. RM COST RAT(TUE) 3) Enter room cost rate.(001-999, e.g., 090) RM COST RAT(TUE) 100% : 100% : 100% :090 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE Samsung Business Communications 2-263 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [763] SECOND LCR This MMC allows the technician to input the Extended LCR information table. Max table index is 200. This table have translation and route information for input digits. The last table(index 200) has only ‘NEXT ROUTE’ option. This is used for the case there are no matching table for user input digits. NEXT ROUTE option can be set by LCR or trunk group as follows. Option IN DIGIT Description Default Define user input digits after E-LCR code - (Max 16 digits) OUT DIGIT Outgoing digits(these digits will be sent instead of input digits) (Max - 16 digits) USE LCR NUM Select which E-LCR code(E-LCR1, E-LCR2, E-LCR3, E-LCR4) ALL used for this table index. NEXT ROUTE LCR Select ‘LCR’ or trunk group to seizure. ‘LCR’ means that MMC710 LCR DIGIT table will be used with outgoing digits(OUT DIGIT). CONDITIONS MMC724 FEATURE CODE: E-LCR1, E-LCR2, E-LCR3, E-LCR4 addition DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION 1) Press Transfer button and enter 763. Display shows: (001)IN DIGIT 2) Dial Table number 001-200. OR Press Volume button to select Table number and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (001)IN DIGIT 3) Enter IN DIGIT maximum 16 digits, and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (001)IN DIGIT 4) Enter OUT DIGIT option number([1]). OR Press Volume button to select OUT DIGIT and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 2-264 DISPLAY 1234 (001)OUT DIGIT Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 5) Enter OUT DIGIT maximum 16 digits, and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (001)OUT DIGIT 6) Enter USE LCR NUM option number([2]). OR Press Volume button to select USE LCR NUM and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (001)USE LCR NUM 7) Enter USE LCR NUM maximum 16 digits, and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (001)USE LCR NUM 8) Enter NEXT ROUTE option number([3]). OR Press Volume button to select NEXT ROUTE and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (001)NEXT ROUTE 9) Enter USE LCR NUM maximum 16 digits, and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (001)NEXT ROUTE 7500 9 LCR 10) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 310 MMC 711 MMC 712 MMC 713 MMC 724 LCR CLASS LCR TIME LCR ROUTE LCR MODF. DGT NUMBER PLAN Samsung Business Communications 2-265 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM Used to open and close technician-level programming. If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC, an error message will be displayed. CONDITIONS A 4-digit passcode is required to access this MMC. Each character can be digits 0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs. DEFAULT DATA DISABLE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 800. Display shows: ENABLE TECH.PROG 2) Enter passcode. ENABLE TECH.PROG PASSCODE: PASSCODE:∗∗∗∗ Correct code shows: ENABLE TECH.PROG DISABLE TENANT:1 Incorrect code shows: ENABLE TECH. PROG PASSCODE ERROR 3) Enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move tenant number and enter tenant number(1-2). ENABLE TECH.PROG 4) Press Speaker button to advance to MMC entry level. 801:TEC.PASSCODE ENABLE TENANT:1 SELECT PROG.ID 5) Enter the MMC required to begin programming. 6) To log out and return to MMC 800, press Volume button to select DISABLE. OR Press Speaker button then Transfer to return to normal display. Programming option will time out. RELATED ITEMS MMC 801 2-266 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800, Enable Technician Program, from its current value. CONDITIONS The passcode is four characters long. Each character can be digits 0-9. The current or old passcode is required for this MMC. DEFAULT DATA DEFAULT PASSCODE: 4321 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 801. TECH. PASSCODE NEW CODE:_ 2) Enter new passcode. TECH. PASSCODE NEW CODE:∗∗∗∗ 3) Enter new passcode again. TECH. PASSCODE VERIFY :∗∗∗∗ 4) If passcode is correct, press Right Soft key to continue and enter desired MMC. If passcode is incorrect. TECH. PASSCODE VERIFY :SUCCESS TECH. PASSCODE VERIFY :FAILURE System returns to step 2. TECH. PASSCODE NEW CODE:∗∗∗∗ 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM Samsung Business Communications 2-267 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER Allows the System Administrator(customer) to have access to certain MMCs. For example, it is required that the customer has access to MMC 102, Call Forward, for call forwarding but it is not required that the customer has access to MMC 710, LCR Digit Table, for LCR dial plans. This MMC is for both tenants. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 802. Display shows: CUST.USE MMC :1 2) Enter desired tenant number(1-2) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. CUST.USE MMC :1 3) Enter desired MMC number via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. CUST.USE MMC :1 4) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Left Soft button to return to step 3 to make additional entries. CUST.USE MMC :1 100:STN LOCK:YES 100:STN LOCK:YES 102:CALL FWD:YES 102:CALL FWD:NO 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-268 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN Allows the system administrator to set the base level of TX volume on phones. There are eight levels that can be controlled by the Volume buttons on phones, and 10 controllable levels in the system. This MMC allows the system administrator to classify any desired eight levels within 11. No Option 0 TX LEVEL CONTROL Description Adjusts the transmitting sensitivity(max.: 9) Default values are: INDEX: 1 MISC TSW GAIN 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LEVEL: 0 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 Adjusts the level of the internal music source of the MCP card or the external music source of the MIS card(0~7, higher numbers mean lower levels). Default value is 0. 2 TSW GAIN Adjusts the tone sensitivity. There are eight types of matrix connec- CONTROL tions of the T-Switch that adjust the tone sensitivity(0-7, below). Connection between Trunk lines are only applicable when set as 0 in MMC 421. 0 DGP DLI phone 1 SLT SLI phone 2 ATRK Analogue trunk 3 DTRK Digital trunk 4 DECT DECT terminal 5 VOIP MGI port or IP-based phone 6 SVMi SVMi port 7 WLAN WIP port When changing the MMC [805] ‘MMC [805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN’ should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor. DEFAULT DATA RX DGP SLT ATRK DTRK DECT VOIP SVMi WLAN DGP Æ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +1.9 SLT Æ 0.0 -2.5 0.0 -2.5 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +1.9 ATRK Æ 0.0 0.0 +1.9 -6.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +1.9 DTRK Æ 0.0 -2.5 +1.9 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 DECT Æ 0.0 0.0 0.0 +1.9 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 VOIP Æ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 SVMi Æ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 WLAN Æ -6.0 -2.5 -6.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 +1.9 TX Samsung Business Communications 2-269 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 805. Display shows: TX LEVEL CONTROL 2) Press Volume button to make selection(0-3) and press Right Soft button to move cursor. TX LEVEL CONTROL 3) (When the TX LEVEL CONTROL is selected) a. Select the desired volume level via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to go to the next volume level and press Right Soft button. b. Enter desired volume data via dial keypad. OR 4) (When the MISC TSW GAIN is selected) a. Enter desired MISC/BGM TSW gain via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to select desired MISC/BGM TSW gain and press Right Soft button. 5) (When the TSW GAIN CONTROL is selected) a. Select the TX TWS connect type via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to go to the next TX TSW connect type and press Right Soft button. LEVEL 0Æ0 LEVEL 1Æ1 TX LEVEL CONTROL LEVEL 1Æ1 TX LEVEL CONTROL LEVEL 1Æ3 MISC TSW GAIN BGM/MOH :0 TSW GAIN CONTROL SLTÆDGP :+0.0 b. Select the RX TSW connect type via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to go to the next RX TSW connect type and press Right Soft button. TSW GAIN CONTROL c. Enter desired TSW gain control data via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to scroll data and press Right Soft button. TSW GAIN CONTROL SLTÆATRK:+0.0 SLTÆATRK:+1.9 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-270 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [806] CARD PRE-INSTALL Allows the pre-programming of a card slot for a specific card type. A card inserted into a system will not be recognized by the system until it is enabled using this MMC. Cards installed using this MMC will not be assigned in the system numbering plan—you should use MMC 724 to assign the desired directory numbers to extensions, trunks, ports or miscellaneous functions. When a card is removed and a different type card is inserted If a card is removed and a different card is inserted, and this MMC is performed, the memory associated with the previous card(e.g., key programming) will be erased. When a previous card is UNI Board and a current card is the same, but the modules are changed If a UNI card is removed and a UNI card which has different modules is inserted, system will recognize automatically. So it does not need to preinstall. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 806. Display shows: C:1–S:1 2) Enter cabinet number via dial keypad.(e.g., 1) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. C:1–S:1 3) Enter slot number via dial keypad.(e.g., 6) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. C:1–S:6 4) Dial 1 for YES to reset card or dial 0 for NO. OR C:1–S:6 Samsung Business Communications 8 DLIÆ8 DLI 8 DLIÆ8 DLI 16 DLIÆ16 DLI RESET CARD ? NO 2-271 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. 5) Dial 1 for YES to reset card or dial 0 for NO. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. 2-272 C:1–S:6 ARE YOU SURE?NO Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN [807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL Allows the system administrator to set phone volume levels. Phone Volume Level No Type FX No Type 0 KEY TONE VOL 0 LINE VOLUME 1 SIDETONE VOL 1 SPEAKER VOLUME 2 HANDSET TX 2 NOR.LP ATTEN 3 MIC TX LEVEL 3 MIC LP ATTEN 4 NOISE GUARD 4 ACOU DECOUPL 5 NOISE THRES 5 ELEC DECOUPL 6 ALC THRES 6 T/R RATIO 7 TX/RX THRES. 7 R/T RATIO 8 TX/RX COMP 9 MIN RX VOL(28D, 12L, 21D, ITP) When changing the MMC [807] ‘MMC [807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL’ should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor. Samsung Business Communications 2-273 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. DEFAULT DATA DEPENDS ON PHONE TYPE(SHOWN FOR 21D) 21D Type FX Default Type Default KEY TONE VOL 1 LINE VOLUME 3 SIDETONE VOL 1 SPEAKER VOLUME 14 HANDSET TX 4 NOR.LP ATTEN 4 MIC TX LEVEL 3 MIC LP ATTEN 5 NOISE GUARD 8 ACOU DECOUPL 8 NOISE THRES 1 ELEC DECOUPL 8 ALC THRES 7 T/R RATIO 2 TX/RX THRES. 3 R/T RATIO 2 TX/RX COMP 5 MIN RX VOL 6 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 807. Display shows: VOL.CONTROL:US24 2) Enter phone type via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. VOL.CONTROL:EU24 3) Enter volume item via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. VOL.CONTROL:EU24 4) Enter volume data via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3. VOL.CONTROL:EU24 KEY TONE VOL:1 KEY TONE VOL:1 SIDETONE VOL:1 HANDSET TX :6 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-274 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [810] HALT PROCESSING Used only in the event that all data processing needs to be stopped either in a single cabinet slot or in the entire system. DEFAULT DATA PROC ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 810. Display shows: HALT/PROCESSING 2) Enter cabinet selection via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. OR Select all cabinets and slots.(and go to step 4) HALT/PROCESSING C:ALL S:ALLÆPROC C:1 S:ALLÆPROC HALT/PROCESSING C:ALL S:ALLÆPROC 3) Enter slot number via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor. HALT/PROCESSING C:1 S:2ÆPROC 4) Enter 1 for HALT or 0 for PROC. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to enter and return to step 2. 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-275 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [811] RESET SYSTEM Provides a means of restarting the system. The system can simply be reset or it can be reset and all memory cleared to default values. Extreme care should be taken when using this MMC. If the system is restarted, all voice/data connections are dropped. If memory is cleared, all customer data is deleted and the system returns to defaulted status. No Type Description 0 RESET SYSTEM System reset only with MC card read. 1 CLEAR MEMORY System reset and make default system with MC card read. 2 FAST RESTART System reset only without MC card read. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 811. Display shows: SYSTEM RESTART 2) Enter reset type(0-2) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. SYSTEM RESTART 3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. SYSTEM RESTART 4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. SYSTEM RESTART RESET SYSTEM?NO CLEAR MEMORY?NO CLEAR MEMORY?YES ARE YOU SURE?YES 5) If clear memory, system will return with default time and date and default extension number. OR If system just restarted, it will return to normal programmed status. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-276 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [812] SET COUNTRY CODE Selects the country for correct system programming and operation. When changing the MMC [812] ‘MMC [812] SET COUNTRY CODE’ should not be used from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 812. Display shows: SELECT COUNTRY 2) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. SELECT COUNTRY 3) Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button. 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. DEFAULTING SYSTM Undefined RUSSIA/CIS ARE YOU SURE?NO RELATED ITEMS MMC 811 RESET SYSTEM Samsung Business Communications 2-277 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [813] HOTEL OPERATION Allows the installing technician to enable the HOTEL feature. DEFAULT DATA DISABLE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 813. Display shows: HOTEL OPERATION 2) Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. HOTEL OPERATION 3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. HOTEL OPERATION 4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button. HOTEL OPERATION DISABLE ENABLE CHANGE NOW ? NO ARE YOU SURE?YES 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS Hotel Related MMCs MMC 221 MMC 222 MMC 513 MMC 760 MMC 761 MMC 762 2-278 EXTENSION TYPE FAX PAIR HOTEL TIMER ITEM COST TABLE TAX RATE SETUP ROOM COST RATE Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY This enables the on-board customer database(SRAM) to be copied to the MC Database(MCDB) and also allows the MCDB database to be copied to the SRAM. A daily save can be programmed to automatically save the SRAM to the MCDB. This ensures that an up-to-date database is always available in case of a catastrophic failure. A daily save time of 00:00 means that no daily save is performed. It is recommended that the MCDB is cleared before the SRAM is copied to it. When the SRAM is copied to the MCDB there is no interruption in service. If the MCDB is copied to the SRAM, the system will reset to accept the new data. MCDB(Mc card database) Option Description S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm Indicates the time the database was saved to the MCDB. CLEAR MCDB Clear MCDB. COPY TO SRAM Copy MCDB to SRAM. SRAM(MCP on-board database) Option Description S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm Indicates the time the SRAM was last saved. COPY TO MCDB Copy SRAM to MCDB. DAILY SAVE hh:mm The time the SRAM will be saved to the MCDB. A MC Card of 256 MB A MC Card of 256 MB must be installed in order to copy the on board database(SRAM) on to the MC card (MCDB). DEFAULT DATA DAILY SAVE 00:00(no daily save) ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 815. Display shows: If MC card is in use, the display shows: CUST DBASE:MCDB S:12/01/01 00:00 CUST DBASE:MCDB MMC IS BUSY Samsung Business Communications 2-279 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 2) Press Right Soft button to move cursor. CUST DBASE:MCDB S:12/01/01 00:00 3) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. CUST DBASE:MCDB 4) Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button. CUST DBASE:MCDB 5) Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button. CUST DBASE:MCDB If you select YES, the display shows. CLEAR SMDB :NO CLEAR SMDB :YES ARE YOU SURE?NO CUST DBASE:MCDB Cleared.... 6) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. CUST DBASE:SYSDB 7) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. CUST DBASE:SYSDB 8) Input save time. OR Press Right Soft button to move cursor. CUST DBASE:SYSDB 9) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. CUST DBASE:SYSDB 10) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to make changes and return to step 9. DAILY SAVE:00:00 DAILY SAVE:00:00 DAILY SAVE:23:30 COPY TO SMDB:NO CUST DBASE:SYSDB ARE YOU SURE?:YES 11) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-280 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD Change the system version by downloading the new version stored on the MC card to the APP/SYS/DRV/WEB/RUT/MSP/CSP and TEPRI cards. Option Description APP To upgrade application (including MP and VM module) SYS Include all modules. (?) DRV To upgrade Driver, F/W (including SP, MGI, drivers) WEB To upgrade WEB UI RUT To upgrade Router module (limited in MP11) MSP To upgrade MSP driver CSP To upgrade CSP driver PR2 To upgrade TEPRI2 Package PRI To upgrade TEPRI/ TEPRIa Package DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 818. Display shows: PGM DOWNLOAD 2) Press Volume button to select program type and press Right Soft button to move cursor. PGM DOWNLOAD 3) Press Volume button to select YES and press Right Soft button to move cursor. SYSTEM PKG APP:ap10v014.pkg SYS:rd10v014.pkg DOWNLOAD NOW?YES 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-281 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [819] MC FILE CONTROL Displays the size(in bytes) of various system program files on the MC card. Files included in MC card are described below: File Name Startup.ini Description If user designates an MCP program in MMC 818, related data are saved in this file. This file is initially not included but is created when the above programs are selected at MMC 818. Ms10v508.pkg MSP driver program This program must be included in MC card to start the system. Cs10v101.pkg MSP driver program This program must be included in MC card to start the system. Ap10v014.pkg Appication program. MP and VM module is included in this package. Dr10v014.pkg This package includes SP, MGI and other drivers. Rd10v014.pkg RAMDISK program Ws10v014.pkg WEB UI program vm_l_use.tar/ VM prompt vm_l_uk.tar DEFAULT DATA NONE 2-282 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 819. Display shows: Startup.ini 2) Press Volume button to confirm program type Cs10v101.pkg sz:512 bytes sz:14418432 bytes 3) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-283 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID This MMC is used to assign the system link ID for PRI and VoIP networking. Up to 100 link IDs can be entered including SELF ID. In addition, each Link ID is associated with the IP address and IP address type of the MCP card for that system. Option Description LINK ID System ID for networking feature. SIGNAL G/W System IP address for VoIP networking. IP TYPE System IP address type for VoIP networking. SELF system IP address type determines ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’ in MMC 830. CONDITIONS ‘SELF’ represents self-node, and must be set to use the networking function. Items other than ‘SELF’ are used for station numbers and can be omitted. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 820. Display shows: SELF :LINK ID 2) Enter SELF link ID via dial keypad and press Right Soft button. SELF :LINK ID 3) Press Volume button to select other link ID and press Right Soft button to mover cursor. SYS01:LINK ID 4) Enter other link ID via dial keypad and press Right Soft button. SYS01:LINK ID 11 22 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 821 MMC 823 MMC 824 MMC 830 2-284 ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK ASSIGN NETWORK COS NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION ETHERNET PARAMETERS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK Assigns the Q-signalling PRI trunk for networking. It is assigned data on a per-TEPRI card basis. DEFAULT DATA NORMAL ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 821. Display shows: [701] Q-SIG TRK 2) Enter first trunk number of PRI card. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [701] Q-SIG TRK 3) Enter 0 for NORMAL, or 1 for Q-SIGNALLING. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor. [701] Q-SIG TRK NORMAL NORMAL Q-SIGNALLING 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-285 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [822] VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE Assigns the virtual extension port type. The virtual extension port types are followed: No Type Description 00 SLT Emulates SLI port 01 24 BTN SET 24 buttons phone 02 12 BTN SET 12 buttons phone 03 7 BTN SET 7 buttons phone 04 6 BTN SET 6 buttons phone 05 28 BTN SET 28 buttons phone 06 18 BTN SET 18 buttons phone 07 8 BTN SET 8 buttons phone 08 38 BTN SET 38 buttons phone 09 21 BTN SET 21 buttons phone 10 14 BTN SET 14 buttons phone 11 LARGE SET Large LCD phone 12 7 BTN LCD 7 buttons LCD phone 13 0 BTN LCD 0 button LCD phone 14 NONE not used DEFAULT DATA 3501-3522: SLT 3401-3440: 21 BTN SET 2-286 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 822. Display shows: [3501]PORT TYPE 2) Enter virtual extension number. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. OR Select all ports. [3501] PORT TYPE 3) Enter virtual extension type. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor. [3501] PORT TYPE SLT SLT [ALL] PORT TYPE SLT SLT 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-287 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS Assigns the class of service for networking. No Option Default Description 01 CALL OFFER Y Call Offer 04 CC SIG CONN Y CC Retention of Signal Connection 05 CC SVC RETN Y CC Service Retention 06 CCBS N Call Completion to Busy Subscriber 07 CCNR N Call Completion on No Reply 08 CFB Y Call Forward Busy 09 CFNR Y Call Forward No Reply 10 CFU Y Call Forward Unconditional 11 CI N Call Intrusion 12 CI CAPABIL 2 Intrusion Capability Level(1~3) 14 CI PROTECT 2 Intrusion Protection Level(0~3) 23 CONP LEVEL 3 CONP Level(0: none, 1: Alert, 2: Busy, 3: Both) 26 CT RE-ROUTE N Transfer By Rerouting 27 DND TONE N DND Announcement 28 DNDO Y Do Not Disturb Override 29 DNDO CAPABL 2 DNDO Capability Level(0~3) 30 DNDO PROTEC 2 DNDO Protection Level(1~3) 31 PAGE Y PAGE 32 PATH REPL. Y Path Replacement 33 PATH RETEN N Path Retention CONDITIONS NONE DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION 2-288 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 823. Display shows: NETWORK COS (01) 2) Dial the class of service number.(01-30) OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. NETWORK COS (02) 3) Dial the feature number. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. NETWORK COS (02) 4) Enter 0 for NO, or 1 for YES. OR Press Volume button to select YES or NO and Press Right Soft button to store data. NETWORK COS (01) 01:CALL OFFER :Y 01:CALL OFFER :Y 03:CC PATH RSV:Y 03:CC PATH RSV:N 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS Samsung Business Communications 2-289 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION Assigns the digit translation table used for networking. Generally, under networking conditions, you must dial the node ID and extension number to call the another node extension. In this MMC, the system provides a simple digit translation so that the user need only dial the extension number to call the station on the other node. The access digit needs to be programmed in MMC 724(‘NTWK LCR DIAL NO.’ option) first. The system allows 96 entries for network dial translation. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION 2-290 DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 824. Display shows: 01:601Æ 2) Dial the entry number. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 01:601Æ_ 3) Enter digit string for access to node(max. 8 digits) and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 01:601Æ60201 4) Enter number of digits user will dial.(e.g., 3 for 3digit extension) OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 01:601Æ60201 5) Enter max. number of digits system will dial. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 01:601Æ60201 6) Enter YES/NO to display other node extension in internal extension number format. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 01:601Æ60201 SIZE:0 MAX:00 SIZE:0 MAX:00 SIZE:0 MAX:00 SIZE:3 MAX:00 SIZE:3 MAX:08 DISP:N MBX:N Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 7) Enter YES/NO to assign Mailbox to remote extension automatically. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 01:601Æ60201 DISP:Y MBX:N 8) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 710 MMC 724 MMC 820 LCR DIGIT TABLE DIAL NUMBERING PLAN ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID Samsung Business Communications 2-291 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS Assigns the options used for networking. No 0 Option ADD NUMBER TO NAME Description Assign to include the extension number in the name field of Q-SIG standard message. 1 USE REMOTE VM Assign to use SVMi on remote system. 2 REMOTE VM NUMBER Assign to access number of remote SVMi when the Remote VM is used. 3 REMOTE CID NUMB Assign to use delete node number when CID number send to SVMi. 4 USE REMOTE ATTN Use Attendant on remote system.(RING 1-6, Y/N) 5 REMOTE ATTN NUMB Access number of remote Attendant when the remote Attendant is used.(RING 1-6) 6 SPNET DIGIT SEND Specify by which method dialled digits are sent across the network. DEFAULT DATA ADD NUMB TO NAME: YES USE REMOTE VM: NO REMOTE VM NUMBER: NONE REMOTE CID NUMB: YES USE REMOTE ATTN: NO REMOTE ATTN NUMB: NONE SPNET DIGIT SEND: MGI SIGNALLING 2-292 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 825. Display shows: ADD NUMB TO NAME 2) Dial the option number. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. USE REMOTE VM 3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO. OR Press Volume button to select YES/NO and press Right Soft button to mover cursor. USE REMOTE VM YES NO YES 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-293 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK The system clock may be synchronized with an external clock source from the TEPRI or BRI card, or it can use the internal clock source. This MMC can assign the system clock source priority when the external clock source is used. DEFAULT DATA PRIORITY 1: C1-S0 PRIORITY 2: C1-S1 PRIORITY 3: SELF ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 826. Display shows: REFERENCE CLOCK 2) Dial the priority number OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. REFERENCE CLOCK 3) Dial the priority data. OR Press Volume button to select and Press Right Soft button to store. REFERENCE CLOCK PRIORITY 1:C1-S0 PRIORITY 1:C1-S0 PRIORITY 1:C1-S0 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-294 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS This program sets the various parameters required for printing to a LAN-connected device. The data listed below can be printed. 01. 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. SMDR UCD REPORT TRAFFIC REPORT ALARM REPORT UCD VIEW PERIODIC UCD HOTEL REPORT PMS The items that are set in this program are: No Option 00 DATA TYPE - Type of data to be displayed 01 CURR STATUS OFF Current status of the LAN printer 02 EMPTY BUFF NO Prints all data left in the buffer 03 UPDATE LAN NO Applies modified values set in this MMC 04 DESTINATION OFF Data transmit destination(Off, Printer, PC, Both) 05 PRINTER IP 200.1.1.1 The IP address of the LAN printer 06 PRINTER TCP 10010 The TCP port of the printer 07 LAN TCP 10020 LAN TCP port 08 RETRY COUNT 03 Re-transmit attempt count(00~10) 09 RETRY WAIT 010 sec Wait time for re-transmit(005~250 sec) 10 PJL ENABLE FALSE Sets PJL(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE) 11 LANGUAGE RAW Printer language(0. RAW, 1. PCL, 2. PS) 12 PAPER SIZE A4 Paper size(0. A4, 1. LETTER) 13 FONT TYPE COURIER Font type(0.COURIER, 1.TIMES NEW ROMAN) 14 DUPLEX ENAB FALSE Sets duplex(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE) 15 ORIENTATION PORTRAIT Orientation(0. PORTRAIT, 1. LANDSCAPE) 16 PRINT TRAY DEFAULT Printer tray(0.Default, 1.Tray1, 2.Tray2, 3.Manual) 17 RESOLUTION 300 Resolution(0.300, 1.600) 18 LINE/PAGE 60 Lines per page Samsung Business Communications Default Description 2-295 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 829. Display shows: [01] DATA TYPE 2) Enter type of data to be printed. OR Press Volume button to select the type and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor. [02] DATA TYPE 3) Enter the item number. OR Press Volume button to select the item and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor. [02] PRINTER IP 4) Select the data. OR Press Volume to select the data and press Right Soft button to move the cursor. [02] PRINTER IP SMDR UCD REPORT 200. 1. 1. 1 168.219. 83.101 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-296 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol(IP) addressing of the MCP card. No Parameter Description 00 SYSTEM IP ADDR Specifies the IP address for the MCP card. 01 SYSTEM GATEWAY Specifies the designated gateway IP address used for contacting IP devices beyond the local network subnet. 02 SYSTEM NET MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask. This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP devices(subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of the MCP.(without having to go through the designated network IP gateway) 03 SYSTEM RESET Prompt to reset system MCP when system IP address is changed. This reset is same as FAST RESTART in MMC 811. 04 SYSTEM IP TYPE Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private network. 05 SYSTEM PUBLIC IP The MCP will originate communications to IP phones and VoIP connections outside the local network using this IP address. Communications to/from this IP will require involvement of the MGI card. The system identifies communications to/from this address as ‘public’. This allows devices, on remote networks/subnets, to establish communications with the system, without exposing the LAN. See ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’. 08 SYSTEM MAC ADDR For reference, and cannot be changed. The unique hardware (MAC) address of the MCP card. 12 PCMMC ADDRESS When the system wants to connect to PCMMC, it will be sent to this IP address for a connection message.(Reserved for future use.) 13 SM MANAGER IP Not used. 14 CTI SERVER ADDR IP address of CTI Server 17 NEWS ADDRESS IP address of News Server 18 MMS SERVER IP IP address of MMS Server 19 MMS WEB SERV IP IP address of MMS WEB Server Samsung Business Communications 2-297 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ETHERNET PARAMETERS - The first three parameters: SYSTEM IP ADDR, SYSTEM GATEWAY, and SYSTEM NET MASK are stored separately from the main system database and thus will not be defaulted when MMC811 ‘CLEAR MEMORY’ is performed. Furthermore, any changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MCP2 is reset. - When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each(octet) field. For example 192.168.1.10 should be entered as: 192 168 001 010. CONDITIONS y This MMC must be used if there are ITP phones and/or MGI cards on the system. y After changing Ethernet parameters, restart the system to apply the new settings. DEFAULT DATA SYSTEM IP ADDR: 165.213.97.185 SYSTEM GATEWAY: 165.213.97.1 SYSTEM NET MASK: 255.255.255.0 SYSTEM RESET: NO SYSTEM IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY SYSTEM PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1 SYSTEM MAC ADDR: CARD DEPENDENT PCMMC ADDRESS: 168.219.1.101 SM MANAGER IP: 0.0.0.0 CTI SERVER ADDR: 0.0.0.0 NEWS ADDR: 0.0.0.0 MMS SERVER IP: 0.0.0.0 MMS WEB SERV IP: 0.0.0.0 2-298 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 830. Display shows the system IP address. SYSTEM IP ADDR 2) Press Volume button to make selection and Press Right Soft button to move cursor. SYSTEM IP ADDR 3) Using the keypad, enter 3-digit IP numbers. (e.g., 192 168 001 010 for 192.168.1.10) Cursor will return to step 1 upon completion of IP address entry. SYSTEM IP ADDR 4) Press Volume button to make selection and Press Right Soft button to move cursor. SYSTEM GATEWAY 5) Using the keypad, enter 3-digit IP numbers. (e.g., 192 168 001 001 for 192.168.1.1) Cursor will return to this step on completion of system gateway entry. SYSTEM GATEWAY 6) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. SYSTEM RESTART 7) Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to store and move cursor. SYSTEM RESTART 165.213. 97.185 165.213. 97.185 192.168.001.010 165.213. 97. 1 192.168.001.001 ARE YOU SURE? NO ARE YOU SURE? NO 8) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-299 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [831] MGI PARAMETERS This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol(IP) addressing of the MGI card(s) in the system. No Parameter Description 0 IP ADDRESS Specifies the IP address for the MGI card. 1 GATEWAY Specifies the designated IP gateway address used for contacting IP devices beyond the local subnet. 2 SUB MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask. This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP devices(subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of the MGI.(without having to go through the designated network IP gateway) 3 IP TYPE Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private network. 4 PUBLIC IP The MGI will originate communications, to IP phones and VoIP connections outside the local network, using this IP address. If this IP address sets 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255 or default value then this MGI card uses private IP only. See System IP Type on MMC 830. 5 PUB PORT Public Port 6 VERSION No entry required. Used to indicate revision of MGI3 S/W. 8 CARD RESET Reboots MGI card. 9 IP VERSION Specidies MGI IP version is IPv4 / IPv6. MGI PARAMETERS - IP ADDRESS, GATEWAY, and SUB MASK—any changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MGI card is reset. - When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each (octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010. 2-300 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide CONDITIONS This MMC cannot be accessed unless there is an MGI card installed in the system. DEFAULT DATA IP ADDRESS: 1.1.1.1 GATEWAY: 1.1.1.1 SUB MASK: 255.255.255.0 IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1 PUB PORT: 00000 VERSION: V4 CARD RESET: NO IP VERSION: IPv4 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 831. Display shows the first MGI card. [3801] IP ADDRESS 2) Enter MGI number. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [3801] IP ADDRESS 3) Enter MGI parameter number. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [3801] IP ADDRESS 4) Enter MGI parameter. OR Press Right Soft button to move cursor. [3801] IP ADDRESS 168.219. 76.101 168.219. 76.101 168.219. 76.101 165. 10. 1.100 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-301 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [832] VoIP ACCESS CODE Provides a means to apply the Internet Protocol(IP) address to the VoIP gateway. This MMC also assigns the number of channels that can be used for IP faxes. TABLE(00~62): Outbound or Inbound table used for specific access codes. Usually when the MCP2 card is used as a VoIP gateway, the Outbound table is used. The Inbound table is used to determine the number of digits to receive before processing the call. Each table has 63 entries(00~62). No 0 Option ACCESS DGT Description This is the access code that is used once the VoIP gateway is accessed; this directs a call based on the routing tables used. An access code table then references an access code and correlates an IP address to the access code for routing. A maximum of eight digits are available. 1 DGT LENGTH This field requests the number of digits that are expected to be received to make up the whole access code. 2 DEL.LENGTH This is the number of digits to delete after receiving the access code. If no digits are deleted the access code will be sent as part of the call to the destination to continue routing. 3 INSERT DGT Digit(s) to insert for routing at the destination. This can be used when different numbering plans exist or if a dial 9 access is to be inserted in the dialled digits. 4 IP TABLE 1 This is the first table referenced for routing the access code to an IP address. The system has 64 IP tables(00~63) with 16 entries(00~15) in each table. See MMC 833. 6 IP START This entry indicates where in a table to start looking for an IP code to associate with the access code. This can be used to manage where to start looking for an IP address in high traffic VoIP gateway applications. For example: If IP address routing to the desired destination is known to be in the last seven entries of a table, the IP START location would be 8. IP address searching would start at entry 8. 7 SERVER USE This parameter determines whether a H.323 Gatekeeper will be utilized to establish this connection. 2-302 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide DEFAULT DATA ACCESS DGT: 00~09(digits 0~9), 10~62 NONE DGT LENGTH: 1 DEL.LENGTH: 1 INSERT DGT: NONE IP TABLE 1: 00 IP START: NONE SERVER USE: NO ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 832. Display shows the outbound and first access code. (O:00)ACCESS DGT 2) Enter 0 for O(outbound) or 1 for I(inbound) code table. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (O:00)ACCESS DGT 3) Enter access code table number(00-62) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (O:01)ACCESS DGT 4) Enter access code item(0-6) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (O:01)ACCESS DGT 5) Enter access code data via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor. (O:01)ACCESS DGT 0 0 1 1 840 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 833 MMC 834 MMC 836 MMC 837 VOIP IP TABLE H.323 OPTIONS H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS SIP OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2-303 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [833] VoIP IP TABLE This MMC provides the IP addresses in tables pointed to by the VoIP code entry(MMC 832). There are 63 tables with up to 16 entries each. The destination IP address is required to route dialled digits based on the access code and digits dialled. The IP entry field is divided into 4 sections allowing modification of separate IP address fields. When changing IP When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010 DEFAULT DATA TB(00) ENTRY(00): MMC 830 SYSTEM IP ADDR ALL OTHERS: EMPTY ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 833. Display shows the first table number. TB(00) ENTRY (00) 2) Enter table number(00-62) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. TB(00) ENTRY (00) 3) Enter entry number(00-15) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. TB(00) ENTRY (00) 4) Enter IP address via dial keypad. Cursor will be return step 3. TB(00) ENTRY (00) 0. 0. 0. 0 0. 0. 0. 0 0. 0. 0. 0 165.213. 87.110 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC entry. RELATED ITEMS MMC 830 MMC 832 MMC 834 MMC 837 MMC 838 2-304 ETHERNET PARAMETERS VOIP ACCESS CODE H.323 OPTIONS SIP OPTIONS PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [834] H.323 OPTIONS This MMC provides various VoIP support options. The options set in this MMC apply system wide. No Parameter 00 GATEWAY CALL ID 01 H.323 FAST SETUP Description Default Numeric identifier for system(up to 12 digits) 1234 Enables or disables the H.323 Fast Start call setup ENABLE method. 02 CALLER ID TYPE This option controls the calling party identification ANI type. There are 3 possible selections: 0 GWID: shows the gateway call ID. 1 ANI: shows the calling station number 2 IP: shows the calling H.323 gateway IP address. 06 TUNNELING Enables or disables the need for additional chan- ENABLE nels using H.245 signalling. Tunneling allows use of the H.245 signal channel with the Q.931 channel. 07 DEFAULT DIL NO This allows programming of the default direct-in- 500 line number when digits are missing or incorrect on an inbound call. 11 CODEC AUTO NEGO Enables or disables Auto CODEC Negotiation ON when the MGI is used as an H.323 gateway. 14 SIGNAL PORT Indicate the port number for H.323 signalling and 10000 sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The common and default IP path or port used is 10000. 17 SEND CLIP TABLE Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC 323), which 1 provides calling party identification when using the MGI as a H.323 gateway. This provides station ID of the calling station. A single-digit value corresponding with the desired table in MMC 323 should be entered here. This is only used when MMC 405 value is null. 18 INCOMING MODE This option selects how incoming calls are routed when the MGI is used as a H.323 gateway. 0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC 406 1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC 714 2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC 724 FOLLOW DID TRANS 19 ALLOW GW CHECK When using a gatekeeper, this permits the H.323 gateway to check for gatekeeper presence. DISABLE 20 CLIR WITH NUMBER When this option is enabled, the CLIP number is sent to the network even if the CLIP restriction flag is set. DISABLE 21 USE OVERLAP DIAL Enables use of overlap dialing. ENBLOC Samsung Business Communications 2-305 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 834. Display shows the first option. GATEWAY CALL ID 2) Enter H.323 option number(00-20) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. H.323 FAST SETUP 3) Enter H.323 option data via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. H.323 FAST SETUP 1234 DISABLE ENABLE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-306 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [835] MGI DSP OPTIONS This MMC provides various MGI DSP options. No 00 Parameter CODEC-FRAME Description Default Selects which audio CODEC compression will be used G.729A – and the transmission interval time of VoIP packets gen- 20 Ms erated by the MGI card. MGI3 card supports G.729A(8 K), G.729(8 K), G.711(64 K), and G.723.1(5.3~6.4K). 01 ECHO CANCEL Enables or disables echo cancellation. This function ENABLE removes the echo that is generated by voice reflection and packet delay. 02 SILENCE SUP This parameter determines whether silence suppression DISABLE is used. This prevents transmission during the silence period of a call, and conserves bandwidth when enabled. 03 IN FILTER This option selects input filtering of the DSP. This should ENABLE always be set to ENABLE. 04 OUT FILTER This option selects output filtering of the DSP. This ENABLE should always be set to ENABLE. 05 INPUT GAIN PCM input gain value of DSP. The range is- 32 31 dB~32 dB(0~63). This set the quality of PCM voice from the VoIP DSP to the site. Default is 32(0 dB). 06 VOICE VOL This value selects the voice volume. The range is- 32(0 dB). 31 dB~31 dB(0~63). 08 JITTER OPT This is a scale value that introduces a intentional 4 buffer(delay) of the transmission of VoIP packets generated by the MGI card. This value determines whether the focus is on packet loss or packet delay. The range is 00~12. 09 MIN JITTER Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter 30 ms adjustment. The range is 010~300 ms 10 MAX JITTER Decides the maximum time to consider delay for jitter 150 ms adjustment. The range is 010-300 ms. 11 FAX ECM This option selects retry of Fax-over-IP if errors are de- ENABLE tected. 12 MAX FAX CNT This is the maximum number of channels that can be 2 simultaneously used for Fax-over-IP. The range is 00~16. Samsung Business Communications 2-307 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) No 13 Parameter DTMF TYPE Description Default There are two types of DTMF transmission: INBAND, OUTBAND which is industry standard(H.245) type DTMF transport, and OUTBAND which is a Samsung proprietary method. 14 TOS FIELD An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external All bits 0 routers, switches, etc,(that optionally support TOS-bit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of data packets generated by the MGI card. This value can be left at the default value(00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management. 15 FAX RETRY This option selects retry count of Fax-over-IP if errors 3 are detected. The range is 0~4(0 means no retry). 16 RTP CHK TM This option selects the interval time for sending RTCP. 5 SEC 17 USE T38 711 If use T38 FAX, specifies 711 Codec use Enable 18 802.1 VLAN Set value (0000~4095) 0000 19 802.1 PRIOR Set value (0~7) 0 20 802.1Q Enable or disable for 802.1Q DISABLE (including 802.1 VLAN and 802.1 PRIOR) 21 EC GAIN Set EC gain value (18~38) 32 22 NLP Set NLP value (0~2) 0 23 EC TAIL LEN Set EC TAIL LEN (8~128) 064 MS 24 JIT PEROID Set JITTER PERIOD (1~10) 01 25 JIT DEL TM Set JITTER DELETE TIME (0~500) 250 DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION 2-308 DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 835. Display shows the first option. MGI3:CODEC-FRAME 2) Enter MGI type(0-2) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. MGI3:CODEC-FRAME 3) Enter MGI DSP parameter via dial keypad. OR MGI3:CODEC-FRAME G.729A –40 MS G.729A –40 MS G.729A –40 MS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 4) Enter MGI DSP parameter. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3. MGI3:CODEC-FRAME G.729A –20 MS 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS Samsung Business Communications 2-309 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [836] H.323 GK OPTIONS Provides a means to set the H.323 gatekeeper parameters for an optional, external industrystandard H.323 network gatekeeper, using Registration, Admissions and Status signalling (RAS). The settings apply system wide. When changing IP When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010 No 00 Parameter GK CONNECTION Description Default This enables the H.323 call to connect to a gate- DISABLE keeper. 01 GK ROUTING This enables routing of calls through a gatekeeper. DISABLE 02 GK IP ADDRESS This is the gatekeeper’s IP address. 0.0.0.0 03 GK NAME This is the alphanumeric identifier of the gate- ‘Gatekeeper’ keeper.(Up to 16 characters.) 04 ALTER GK IP ADDR 05 H.323 GATEWAY ID This provides an alternate gatekeeper address. 0.0.0.0 This is the H.323 identifier used by the MGI when ‘OfficeServ’ registering with the gatekeeper.(Up to 32 characters.) 06 E.164 GATEWAY This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk NO when registering with the gatekeeper.(Up to 16 1234 digits long.) 07 GK KEEP ALIVE This is the timer that the MGI uses to acknowledge 0 SEC the presence of the gatekeeper. The range is 000~999 seconds. 08 GK DOWN ROUTE This provides an alternate route if the primary gate- PSTN keeper is down. Selections are PSTN or ALTER GK. 09 GK RAS TYPE Select if AUTO or MANUAL, depending on your AUTO gatekeeper’s capabilities. 10 12 URQ REASON Select ON or OFF for use of Un-register Request MODE RAS(URQ) messages. RRQ FAIL TIME Programs the time frame to re-send Registration ON 30 seconds Request RAS(RRQ) messages to a gatekeeper. The range is 1~99. 2-310 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide No 13 Parameter Description GRQ SEND Default Select ON or OFF for use of Gatekeeper RAS Re- OFF quest(GRQ) messages. 14 USE MULTI E.164 When this option is set to ENABLE, the E.164 identi- DISABLE fier can be assigned. 15 E.164 LISTS This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk NONE when registering with the gatekeeper. There is a maximum 32 E.164 identifier lists with a digit string length of 16 digits. 16 GK REGISTERED Display the status of registration to the Gatekeeper. NO DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 836. Display shows the first available option. GK CONNECTION 2) Enter H.323 GK option via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. GK ROUTING 3) Enter H.323 GK option data. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return step 3. GK ROUTING DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2-311 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [837] SIP OPTIONS This MMC permits the adjustments of optional Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) trunk parameters. The MCP supports SIP and H.323 on a per-call-per-port basis. The settings are system wide. When changing IP When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010 No 00 Parameter GATEWAY Description Default Numeric system identifier(up to 12 digits) ‘1234’ CALLER ID This option controls the calling party identification type. ANI TYPE There are 3 possible selections: CALL ID 01 0 GWID: shows the gateway call ID. 1 ANI: shows the calling station number.(default) 2 IP: shows the calling H.323 gateway IP address. 05 DEFAULT DIL This allows programming of the default direct-in-line NO number when digits are missing or incorrect on an in- 5000 bound call. 06 UDP PORT: Sets the UDP port used on a SIP trunk call. 5060 Sets the UDP port used on a SIP phone call. 5070 RE-TRANS. The initial re-transmission time if there is no answer, 500 ms T1 TIME based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is TRUNK 07 UDP PORT: PHONE 09 0~9900 ms. 10 RE-TRANS. The maximum re-transmission time if there is no answer, T2 TIME based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is 4000 ms 0~9900 ms. 11 RE-TRANS. The time the User Agent Server waits after receiving the T4 TIME ACK message. Based on the RFC2543 specification. The 5000 ms range is 0~9900 ms. 12 GENERAL The server retransmits the response for this length of RING TM time until the requested retransmission is received. For 5000 ms example, the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO. The range is 0~99900 ms. 13 INVITE LING After the client sends ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the TM client cannot confirm if the server received the ACK message. 5000 ms The client waits for this length of time after sending ACK for the Final Response. The range is 0~99900 ms. 2-312 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No Parameter Description 14 PROVISIONAL After receiving the Provision Response, the User Agent TIME waits for this length of time until Timeout ends. The range Default 180000 m is 0~999900 ms. 15 INV.NO RESP Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User TIME Agent waits for this length of time. The range is 5000 ms 0~99900 ms. 16 GEN.NO Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User RESP TIME Agent waits for this length of time. The range is 5000 ms 0~99900 ms. 17 REQ.RETRY After sending General Request, the User Agent waits for TIME the Final Response for this length of time. The range is 5000 ms 0~99900 ms. 18 20 SIP SERVER Sets ENABLE or DISABLE to use an optional, external ENABLE industry-standard SIP Server. DISABLE SIP SERVER Sets SIP server IP address. 0.0.0.0. Sets the port to use on the SIP Server. 5060 Indicates the port number for SIP signalling and sets a 10000 IP 28 SIP SERVER PORT 29 SIGNAL PORT range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The common and default IP path or port used is 10000. 32 SEND CLIP Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC 323), which pro- TABLE vides calling party identification when using the MGI as a 1 SIP gateway. This provides station ID of the calling station. A singledigit value corresponding to the desired table in MMC 323 should be entered here. This is only used when MMC 405 value is null. 33 INCOMING This option selects how incoming calls are routed when FOLLOW DID MODE the MGI is used as a SIP gateway. TRANS 0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC 406 1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC 714(default) 2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC 724 34 35 ALLOW GW When using a gatekeeper, this permits the SIP gateway DISABLE CHECK to check for gatekeeper presence. REGIST T-GW System number when registering as a trunking gateway. 4100 4200 NUM 36 37 REGIST S-GW System number when registering as a gateway for sta- NUM tions. CLIR WITH When this option is enabled, the CLIP number is sent to the network even if the CLIP restriction flag is set. NUMBER Samsung Business Communications DISABLE 2-313 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) No 38 Parameter SIP Description Default Display the status of registration to the SIP Server. NO When using SIP Server, if this option is ENABLE, then DISABLE REGISTERED 39 GW SERVICE register by user and if DISABLE then register by system number. 40 GW DOMAIN Domain name for authorization when using SIP Server NAME 41 42 GW USER ID User ID for authorization when using SIP Server REGISTER This password must be used to register SIP Server - This tims value is expire time. 000000 SEC SESSION Settion Timer Value can be set. NONE TIMER (0:NONE, 1:UPDATE, 2:REINVITE) SERVER SIP server vender value can be set. VENDOR (0:IETF, 1:IMS, 2:BroadWorks, 3:Xener, 4:Telcoware, PSWD 43 REG EXPIRE TIME 44 45 0 5:SEC-IMS) 46 LINK TEST This value is for Link test between Proxy Server and Of- NONE ficeServ system. (0:NONE, 1:OPTIONS) DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION 2-314 DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 834. Display shows the first option. GATEWAY CALL ID 2) Enter SIP option number 00-38(e.g., 01) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. CALLER ID TYPE 3) Enter SIP option data via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. CALLER ID TYPE 1234 ANI IP Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 323 MMC 405 MMC 306 MMC 714 MMC 724 MMC 832 MMC 834 CALLING PARTY NUMBER TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION DIAL NUMBERING PLAN VOIP ACCESS CODE H.323 OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2-315 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [839] SIP USER This MMC is used to register sip user and password. DEFAULT DATA ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 839. Display shows the first table number. REG-01 : USER NUM 2) press Right Soft button to move cursor. REG-01 : USER NUM 3) Enter registration number(01-100) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. REG-01 : USER NUM 4) Enter table number(0,1) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. REG-01 : USER NUM 5) Enter user number or password via dial keypad. OR press Right Soft button to save REG-01 : USER NUM - 6) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC entry. RELATED ITEMS MMC 837 2-316 SIP OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES This MMC is used to select which SYSTEM IP Address(PRIVATE or PUBLIC) is used to connect other devices via an H.323 or SIP trunk. The device that use the PRIVATE IP Address assigned in this MMC, the PRIVATE SYSTEM IP Address will be used to connect the device. When changing IP When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010 DEFAULT DATA TABLE(80): 165.213.255.255 ALL OTHERS: 0.0.0.0 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 838. Display shows the first table number. PRIVATE IP (01) 2) Enter table number(01-80) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. PRIVATE IP (01) 3) Enter IP address via dial keypad. Cursor will return to step 3. PRIVATE IP (01) 0. 0. 0. 0 0. 0. 0. 0 165.213. 87.110 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC entry. RELATED ITEMS MMC 830 MMC 832 MMC 834 MMC 837 ETHERNET PARAMETERS VOIP ACCESS CODE H.323 OPTIONS SIP OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications 2-317 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [840] IP PHONE INFORMATION This MMC provides a means to register IP phones with the OfficeServ 7100 system. During registration, the IP and MAC addresses are also registered. The User ID and Password must match the table entry in this MMC for the IP phone to be registered. The system default phone numbers are 3201~3299 and default User IDs match the default station numbers. The system default password is 1234. IP phones must be individually programmed with a User ID and Password in order to register with the system. No 00 Option USER ID Description Default This is the ID the IP phone must match to register First 99 IP phones with the OfficeServ 7100 system.(alphanumeric) are 3201~3299, others are EMPTY. 01 USER PSWD This is the password the IP phone must have to reg- ‘1234’ ister with the OfficeServ 7100 system. (alphanumeric) 02 IP ADDR This is the IP address of the IP phone when regis- 0.0.0.0. tered with the system.(Read only) 03 MAC ADDR This is MAC address of the IP phone when regis- FFFFFFFFFFFF tered with the system.(Read only) 04 SIG PORT This is the IP UDP port of the IP phone when regis- 6000 tered with the system.(Read only) This information will be needed when traversing NAT routers, firewalls, etc. 05 VOICE PORT This is the IP RTP port of the IP phone when regis- 9000 tered with the system.(Read only) This information will be needed when traversing NAT routers, firewalls, etc. 06 IP TYPE This is the type of IP network used: PRIVATE or PRIVATE PUBLIC. 07 DSP TYPE This selects which CODEC this phone’s DSP will use. G.729A G.729A(low bandwidth) or G.711(high bandwidth). This data uses IP phone to IP phone connection only; others follow MGI CODEC type. 08 PHONE TYPE This is the type of IP phone used, SAMSUNG or SIP SAMSUNG (future). Use SAMSUNG. 09 REGIST CLR This is used to clear the registration of a particular NO IP phone. This is similar to unplugging and plugging in the phone and is useful for maintenance. 10 FRAME This value determines the transmission interval time COUNT of VoIP packets generated by the IP phone. This 20 ms data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA only. The range is 10~40 ms. 2-318 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No 11 Option JITTER BUF Description Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter Default 20 m adjustment. This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA only. The range is 10~90 ms. 12 TOS FIELD An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external All bits 0 routers, switches, etc,(that optionally support TOSbit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of data packets generated by the IP phone. This value can be left at the default value(00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management. This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA only. 13 S/W VERSION 14 S/W UPGRADE Display IP phone software version.(Read only) - This is used as IP phone software upgrade request - command. When YES is selected and Right Soft button is pressed, the system requests IP phone software upgrade with TFTP IP address. 15 TIME ZONE Allows remote IP phones to display own time zone. 00.00 16 PUBLIC TO When this option is set to USE MGI, the MGI can be NOT USE MGI PUBLIC allocated between remote IPs in the same private zone. 17 SIG TYPE This option can change UDP/TCP signal type for UDP IPs.(ITP V3.xx only supports the TCP signal type. If TCP is set and ITP V2.xx attempts to connect, the TCP signal type will change from TCP to UDP automatically.) 18 PRIVATE IP Displays private IP address of remote IP phone allo- - cated by phone’s router. 19 VIDEO DSP This option is codec value o f Video IP phone H.263 (0 : MPEG4, 1 : H.263) 20 VIDEO SIZE This option is for video size CIF (0 : CIF, 2 : QCIF) DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION Samsung Business Communications 2-319 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 840. Display shows: [3201]USER ID 2) Enter IP phone number via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [3210]USER ID 3) Enter IP phone option number via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. [3210]DSP TYPE 4) Enter option data via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3. [3210]DSP TYPE 3201 3210 G.729A G.711 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 615 MMC 616 MMC 830 MMC 831 MMC 835 MMC 841 2-320 MGI GROUP MGI USER ETHERNET PARAMETERS MGI PARAMETERS MGI DSP OPTIONS SYSTEM IP OPTIONS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS This MMC provides various proprietary Samsung VoIP and IP integration options. The options set in this MMC apply system wide. No 00 Option PHONE VERSION Description Sets running IP-based phone and new phone soft- Default 0000 ware version with the system. 0 LARGE DGP: Large LCD phone 1 LARGE ITP: Large LCD IP-based phone 2 2LINE ITP2: 2-line LCD IP-based phone 3 WIPM APPL: Wireless IP-based mobile phone software. 4 SOFT PC: IP phone emulation on PC (SoftPhone application) 5 SOFT PDA: IP phone emulation on PDA (SoftPhone application) 8 WIPM BOOT: Wireless IP-based mobile phone boot program. 9 SOFT MENU: Soft menu version 01 PHONE TFTP IP Sets phone software upgrade TFTP server IP ad- 0.0.0.0 dress. 02 ITP REGISTRATION Defines the method that IP-based phones use to register with the system. 0 TYPE: a) SYS PSWD SYS PSWD: System will authenticate the IP-based phones with the value in ITP REGISTRATION: PSWD parameter(see 1, below). B) PHONE PSWD: System will authenticate the IP-based phones according to entries made in MMC 840. c) DISABLE: System will not authenticate IP-based phones. 1 PSWD: This is a system-wide password used ‘1234’ for registration of IP phones. 03 EASYSET OPTION Sets EasySet link via LAN option with the system. 0 PSWD: This is a system-wide password used ‘1234’ for authentication of EasySet server. 1 ALIVE: This is an EasySet link via LAN alive 0 SEC check timer. Samsung Business Communications 2-321 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) No 04 Option CTI LINK OPTION Description Default Sets CTI link via LAN option with the system. 0 SMDR REPORT: Sets YES or NO for SMDR data NO to CTI link via LAN. 1 UCD REPORT: Sets YES or NO for UCD data to NO CTI link via LAN. 2 ALIVE: This is a CTI link via LAN alive check 300 SEC timer. If this is set to 0, the system will not check link alive. 05 ITP DSP PARA Sets IP phone DSP parameter system wide. 0 M-FRAME: This value determines the trans- 10 ms mission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the IP phone. This data uses DOWN = SYS DATA only(see 3, below). The range is 10~40 ms. 1 JITTER: Decides the minimum time to consider 20 ms delay for jitter adjustment. This data uses DOWN = SYS DATA only(see 3, below). The range is 10~90 ms. 2 TOS: An 8-bit binary value that will be used by All bits 0 external routers, switches, etc,(that optionally support TOS-bit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of data packets generated by the IP phone. This value can be left at the default value(00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management. This data uses DOWN = SYSTEM DATA only(see 3, below). 3 DOWN: Determines whether system-wide data SYS DATA or individual phone data is used for DSP control of IP-based phones. a) SYSTEM DATA: System-wide data will be used.(MMC 841) b) PHONE DATA: Individual phone data will be used.(MMC 840) 06 07 2-322 ITP TX GAIN/HSET ITP RX GAIN/HSET Sets IP-based phone Handset TX gain value of Depends on each level. country Sets IP-based phone Handset RX gain value of Depends on each level. country Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No 08 Option ITP TX GAIN/MIC Description Sets IP-based phone MIC gain value of each level. Default Depends on country 09 10 ITP RX GAIN/SPKR Sets IP-based phone SPKR gain value of each Depends on level. country ITP VERS Sets IP-based phone software upgrade option with UPGRADE the system. 0 TYPE: a) MMC COMMAND: IP-based phone soft- MMC COMMAND ware upgraded manually in MMC 840. b) PHONE CON: IP-based phone software upgraded automatically when phone connected. c) AUTO TIME: IP-based phone software upgraded automatically at set time. 1 START(HHMM): IP-based phone software 0000(Disable) automatic upgrade start time. 2 INTERVAL: IP-based phone software automatic 10 seconds. upgrade interval time. 11 MGI ALIVE PERIOD Set the time interval of checking the link connec- - tion of MGI card and the system. 13 LICENSE KEY Insert the license key to enable SoftPhone connec- NONE tion. 14 LICENSE STATUS The status(Valid or Invalid) of the inserted license - key. 15 DATA CARD IPC Set the value(YES or NO) to support IPC by DATA YES CARD 16 MP MGI/VM KEY Insert the license key to enable MGI, VM ports - 17 MP MGI/VM STATUS The status of the inserted MP MGI/VM license key. - 1. MGI ALLOW (0~8) 2. VMS ALLOW (0~4) DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION Samsung Business Communications 2-323 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 841. Display shows the first available option. PHONE VERSION 2) Enter option category number 0-13 via dial Keypad.(e.g., 2) OR Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. ITP REGISTRATION 3) Enter option number via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. ITP REGISTRATION 4) Enter option data. OR Press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3. ITP REGISTRATION LARGE DGP: 0000 TYPE: SYS PSWD PSWD: 1234 PSWD: 8228 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 199 MMC 840 2-324 SHOW LICENSE STATUS IP PHONE INFORMATION Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [845] WLAN PARAMETERS This MMC modifies the WLAN parameters. The SYSTEM KEY is used internally to distinguish between systems when registering a terminal. The default value is ‘00000’, but this must be changed to another value to enable the use of WLAN terminals. In addition, the SYSTEM KEY serves as an identification ID when a WLAN terminal connects to the WBS24. The default value of the SYSTEM ID, ‘WBS24’, must also be changed to another value in order to use multiple systems in one area. The DNS setting for WLAN is additionally described in this MMC. Set the network configuration for WBS24 by setting the IP assignment, Netmask and Gateway. These settings should be compatible with the Intranet since the network configuration setting is essential for data service. In addition, the RF frequency for WBS24 should be selected. Currently up to 14 frequencies may be selected. Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) variables used for the WBS24(Basic) can be defined. WLAN PARAMETER No Parameter 05 CODEC LIST Description Default CODEC that can be used for VoIP calls between CODEC 1: G.729 WBS24 and terminal. G.711u, G.711a, G.726, and CODEC 2: NONE G.729 can all be assigned. CODEC 3: NONE CODEC 4: NONE 06 RF CHANNEL Set a RF CHANNEL value that can be used by USE CH 1: 01 WBS. USE CH 2: 06 USE CH 3: 11 USE CH 4: 00 USE CH 5: 00 USE CH 6: 00 Samsung Business Communications 2-325 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) No Parameter Description Default 07 VERSION WLAN module version. Version 20 MAX AP CH. Set the maximum channel number of AP 00 21 WLAN SWTCH Support WLAN switch function DISABLE SIP PARAMETER No 0 Parameter RE-TRANS T1 Description Default(ms) When using an unreliable transmission protocol such 500 as UDP, retransmission is required when no reply is received. RE-TRANS.T1 TIME is the initial retransmission interval defined in RFC2543. 1 RE-TRANS T2 Maximum retransmission interval defined in RFC 4000 2543 2 RE-TRANS T4 RFC 2543 defines this parameter for various pur- 5000 poses. For example, this parameter can be used as the time waited by User Agent Server after receiving ACK message in an unreliable transmission protocol. 3 GEN RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the 6000 server cannot be sure if the client has received the last reply. Thus, the server must retransmit the reply for this length of time until it receives the requested retransmission. For example, this parameter can be used as the waiting time after sending 200 OK for INFO. 4 INV RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the 1000 client cannot verify if the server has received the ACK returned to the server for the INVITE Final Response. The client waits for this length of time after sending the ACK for the Final Response. 5 GEN NO RESP Waiting time before cancelling SIP related Request. 5000 6 INV NO RESP Waiting time before cancelling SIP INVITE Request. 6000 7 REQ Waiting time for receiving final response for SIP re- 5000 RETRY lated Request. PROVISIONAL On receiving Provision Response, the User Agent 8 180000 must wait for this length of time until Timeout. DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION 2-326 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 845. WLAN: SYSTEM ID WBS24 2) When the cursor is on WLAN, press Volume button and select WLAN, WBS, or SIP. WLAN: SYSTEM ID 3) Press Right Soft button to move to the SYSTEM ID. When the cursor is below SYSTEM ID, press Volume button to select the setting menu for WLAN. WLAN: SYSTEM ID WBS24 WBS24 4) Set the items below at the WLAN menu. SYSTEM ID: Use the Soft button to move the cursor and enter the new WLAN SYSTEM ID to register. WLAN: SYSTEM ID WBS24 Press Soft button and proceed to next register status. Register the SYSTEM KEY. WLAN: SYSTEM KEY 00000 Register the 1st DNS server IP. WLAN: 1ST DNS IP 0. 0. 0. 0 Register the 2nd DNS server IP. WLAN: 2ND DNS IP 0. 0. 0. 0 Register the 2nd WBS IP. WLAN: 2ND WBS IP 0. 0. 0. 0 Select the voice codec. Select from G711a, G711u, and G729 CODEC. Numbers are given from 1 to 4 based on priority. WLAN: CODEC LIST Select the usable RF channel. Maximum six channels can be used for a system. (Default RF channel: 1, 6, 11) WLAN: RF CHANNEL Used to change the TX POWER of all WBS. (Default: LEVEL 1~4) WLAN: WBS TX PWR Used to clear registration information of all WBS. WLAN: CLR WBSREG CODEC 1: G.711a USE CH 1: 01 DEFAULT ARE YOU SURE?NO Samsung Business Communications 2-327 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 5) Set the items below at the WBS24 menu. The selected WBS is as set in MMC 849(SELECT AP TYPE option) i.e. CWBS=COMBO WBS, BWBS=BASIC WBS. Register the WBS24 IP ADDRESS. CWBS1: IP ADDR 0. 0. 0. 0 Register the WBS24 NET MASK. CWBS1: NET MASK 255.255.255. 0 Register the WBS24 GATEWAY. CWBS1: GATEWAY 0. 0. 0. 0 Displays the WBS24 MAC ADDRESS. CWBS1 : MAC ADDR FFFF FFFF FFFF Displays the WBS24 VERSION. CWBS1 : VERSION Displays the WBS24 STATUS. CWBS1 : STATUS OFF Register the WBS24 RF CHANNEL.(The WBS RF channel must be selected from the pre-assigned RF channels in WLAN RF CHANNELS). CWBS1 : RF CHAN Register the WBS24 TX POWER. (Default: LEVEL 1~4) CWBS1 : TX POWER Used to clear the WBS parameter. CWBS1 : PARA CLR USE CH 1:01 DEFAULT ARE YOU SURE?NO 6) Set the items below at the menu. Register the RE-TRANS T1. The initial re-transmission time if no answer, based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is 0-9900 ms.(Default: 500 ms) Register the RE-TRANS T2. The maximum re-transmission time if no answer, based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is 0-9900 ms.(Default: 4000 ms) 2-328 SIP : RE-TRANS T1 000500MS SIP : RE-TRANS T2 004000MS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Register the RE-TRANS T4. The time the User Agent Server waits after receiving the ACK message. Based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is 0-9900 ms.(Default: 5000 ms) SIP : RE-TRANS T4 Register the GEN RING TM. The server retransmits the response for this length of time until the requested retransmission is received. For example, the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO. The range is 0-99900 ms.(Default: 6000 ms) SIP : GEN RING TM Register the INV RING TM. After the client sends ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the client can not confirm if the server received the ACK message. The client waits this long after sending ACK for the Final Response. The range is 0-99900 ms.(Default: 1000 ms) SIP : INV RING TM Register the GEN NO RESP. Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User Agent waits this long. The range is 0-99900 ms.(Default: 5000 ms) SIP : GEN NO RESP Register the INV NO RESP. Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User Agent waits this long. The range is 0-99900 ms.(Default: 5000 ms) SIP : INV NO RESP Register the REQ RETRY. After sending General Request, he User Agent waits for the Final Response for this length of time. The range is 0-99900 ms Default is 5000 ms SIP : REQ RETRY Register the PROVISIONAL. After receiving the Provision Response, the User Agent waits this long until Timeout ends. The range is 0-999900 ms.(Default: 180000 ms) SIP : PROVISIONAL 005000MS 006000MS 001000MS 005000MS 006000MS 005000MS 180000MS RELATED ITEMS MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION Samsung Business Communications 2-329 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [846] WIP INFORMATION This MMC sets up the WIP-5000M wireless terminal information. No Parameter Description Default 00 REGISTERED Shows if the terminal is registered. NO 01 LOCATED Shows if the terminal is connected to the system. DETACH 02 PHONE TYPE Shows the type of the terminal. NONE 03 WLI NUMBER Number of WLI connected to the WBS24 servic- - ing the terminal 04 WBS NUMBE Number of WBS24 servicing the terminal - 05 IP OFFSET Location of IP pool of the terminal IP - 06 IP ADDRESS Terminal IP address 0.0.0.0 07 MAC ADDR Terminal MAC address 0000 0000 0000 08 USER ID User ID per terminal 1212 09 PASSWORD Password of terminal user 0000 10 INSERT DGT If five or more numbers are entered into the WIP - terminal, this INSERT DGT is prefixed to the numbers, provided the entered numbers do not start with a C.O. number, C.O. group number, LCR, network LCR, or function code. DEFAULT DATA SEE DESCRIPTION ACTION 1) Press Transfer button and enter 846. DISPLAY [3301] REGISTERED NO 2) Dial the WIP number. OR Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor. 3) Set the items below at the menu. Confirm the status of terminal registration for each phone number. 2-330 [3301] REGISTERED NO [3301] REGISTERED NO Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide Displays the location of the registered terminal. [3301] LOCATED DETACH Displays the PHONE TYPE of the registered terminal. [3301] PHONE TYPE Displays the WLI NUMBER of the registered terminal.(currently not used) [3301] WLI NUMBER Displays the WBS NUMBER of the registered terminal. [3301] WBS NUMBER Displays the IP OFFSET of the registered terminal. [3301] IP OFFSET Displays the IP ADDRESS of the registered terminal. [3301] IP ADDRESS Displays the MAC ADDRESS of the registered terminal. [3301] MAC ADDR Register the USER ID of the terminal. [3301] USER ID 1212 Register the PASSWORD of the terminal. [3301] PASSWORD 0000 Register the INSERT DGT for the terminal. (These digits will be automatically inserted in front of user dialling digits when there are more than 4 digits and they do not start with the trunk access code or feature code.) [3301] INSERT DGT _ RELATED ITEMS MMC 848 MMC 849 WLAN IP/MAC LIST WLAN CONFIGURATION Samsung Business Communications 2-331 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST This MMC is used when viewing the IP list assigned to WLAN, or when creating a new IP list. This IP address is automatically assigned to WIP-5000M during a new registration procedure. If the IP address is already assigned, the assigned terminal number will be shown in the USED field. Also, the MMC is used to set MAC addresses in the terminal in order to use the wireless LAN.(not yet implemented) DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button, and enter 848. IP:001 USED: 0. 0. 0. 0 2) Select the menu.(0: IP LIST, 1: MAC LIST) IP:001 USED: 0. 0. 0. 0 3) Select the table number. IP:001 USED: _ 0. 0. 0. 0 4) Enter the IP ADDRESS. IP:001 USED: 168. 0. 0. 0 5) A number next to USED indicates the terminal number to which the IP ADDRESS was assigned. IP:001 USED:3301 168.219.149. 5 RELATED ITEMS MMC 846 MMC 849 2-332 WIP INFORMATION WLAN CONFIGURATION Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [849] WLAN CONFIGURATION This MMC is used to set the WLAN configuration. Parameter Description REGISTER VoWLAN Enable or disable registration of new WIP-5000M mobile phone. WIP REGIST CLEAR Used to clear the registration of WIP. FORCED mode clearing is used when the device is not connected normally(e.g., device broken), otherwise the NORMAL mode clearing can be used. WBS WEP SERVICE Enable or disable the WEP(Wired Equivalent Privacy) feature. WEP KEY Assign the WEP key.(13 characters only) STATIC WBS IP Select the use of Static WBS IP. STATIC WIP IP Select the use of Static WIP IP. SELECT AP Select if using DUAL AP or BASIC APs DEFAULT DATA REGISTER VoWLAN: DISABLE WIP REGIST CLEAR: FORCED WBS WEP SERVICE: DISABLE WEP KEY: NONE STATIC WBS IP: DISABLE STATIC WIP IP: DISABLE SELECT AP TYPE: BASIC AP(DEPENDS ON COUNTRY) ACTION 1) Press Transfer button, and press 849. DISPLAY ENTER PASSWORD _ 2) Enter the PASSCODE. (This PASSCODE is assigned in MMC 202 WLAN REGST) ENTER PASSCODE 3) Select ENABLE to register a terminal. REGISTER VoWLAN **** ENABLE 4) Select WIP REGIST CLEAR to clear the registration status for a terminal. WIP REGIST CLEAR 5) Select the WEP KEY setting when ENCRYPTION is selected. WBS WEP SERVICE Samsung Business Communications 3301:FORCED DISABLE 2-333 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 6) Enter WEP KEY values when the WBS WEP SERVICE is enabled.(13 characters only) WEP KEY 7) Select ENABLE to use the static WBS IP. STATIC WBS IP DISABLE 8) Select ENABLE to use the static WIP IP. STATIC WIP IP DISABLE 9) Select AP TYPE of the system. If you change the AP type, the system must be restarted. SELECT AP TYPE COMBO AP SELECT AP TYPE RESET SYSTEM?NO RELATED ITEMS MMC 846 MMC 848 2-334 WIP INFORMATION WLAN IP/MAC LIST Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY This MMC is used for system resource display.(used and free resources) This is a READONLY MMC. 0. 1. 2. 3. DTMFR DSP’S CID DSP’S R2MFC DSP’S CONF GROUP’S DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 850. Display shows: DTMFR DSP’S 2) Enter the option number.(0-3) OR Press Volume button to select. CID DSP’S USE:000 FREE:008 USE:000 FREE:008 3) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-335 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [851] ALARM REPORTING This MMC is used to view, store, print or clear system alarms. Two levels of faults are displayed via an alarm code: major alarms and minor alarms. Major alarms codes are usually service affecting and require a certified technician to determine the fault. A minor alarm indicates a fault that may or may not be service affecting and usually does not seriously degrade the system’s operating capabilities. The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a First In-First Out(FIFO) basis. Alarms provide a date and time stamp based on the system time. If applicable, the hardware cabinet, port, and/or slot will be displayed. If an ALARM SIO port is programmed(MMC 804), alarm information can be printed on demand and as it is provided. ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS(Select one of the options) No Option Description 0 VIEW ALARMS View alarm buffer. 1 OVERFLOW Determines buffer control when buffer is full. CONTROL 0 OVERWRITTEN: When buffer is full, the oldest entry in buffer is overwritten.(Default.) 1 STOP RECORDING: When buffer is full, stop recording alarms. 2 CLEAR ALARM BUF Clears alarm buffer. 3 PRINT ALARM BUF Prints contents of alarm buffer to the assigned alarm IO port. ALARM CODE DEFINITION See Alarm Code Definitions in MMC 852. DEFAULT DATA NONE 2-336 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 851. Display shows: SYS ALARM REPORT 2) Enter desired option. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. SYS ALARM REPORT 3) System displays the alarm count number, date and time stamp. Alarm type and cause code will display. [00] 02/18 14:30 4) Press Volume button to scroll through other alarms. OR Press Right Soft button to return to step 2. SYS ALARM REPORT VIEW ALARMS VIEW ALARMS MNF02 C1-S02 VIEW ALARMS 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS Samsung Business Communications 2-337 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS This MMC allows the assignment of system alarms to ring and display on stations that have an Alarm key assigned. The Alarm key is assigned in MMC 722(Station Key Programming). Alarm key programming is tenant wide(tenants 1 and 2). Alarms not programmed to report to the system Alarm key will still be retained in the maintenance alarm buffer for Alarm Reporting(MMC 851). The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a First In-First Out(FIFO) basis. Pressing the Alarm key will silence the audible alarm until another alarm is generated by the system. Alarm conditions that have multiple causes(e.g., PRI errors and synchronization loss) will print all associated alarm information if an SIO port is programmed as an ALARM port. The specific fault alarm data can be displayed via MMC 851, System Alarm Reporting. Alarm Notification Alarm Notification Off/On(0/1) determines if the alarm provides a visual and audible notification to the System Alarm key station(s). Pressing the System Alarm key and the release key will silence the audible alarm only at the station that pressed the System Alarm key and the release key. See alarm displays table for assignments. Alarm Code Definitions: No Code Alarm Name - MJA-- MCP2 Error 01 MJA01 POR Restart Definition System Fault MCP2 restart process has been executed via power on restart.(POR) 02 MJA02 Soft Restart MCP2 restart process has been executed via button reset. 03 MJA03 Mem Reset The system RAM has been cleared via manual programming(PCMMC or KMMC) resulting in a system reset. 04 MJA04 MCP Reset The MCP2 has software exception error. Alarm data = Reason - BUS ERR: Restart Bus Error - ADDR.ERR: Restart Address Error - ILLEGAL: Restart Illegal Opcode - ZERO DIVID: Restart Zero Divide - PRIVILEGE: Restart Privilege Violation - ENDL LOOP: Restart Endless Loop 05 MJA05 LCP Reset The SCP2 or LCP2 has reset Alarm data = Cabinet(1, 2 or 3) 06 MJA06 PCM Switching A fault has occurred in the Switching Control Alarm data = MCP BASE, ESM: 1, ESM: 2 or ESM: 3 2-338 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No Code Alarm Name Definition - MJB-- LCP/TASK Error LCP or TASK Fault 08 MJB01 HDLC Com Error Communications to LCP lost or faulty. 09 MJB02 Memory Alarm 1 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the MCP2. 10 MJB03 Memory Alarm 2 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in cabinet 1 SCP2. 11 MJB04 Memory Alarm 3 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in cabinet 2 LCP2. 12 MJB05 Memory Alarm 4 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in cabinet 3 LCP2. 13 MJB06 IPC MSGQ Over IPC TX queue full error has occurred in the MCP2. Alarm data = IPC Queue type (MCP-LAN, MCP-SCP, MCP-LCP1, MCP-LCP2) 14 MJB07 Task MSGQ Over Task MSG queue full error has occurred in the MCP2. Alarm data = Error Task 16 MJC-- DSP Error MJC01 DTMF Fault System DSP Fault An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system DTMF resources. Alarm data = DTMF Receiver DSP position 17 MJC02 Tone Fault An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system tone resources. Alarm data = TONE Receiver DSP position. 25 MJC10 AA-DTMF Fault An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card DTMF resources. Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz) 26 MJC11 AA-MFR Rec An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card DTMF resources has recovered. Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz) 27 MJC12 E911 Restart The E911 card has restarted. Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 28 MJC13 E911 Block The E911 card has blocked because the system detects the card does not work correctly. Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 31 MJC16 WLI Restart The WLI card has restarted. Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 32 MJC17 WLI Block The WLI card has blocked because the system detects the card does not work correctly. Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) Samsung Business Communications 2-339 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) No Code Alarm Name Definition - MJD-- DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault 33 MJD01 Sync Failure Clocking on TEPRI cards has become asynchronous. 34 MJD02 Sync Recovery Clocking on TEPRI cards has become synchronous. 35 MJD03 Red Alarm Locally detected loss of PCM carrier on TEPRI card for more than 250 ms. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 36 MJD04 Red Alarm Rec PCM carrier detected locally on TEPRI cards. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 37 MJD05 Yellow Alarm Remotely detected failure transmitted in frame on TEPRI card. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 38 MJD06 Yellow Alarm Remotely detected failure restored transmitted on Rec TEPRI card. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 39 MJD07 Blue Alarm All 1's being transmitted on facility on TEPRI card. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 40 MJD08 Blue Alarm Rec A blue alarm condition has been cleared. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 41 MJD09 Bit Error Alarm Alarm is activated when the error rate exceeds 1 x 10-6 -6 -3 errors. Note: 1x10 is threshold for minor alarm, 1 x 10 is threshold for major alarm errors on E1, PRI or BRI. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 42 MJD10 NTWRK Event An Implausible event has occurred on the PRI or BRI Network digital line. Protocols do not match or subscriber ID mismatch. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 43 MJD11 SPID Init Error The BRI received an error from the network. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz) 44 MJD12 SPID Init Rec The BRI has recovered from an error on the network Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz) 45 MJD13 LPBK Error Internal on demand loopback failed. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz) 46 MJD14 LPBK Recovery Internal on demand loopback test passed. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz) 47 MJD15 BRI DL Unavail A BRI data link is out of service. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz) 48 MJD16 BRI DL Recovery A BRI data link is back in service. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz) 49 MJD17 RAM Error An error has occurred in the TEPRI or BRI card RAM. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 2-340 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No Code Alarm Name - MJD-- DTRK Error 50 MJD18 E1 Restart Definition ISDN or E1 card Fault The E1 card has restarted. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 51 MJD19 PRI Restart The PRI card has restarted. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 52 MJD20 BRI Restart The BRI card has restarted. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 53 MJD21 PCM Loss Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 54 MJD22 PCM Recovery Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) - MJE-- MGI Error MGI card Fault 55 MJE01 MGI Restart The MGI card has restarted. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 56 MJE02 MGI Stop The MGI card has stoped. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 57 MJE03 MGI IP Duplicate The MGI card IP address is duplicated. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 58 MJE04 MGI NTWK Error The MGI card has blocked because the system detects the card doesn’t respond via network link. External ping test. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 59 MJE05 MGI NTWK Rec The MGI card has restarted because the system detects the card does respond via network link. External ping test. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 60 MJE06 MGI DSP Error The MGI card DSP has blocked because the system detects the card DSP does not run correctly. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy-Pzz) 61 MJE07 MGI DSP Run The MGI card DSP has restarted because the system detects the card DSP runs correctly. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy-Pzz) 62 MJE08 WBS Disconnect Indicates the WBS is disconnected. Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx 63 MJE09 WBS connect Indicates the WBS is connected. Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx Samsung Business Communications 2-341 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. (continued) No 64 Code Alarm Name Definition MNF-- Minor Error Minor Fault with Alarm Buffer saving MNF01 Card Out A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been removed from service or is not recognized by the system. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 65 MNF02 Card In A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been returned to service. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 66 MNF03 IPC Error Inter-processor communication error has occurred. Alarm Data = Cabinet-Slot(Cx-Syy) 67 MNF04 Trunk Fault Out of service trunk detected via loop detect. Internal CODEC test. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz) 68 MNF05 Trunk Recovery Out of service trunk detected via loop detected as out of service is now operational. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz) 69 MNF06 Trunk Discon- Out of service trunk detected via seizure of trunk. Exter- nect nal seizure test. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz) 70 MNF07 Trunk Connect Out of service trunk recovered via seizure of trunk. External seizure test. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz) 71 MNF08 SIO TxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2. Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x) 72 MNF09 SIO TxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2. Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x) 73 MNF10 E1 Out Of Srv E1 Digital line status has been changed to out of service. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 74 MNF11 E1 In Service E1 Digital line has been restored to normal service. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 75 MNF12 SIO Out IO port has lost DTR. Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x) 76 MNF13 SIO In IO port has regained DTR. Alarm Data = SIO 1 through 6 77 MNF14 TODC Error Time of Day Clock in the MCP2 has erred. 78 MNF15 TSW Over Alarm The TSW has been requested to exceed the capacity of available time slots. Maximum 192 per cabinet. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 79 MNF16 PSU Alarm There are more ports than can be supported in a cabinet and more power is required. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 2-342 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide (continued) No Code Alarm Name 80 MNF17 PSU Alarm Rec Definition Over-configuration of cabinet has been corrected. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 81 MNF18 SLI Fault An SLI card has been detected as out of service via an internal CODEC test. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz) 82 MNF19 SLI Recovery An SLI card detected as out of service has been detected as recovered and is in service via internal CODEC test. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz) 83 MNF20 PSUB Alarm Indicates there are over 120 ports in a cabinet with two PSUs. Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy) 84 MNF21 DSS Alarm System capacity of 64-button DSS modules has been exceeded. 85 MNF26 SIO RxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2. Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x) 86 MNF27 SIO RxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2. Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x) 87 MNF28 LAN Printer Err LAN printer error has occurred in the MCP2. Alarm Data = Data Type(SMDR) 88 MNF29 LAN Printer Rec LAN printer error has recovered in the MCP2. Alarm Data = Data Type(SMDR) 89 90 MNG-- Minor Error Minor Fault without Alarm Buffer saving MNG01 Phone Discon- Indicates the Phone is disconnected. nect Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz Phone Connect Indicates the Phone is connected. MNG02 Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz 91 MNG03 Off Hook Alarm Indicates Extension Off Hook Alarm timer has expired. Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz 92 MNG04 On Hook Indicates the Off Hook Alarm Extension is on hook. Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz 93 MNG05 MGI Packet Loss Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet loss is more than 10 %. Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz 94 MNG06 MGI Packet Delay Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet delay is more than 500 ms. Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz Samsung Business Communications 2-343 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. DEFAULT DATA ALL OFF ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 852. Display shows: 01:MJA01 ACT:OFF 2) Enter desired Alarm Display number.(e.g., 64) OR Press Volume buttons to select desired option and press Right Soft button to advance the cursor. 64:MNF01 ACT:OFF 3) To select if the alarm is active, press 1 for YES and 0 for NO. An entry will return the cursor to step 2. OR Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2. 64:MNF01 ACT:ON POR Restart Card Out Card Out 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 501 MMC 722 MMC 723 MMC 851 MMC 853 2-344 SYSTEM TIMERS STATION KEY PROGRAMMING SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING ALARM REPORTING MAINTENANCE BUSY Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [853] MAINTENANCE BUSY This MMC is used to place stations, trunks and common resources equipment in a maintenance busy condition. This can be used to isolate suspected intermittent problems. Stations placed in maintenance busy will behave like a station in DND when called. The calling stations display will show ‘MADE BUSY’. Stations receiving DID or E&M type calls will receive a DND/ No more calls tone. The station display will still function with station and date. When the busy station is accessed, it will function like a ‘locked all’ station. Trunks made busy cannot originate calls. Ring down type trunks will still ring the programmed destination. Common resource equipment such as DSPs, CID DSPs and miscellaneous equipment such as page ports and voice mail card ports can also be placed in a maintenance busy state. MAINTENANCE BUSY OPTIONS No Option Description 0 TRK Trunks 1 STN Stations 2 PAGE Page Ports 4 DTMFR DTMF Receiver(4/DSP) 5 CID CID Receiver(14/DSP) 6 R2MFC R2MFC Receiver(8/DSP) 7 CONF GRP #01-24 8 MGI MGI Ports DTMFR/CID/R2MFC DSP If DTMFR, CID or R2MFC is selected when DSP is not mounted, display will show NONE. If mounted, display will show IDLE by default. DEFAULT DATA ALL IDLE Samsung Business Communications 2-345 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 853. Display shows busy functions: MAINTENANCE BUSY 2) Enter busy function type(0-8) via dial keypad. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. MAINTENANCE BUSY 3) Enter station number. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. MAINTENANCE BUSY 4) Press 1 to make busy or 0 to make idle. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return step 3. MAINTENANCE BUSY TRK :NONEÆ STN :NONEÆ STN :201ÆIDLE STN :201ÆBUSY 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 851 MMC 852 2-346 ALARM REPORTING SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME Provides a means to set the Diagnostic Time. The system diagnostics tests include memory audits, internal loopback tests on digital trunks, and DSP, AA DSP tests. Additional tests include CODEC tests on analogue trunk and station cards and tone tests. If the diagnostics cannot complete the tests because of system traffic, the system will abort the tests and retry during the next programmed diagnostic time. It is recommended to assign the diagnostic time during non-peak traffic periods. DEFAULT DATA NO DIAGNOSTIC TIME SET ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 854. Display shows: DIAGNOSTIC TIME 2) Enter weekday number. (0: Sun, 1: Mon, …, 6: Sat) OR Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor. DIAGNOSTIC TIME 3) Enter hour(24-hour clock) via the dial keypad. Cursor will advance to next entry. DIAGNOSTIC TIME 4) Enter minutes(24-hour clock) via the dial keypad. Cursor will return to step 2. DIAGNOSTIC TIME SUN: : SUN:_ : SUN:23:_ SUN:23:30 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 851 MMC 852 MMC 853 ALARM REPORTING SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS MAINTENANCE BUSY Samsung Business Communications 2-347 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS This MMC lists the date, time and entry location of the last eight times that technicianlevel programming was accessed. This allows a technician to determine if there was unauthorized access to system programming and where this access occurred. The information stored in this log is displayed, for each of the eight accesses, as follows: first line shows the start date and time of access; second line shows the access type(see table) and end date and time of access. There are four access types: Type Description NNNN The extension number of a phone that accessed programming directly(e.g., 3203) MODEM Programming was accessed by PCMMC via the integrated V90 modem attached to the IOM board of the main cabinet. LAN Programming was accessed by PCMMC via the LAN connection on the MCP2 card of main cabinet. SIOx Programming was accessed by PCMMC via one of the SIO connections on the IOM board of the main cabinet, where x is the number(2 or 3) of the SIO port that was used. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 856. Display shows: (1) 11/22 11:03Æ 2) Enter number 1-8 for required access display. (e.g., 3) OR Press Volume button to scroll. (3) 11/22 12:30Æ 3203 :11/22 11:27 3203 :11/22 13:30 3) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 800 2-348 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [857] VIRTUAL CABINET SET This MMC is the program that specifies the type of virtual cabinet card. The type of virtual cabinet card is as follows: Range Type Type Range SLT C2S01 ~ C2S03 BRI STN C4S02 ~ C5S01 DGP C2S01 ~ C2S03 GCONF C4S02 ~ C5S01 STN WIRED ITP C3S01 ~ C4S01 SPNET TRK C3S02 ~ C5S03 WLAN ITP C3S01 ~ C4S01 SIP TRK C5S01 ~ C5S03 SIP STN C3S01 ~ C4S01 H323 TRK C5S01 ~ C5S03 IP UMS - DEFAULT DATA Cabinet 2 4 Slot Card Type 1 SLI 2 Cabinet 3 Slot Card Type 1 WIRED ITP DLI 2 WIRED ITP 3 DLI 3 WIRED ITP 1 WLAN ITP 1 SPNET TRK 2 BRI STN 2 SIP TRK 3 GCONF STN 3 H323 TRK 5 ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 857. Display shows: C4-S01:SLT 2) Enter number 1-3 for cabinet number and enter number 1-12 for slot number. OR Press Volume button to scroll. C4-S01:SLT Samsung Business Communications SLT SLT 2-349 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 3) Press Volume botton to scroll card type and Select card type by pressing Right soft botton. C4-S01:SLT DGP 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 724 NUMBER PLAB MMC 822 VIR.EXT TYPE 2-350 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY This MMC is used for system hardware EPLD/PCB version display. This is a READONLY MMC. No Option Description 1 MP CARD Shows the EPLD/PCB version of MCP. 2 C1S1 Shows the EPLD/PCB version of card in cabinet1/slot1. 3 C1S2 Shows the EPLD/PCB version of card in cabinet1/slot2 DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 859. Display shows: EPLD/PCB VERSION 2) Enter the option number. OR Press Volume button to scroll. EPLD/PCB VERSION MP CARD C1S1 : UNI :V30 :V30 3) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-351 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [861] SYSTEM OPTIONS Sets a number of system options. DEFAULT DATA AUTO UPDATE TIME: DISABLE SYSTEM SPEED BIN: MAX 500 IDLE WHEN ENBLOC: DISABLE 2 LINE ENBLOCK: DISABLE 2 ZONE EXT PAGE: DISABLE USE LB FOR PAGE: NONE LP TRK TONE DISC: DISABLE ISDN SS FEATURE: DISABLE SPNET OVERLAP: DISABLE SPNET CLI TABLE: NONE E-LCR CLI TABLE: NONE EXTERNAL BGM/MOH: INT.CHIME No 1 Option AUTO UPDATE TIME Description Sets enable(1) or disable(0) the system automatically time and date update from ISDN call connection message. If sets enable, when system receives ISDN call connection message, system checks valid data of encapsulated time and date, and update system time and date device. 2 SYSTEM SPPED BIN Sets max 500(0) or max 950(1) for the maximum number of system speed dial bin. 3 IDLE WHEN ENBLOC Decides the state of Large LCD Phone treated as idle or busy when the user of Large LCD Phone is dialling in ENBLOCK mode. 4 2 LINE ENBLOCK Decides the usage of ENBLOCK mode for 2 line LCD Phone with navigation buttons. 7 LP TRK TONE DISC When this option is set to ON, loop trunk can be disconnected by detecting busy tone. 8 ISDN SS FEATURE 9 SPNET OVERLAP Decides whether ISDN SS(Supplement Service) is used or not. To assign other dial tone, OVERLAP by spnet function can be enable. 10 SPNET CLI TABLE If network call and this option is set, CLI have to be applied by CLI TABLE. 11 E-LCR CLI TABLE If E-LCR call and this option is set, CLI have to be applied by CLI TABLE. 12 EXTERNAL BGM/MOH Backgroud music source can be use internal source or external source, In case of external source, music source can be supported in MISC port. 2-352 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 861. Display shows: AUTO UPDATE TIME 2) Enter the option number. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. AUTO UPDATE TIME Samsung Business Communications DISABLE DISABLE 2-353 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. 3) Enter 1 or 0 to enable or disable. OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to store. AUTO UPDATE TIME ENABLE 4) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS MMC 107 MMC 505 MMC 606 MMC 705 MMC 706 MMC 722 MMC 723 2-354 KEY EXTENDER ASSIGN DATE AND TIME ASSIGN SPEED DIAL BLOCK SYSTEM SPEED DIAL SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME STATION KEY PROGRAMMING SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide [863] NODE INFO This MMC allows 1000 systems to be connected by u spnet service. No Option Description 1 ACCESS NUM Sets the system node ID 2 IP ADDR Sets the system IP address 3 TEL NUMBER Sets the system CO tel number 4 MAX COUNT Sets this value to support ENBLOCK DIAL MODE. CONDITIONS NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 863. Display shows: (0001) ACCESS NUM 2) Select the entry number.(0001 ~ 2000) OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (0001) ACCESS NUM 3) Select the option number.(0~3) OR Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor. (e.g ACCESS NUM) (0001) ACCESS NUM 4) Enter the system node ID (0001) ACCESS NUM Right Soft button to save. 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE Samsung Business Communications 2-355 CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен. [890] INITIALIZE PORT This MMC clears a call process or initializes the database for specific station or trunks. This will return the port to default condition. DEFAULT DATA NONE ACTION DISPLAY 1) Press Transfer button and enter 890. Display shows: [201] CALL CLEAR 2) Enter the station or Trunk line. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press the Right Soft button to move cursor. [202] CALL CLEAR 3) Enter 0 to call clear only or 1 to initialize port. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press the Right Soft button to move cursor. [202] DB INITIAL 4) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO. OR Press Volume button to make selection and press the Right Soft button to save and return to step 2. [202] DB INITIAL ARE YOU SURE?NO ARE YOU SURE?NO ARE YOU SURE?NO ARE YOU SURE?YES 5) Press Transfer button to save and exit. OR Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC. RELATED ITEMS NONE 2-356 Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ABBREVIATION A AAA Authentication, Authorization and Accounting AC Alternating Current ACD Automatic Call Distribution ALG Application Level Gateway AME Answering Machine Emulation AMI Alternate Mark Inversion AOM Add On Module AP Access Point BGM Background Music B BRI Basic Rate Interface BWBS Basic Wireless Base Station(Access Point) CA Call Agent CCBS Call Completion to Busy Subscriber CCNR Cell Completion on No Reply CID Caller Identification CLI Call Line Identification COM Communication COS Class Of Service CPLD Complex Programmable Logic Device CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code CR Mode Constant Resistance Mode CSU Communication Service Unit C CTI Computer Telephony Integration CWBS Combo Wireless Base Station(Access Point) Samsung Business Communications I Ошибка! Стиль не определен. D DASL Digital Adapter Subscriber Loops DID Direct Inward Dialling DECT Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications DGP Digital Phone DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DLI Digital Line Interface DND Do Not Disturb DPIM Door Phone Interface Module DSP Digital Signal Processor DSU Data Service Unit DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency E&M Ear&Mouth E EMI Electro-Magnetic Interference ESM Expanded Switch Module GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GK Gatekeeper GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol HDLC High level Data Link Control HLR Home Location Register HTML Hypertext Markup Language HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol ID Identification IDS Intrusion Detection System G H I II IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol IMAP Internet Messaging Access Protocol IN-SCP Intelligent Network Service Control Point IOM Input/Output Module Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide IP Internet Protocol IPC Inter-Processor Communication IPDC Internet Protocol Device Control IPM Inter-Processor Communications and Memory Module IP-SCP Internet Protocol Service Control Point ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ISUP ISDN User Part ITM IP Telephony Module ITP IP Telephone KDB Keyset Daughterboard K L LAN Local Area Network LCD Liquid Crystal Display LCP Local Control Processor LED Light Emitting Diode LIM LAN Interface Module MCP Main Control Processor MDF Main Distribution Frame MEGACO Media Gateway Control MFM Multi Frequency Module MG Media Gateway MGC Media Gateway Controller M MGI Media Gateway Interface MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol MISC Miscellaneous Function Module MMC Man Machine Communication MWSLI Message Waiting Single Line Interface NAT Network Address Translation NMS Network Management System N Samsung Business Communications III Ошибка! Стиль не определен. O OPX Off Premises Extension PAT Port Address Translation PBA Printed(circuit) Board Assembly PCB Printed Circuit Board PCM Pulse Code Modulation PCMMC PC-based Man Machine Communication PLL Phase Locking Loop POP3 Post Office Protocol version 3 PPP Point to Point Protocol PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PRI Primary Rate Interface PRS Polarity Reverse Detection PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PSU Power Supply Unit Q-SIG Q-Signalling QoS Quality of Service RCM R2/CID Module RIP Routing Information Protocol RTCP Real-time Transmission Control Protocol RTP Real-time Transmission Protocol SCM Switch and Conference Module P Q R S IV SCP Signal Control Processor SDP Session Description Protocol SG Signalling Gateway SGCP Simple Gateway Control Protocol SIGTRAN Signalling Transport SIO Serial Input/Output SIP Session Initiation Protocol Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide SLI Single Line Interface SLT Single Line Telephone SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SoL Server optimized Linux STA Spanning Tree Algorithm STP Signalling Transfer Point SVMi Samsung Voice Mail(integrated) TAPI Telephony Application Programming Interface TCAP Transmission Control Application Part TCP Transmission Control Protocol TEPRI T1E1PRI TRK Trunk UA User Agent UAC User Agent Client UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter UAS User Agent Server UCD Uniform Call Distribution UDP User Datagram Protocol UPS Uninterruptible Power System USB Universal Serial Bus VDIAL Voice Dial T U V VLAN Virtual LAN VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol VPM Voice Processing Module VPN Virtual Private Network Samsung Business Communications V Ошибка! Стиль не определен. W WAN Wide Area Network WBS Wireless Base Station WIM WAN Interface Module WLI Wireless LAN Interface xDSL x-Digital Subscriber Line X VI Samsung Business Communications OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide ©2007 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Information in this giude is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. No information contained here may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG. Information in this guide is subject to change without notice.
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : Yes XMP Toolkit : 3.1-701 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows) Create Date : 2007:08:21 11:53:22+04:00 Creator Tool : PScript5.dll Version 5.2 Modify Date : 2007:08:21 11:53:22+04:00 Format : application/pdf Title : Microsoft Word - UK_OfficeServ 7100 call Server Programming Guide.doc Creator : Butsev_L Document ID : uuid:b44747f9-ff80-4f1c-ad85-f00fa901c03d Instance ID : uuid:8692f01f-2b0a-4923-8dd9-17a3ac703124 Page Count : 407 Author : Butsev_LEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools